System 1 Machinery Management User Guide - 109M8639

System 1 Machinery Management
User Guide
Bently Nevada Machinery Condition Monitoring 109M8639 Rev. L
User Guide 109M8639 Rev. L
Copyright 2021 Baker Hughes Company. All rights reserved.
Bently Nevada, Orbit Logo and System 1 are registered trademarks of Bently Nevada, a Baker
Hughes Business, in the United States and other countries. The Baker Hughes logo is a trademark
of Baker Hughes Company. All other product and company names are trademarks of their
respective holders. Use of the trademarks does not imply any affiliation with or endorsement by
the respective holders.
Baker Hughes provides this information on an “as is” basis for general information purposes.
Baker Hughes does not make any representation as to the accuracy or completeness of the
information and makes no warranties of any kind, specific, implied or oral, to the fullest extent
permissible by law, including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose or use.
Baker Hughes hereby disclaims any and all liability for any direct, indirect, consequential or
special damages, claims for lost profits, or third party claims arising from the use of the
information, whether a claim is asserted in contract, tort, or otherwise. Baker Hughes reserves the
right to make changes in specifications and features shown herein, or discontinue the product
described at any time without notice or obligation. Contact your Baker Hughes representative
for the most current information.
The information contained in this document is the property of Baker Hughes and its affiliates;
and is subject to change without prior notice. It is being supplied as a service to our customers
and may not be altered or its content repackaged without the express written consent of Baker
Hughes. This product or associated products may be covered by one or more patents. See
Bently.com/legal.
1631 Bently Parkway South, Minden, Nevada USA 89423

Phone: 1.775.782.3611 (US) or Bently.com/support
Bently.com
2/8
Contents
1. License and Registration 1
1.1 Install System 1 and License Server 1
1.2 Register License Server 1
1.3 Add Licenses to a License Server 4
1.4 Manage System 1 Server Licenses 4
Assign License to System 1 Server 5
Remove License from a System 1 Server 6
Revoke a System 1 Server License 7
Move a System 1 License Server 8
1.5 System 1 License Options 8
Install System 1 and License Server 8
License Manager Overview 8
License Packages 9
License Restrictions 10
1.6 License Proficy Add-on 13
1.7 Proficy VM Licensing 16
2. Install System 1 20
2.1 Patch Operating Systems 21
2.2 Install System 1 25
2.3 Connect to a Database 29
2.4 Select Client and Server Options 32
2.5 Install Remote Comms 35
2.6 Set up Firewall Rules and Service Ports 35
2.7 Devices Supported by System 1 38
2.8 Review Data Storage Requirements 47
2.9 Enable Data Collection 49
2.10 Collect 3500 TDI Alarm Data 51
2.11 Collect ADAPT 3701 Data 52
2.12 Collect 2300 Data 56
Collecting Alarm Events 56
2.13 Add Bently Performance 56
Integrate Bently Performance into System 1 56
Before You Install Bently Performance 56
Install System 1 Bently Performance 58
Configure DCOM Settings 59
Configure Spreadsheets 64
Configure Bently Performance 66
Configure Predictive Emission Monitoring System 68
3/8
Display Bently Performance 69

Overlay Performance Maps 71
Add and Update Data Manually 72
3. Configuration 74
3.1 Select Configure Mode 74
3.2 Modify Asset and Devices Hierarchy 74
3.3 Configuration Capacity 79
3.4 Add Monitoring Devices 79
Add Ranger Pro Gateway 83
Add Commtest vbOnline Device 86
Add 3500 Device 87
Add TDISecure Device 88
Add Modbus TCP Devices 88
Add 3701 Device 97
Add 2300 Device 98
Add vbOnline Pro Device 99
Add OPC DA Server 115
Add OPC UA Server 136
Add 6.x Device 141
Add Trendmaster DSM Device 146
Add Orbit 60 Device 175
Synchronize Devices 177
Import Device IP Addresses 179
Authenticate Devices 179
3.5 Create Machine Train Diagram 180
Create a Machine Train Diagram 181
Add Asset Groups 184
Add Crank Angle Bands 185
Add Performance Measurements 188
3.6 Modify Machine or Device Properties 189
Modify Asset Properties 191
Modify Isentropic Process Properties 195
Modify Gas Composition Properties 196
Associate Chambers to Stages 199
Propagate Speed Across Trains 200
Use the Bearing Database 204
Advanced Bearing Properties 206
3.7 Add Instrumentation to Assets 210
Quick Configure Measurements 210
Instrument Assets Manually 216
4/8
Configure Wind Turbine Properties 237

3.8 Modify Instrumentation Properties 238
Modify Channel Properties 238
Modify Spectrums and Waveforms 240
Modify Trended Variables 241
Modify Setpoints 241
Import and Export Setpoints 242
Quick Configure Alarms 243
3.9 Manage User Templates 247
Edit a Template Instance 251
Export and Import Templates 253
Unlink a Template Instance 254
Delete a Template 255
3.10 Map Points 255
Create a Custom Mapping Point 258
3.11 Create Diagnostic Reports 260
Create Route Reports 262
Create Percent Change Report 268
3.12 Configure Data Collection States and Points 270
3.13 Add Alarm Summary 281
3.14 Cascade Speed Across Trains 285
3.15 Configuration Examples 286
Example: Create and Build a Database 286
Example: Gather and Import Portable Data 287
Example: Configure Assets 295
Example: Configure vbOnline Pro Devices 300
Example: Set up Condition Monitoring 307
Example: Statistically Configure Alarms 311
Example: Configure Complex Gearbox 316
Example: Roll Section 330
4. Display HMI Views and Asset Status 333
4.1 Build HMI View 333
Create a HMI View 333
Add Machine Train Measurements 335
Customize the HMI View 338
Link HMI Shape to Alarm Status 341
Manage HMI Templates 342
HMI Diagram Shortcut Keys 344
Add Shapes to a HMI Diagram 346
Navigate the HMI View 347
5/8
4.2 Display Plots 347

Display Full Mode or Split Mode 350
Display a Trend Plot 351
Display a Bode Plot 351
Display a Polar Plot 352
Display a Shaft Centerline Plot 354
Display a XvsY Plot 355
Display a Spectrum Plot 356
Display a Waterfall Plot 358
Display a Cascade Plot 359
Display a Timebase Plot 360
Display an Orbit Timebase Plot 361
Display a Recip Plot 362
Display a Band Waterfall Plot 363
Display a Rod Position Plot 364
Display an Air Gap Plot 364
Display a Rotor Stator Plot 365
Add Plot Measurements 366
4.3 Plot Context Menus 367
Plot Cursors 369
Cursor Readout Pane 373
Plots Scale 375
Locate Peak 377
Set Speed 378
Overlay Fault Frequency 379
Scattered Plot 384
Setpoint Visibility 384
Reset Plot Location 386
Spectral Band 386
Reset Plot Location 389
Y-Axis Unit 389
Include Invalid Data 390
Color Date by State 392
Plot Labels 393
Shaft Centerline Plot Labels 393
Show Vector 394
Keyphasor Notch 394
Clearance Boundary 394
Set Time Range 394
Compensation Data 394
6/8
Copy Plot 398

Export to CSV 398
4.4 Plot Toolbar 399
Plot Cursors 402
Cursor Readout Pane 406
Synchronize Cursors 407
Scale Plots 409
Link Cursors To Samples 411
Scale Plots 411
Sync Zoom Plots 414
Compare Machine Data 416
Compensation Data 419
Setpoint Visibility 423
Spectral Band 425
Overlay Fault Frequency 428
Plot Diagnostic Report 433
4.5 Display Plot Options 435
Display Plot Headers 435
Manage Plot Records 436
Display Plots in External Window 438
Filter Machine States 439
User-Defined Plot Sets 440
Control Plot Display 441
Plot Information Drawer 446
Drag and Drop Measurements 449
Select or Add Plot Samples 451
Plot Preferences 453
4.6 Select Plot Data Range 454
Plot Group and Stack Options 455
Group By Train 457
Group By Machine Case 458
Group By Throw 459
Group By Bearing 460
Group By Point 461
Sort Plots by Point or Plot Type 462
4.7 Display Asset Status 463
View Machine and Device Status 463
HMI View Icons 467
Sort HMI Status Tiles 469
Set Assets as Normal 470
7/8
Review Fault Conditions 471

Multiselect and Compare Data 473
Bar Graph Tasks 474
Event and Status Indicators 476
4.8 Manage Events 480
Manage Alarm Events 480
Acknowledge Alarms 484
Suppress Events 490
View System Health 491
View Plots from Alarms 491
Copy Events To Clipboard 493
4.9 Manage History Tasks 493
Manage Case History Reviews 494
Manage Plot Records 497
Manage Case History Notes 498
4.10 Manage Data 501
Delete Data 501
Move Data 503
Export Hierarchy Data to CSV 506
Create Machine Audit Files 507
4.11 Export Using OPC Protocol 511
Configure OPC UA Server for Export 513
Configure OPC UA Third-party Certificates 523
Use OPC DA Client to Access Data 524
Export Data as OPC Items 525
Export to an OPC DA Server 526
5. Installation Errors 530
6. Support Options 532
8/8
1. License and Registration

Versions of System 1 prior to 18.1 used paper-based licensing. To apply a new license, first
Upgrade System 1.
1.1 Install System 1 and License Server

You can install the License Server on the same machine as System 1 or on another machine on
the network.
To install and license System 1:
1. Access the Licensing Portal

(https://bhge.flexnetoperations.com/flexnet/operationsportal).
2. To log in, use the username and password provided in the email notifying you of your
Baker Hughes Software Portal account.
3. On the Licensing Portal dashboard, locate Your Downloads. Choose System 1 and
download and install System 1.
If you are running System

Then License Manager:
1:
On a single machine Is automatically installed on the same machine.
Can be installed manually as a standalone server on a

separate machine.
To install the License Manager manually:
a. In the expanded System 1 download package,

locate the License Server directory.
b. Open it and run LicenseServer.exe.
On multiple machines on the
same network c. Follow the instructions to install it on each
machine.
d. Verify that License Server is running:
A. Open Windows Services Management
Console.
B. Locate FlexNet License Server.
C. Verify that the service is running.
1.2 Register License Server

The first time you use a License Server, you must register it on the Licensing Portal.
To register a License Server:
1/532
1. Launch System 1 License Manager.

2. Connect to a License Server. In the License Server IP Address field, if you are running
System 1 on:
o The same machine, use localhost.
o More than one machine, enter an IP address or machine name.
3. Click Connect . The License Panel is updated and displays the message No licenses
found.
4. Choose Manage > Register License Server. The Register License Server dialog box is
displayed.
4. Enter your Activation ID, found in one of these locations:

o View the confirmation email received from Bently Nevada Baker Hughes containing
your Activation ID. Continue with See Select the package license Activation ID you
want to use for this server and copy it to the clipboard. below..
o Visit the Licensing Portal and copy your Activation ID.
5. To obtain your Activation ID online, log in to the Licensing Portal
6. Choose Activations and Entitlements > List Entitlements. The List Entitlements pane is
displayed.
7. Select the package license Activation ID you want to use for this server and copy it to the
clipboard.
8. On your local machine, open License Manager.
9. Paste the Activation ID and click Save. Windows File Explorer is displayed.
10. Navigate to a preferred directory location. You can rename the file, but do not modify the
file extension.
11. Save the License File. The Register License Server dialog box is displayed.
12. Click OK. If the local computer is not Internet-enabled, use a flash drive or any other file
transfer media permitted in your environment to transfer the .BIN license file to an Internet-
2/532
enabled computer.
13. Access the Licensing portal

14. Choose Devices > Offline Device Management. The Offline Device Management panel is
displayed.
15. Click Browse. Windows File Explorer is displayed.
16. Locate and select the License File. Click Open and then click Upload. A confirmation
message is displayed.
17. To verify that the device is registered and renamed, choose Devices > Devices. The Device
panel displays a list of registered License Servers.
3/532
a. Click the name of the License Server you just registered. The View Server panel
displays information about the License Server.
b. To more easily identify the new License Server later on, click the Name field and enter
a descriptive, recognizable name. Click Save.
The License Server is registered.
1.3 Add Licenses to a License Server

When you register a license server, a license is automatically assigned to it using the Activation
ID you provide. Depending on the license package you purchased, you may want to map
additional licenses to the License Server before you create and apply the license file. This feature
enables you to combine multiple package licenses to form a + package.
To map additional licenses to a License Server:
1. Visit the Licensing portal (https://bhge.flexnetoperations.com/flexnet/operationsportal)

and log in.
2. Choose Devices > Devices. The Device panel is displayed.
3. Click the name of the License Server you previously registered. The View Server panel is
displayed.
4. Click Action > Map Entitlements. The Map Entitlements panel is displayed. All available
license are displayed.
5. Select the package you want to add to the License Server and in the Qty to Add column,
enter the number of licenses. Click Save.
6. The Map Entitlements panel is updated with the additional license.
7. To generate the license file for use by the License Server, choose Action > Download
Capability Response. You are prompted to save the file.
8. Save the license file to your local machine. You can rename the file, but do not modify the
file extension. If the computer running System 1 License Manager is not Internet-enabled,
use a flash drive or any other file transfer media permitted in your environment to transfer
the .BIN license file from the Internet-enabled computer to the computer running the
License Manager.
9. On the local machine, open License Manager. If necessary, connect to the License Server.
10. Choose Manage > Transfer licenses from web portal. The Transfer Licenses dialog box is
displayed.
11. Choose Browse. Windows File Explorer is displayed.
12. Locate and select the License File. Click Open and then click Transfer. A confirmation
message is displayed.
13. Click OK. The licenses are displayed in System 1 License Manager.
1.4 Manage System 1 Server Licenses
4/532
Use the System 1 License Manager to manage licenses assigned to one or more System 1
Servers.
Assign License to System 1 Server

When you register a license server, a license is automatically assigned to it using the activation
ID you provided during the registration process. You must generate a license file on the web
portal and transfer the file to the System 1 License Manager.
To assign a license to a System 1 Server:
1. Launch System 1 License Manager.

2. Connect to a License Server if necessary. In the License Server IP Address field:
a. If you are running System 1 on the same machine, use localhost.
b. If you are running System 1 on a more than one machine, enter an IP address or
machine name.
3. Click Connect . The License Panel displays current licenses.
4. Choose Manage > Assign licenses to System 1. The License Assignment dialog box is
displayed.
5. To connect to the System 1 Server, click Connect. The License Assignment dialog box
displays package licenses available to be assigned.
6. Select the package license you want to assign to the System 1 Server. The Selected License
displayed is updated depending on the packages you select.
5/532
7. Click Save. The License Assignment dialog box displays licenses available to be assigned.
8. There are two ways to verify that the package license has been successfully assigned.
o In System 1 License Manager, choose System 1 Servers. Verify that the server has the
correct licenses assigned to it.
o In System 1, the title bar displays the database name followed by the license
package name.
Remove License from a System 1 Server

When you move machines or make other changes in your database, you can remove a license
assigned to a System 1 server. That license is then available on the License Server, enabling you
to reuse it.
To remove licenses assigned to a System 1 server:
1. Launch License Manager.

2. Connect to a License Server. In the License Server IP Address field:
machine name.
4. Choose Manage > Assign Licenses to System 1. The License Assignment dialog box is
displayed.
6/532
5. To connect to the System 1 Server, click Connect. The License Assignment dialog box
displays assigned licenses.
6. Clear the check box for a license package or a package/term combination.
7. Click Save.
The license is returned to License Server's pool of licenses.
Revoke a System 1 Server License

You can revoke licenses assigned to a System 1 server if:
l The computer on which the System 1 Server is installed has crashed and cannot be
recovered.
l An error occurs when the System 1 License Manager tries to return licenses to the License
Server.
When you revoke a license assigned to a System 1 server, the license becomes available on the
License Server, enabling you to reuse it.
To revoke licenses assigned to a System 1 server:
1. Launch License Manager.

2. Connect to a License Server. In the License Server IP Address field:
machine name.
4. Choose Tools > Recover System 1 Licenses. The License Manager displays a list of System 1
servers.
5. Select the System 1 server on which the licenses you want to remove are assigned.
6. Click Remove. The license manager revokes the licenses assigned to the System 1 server.
The licenses are available on the License Server for reuse.
7/532
Move a System 1 License Server

If you want to replace the machine on which the License Server is currently installed, you can
move the License Server.
To move the System 1 License Server to a new computer:
1. Visit the Licensing portal (https://bhge.flexnetoperations.com/flexnet/operationsportal)

and log in.
2. Choose Devices > Devices. The Device panel displays a list of registered license servers.
3. Copy the name and ID of the License Server you want to replace.
4. Visit Bently Nevada Techncal Support (http://bntechsupport.com) and log in.
5. Create a support case. Provide Bently Nevada Technical Support with the name and ID of
your current license server. Tech support releases the licenses associated with your
current license server.
6. Install License Manager and register the new License Server on the licensing web portal.
1.5 System 1 License Options
Install System 1 and License Server

To run System 1 License Manager:
1. Log into a Windows administrator account.

2. Select Windows Start > All Programs.
3. Choose Bently Nevada > System 1 > Tools.
4. Choose System 1 License Manager.
Use the System 1 License Manager to enable package licensing for the System 1 Server. Licensing
is only necessary for the machine hosting the System 1 Server service and databases.
License Manager Overview

The System 1 License Manager has the following tabs:
l Licenses tab displays a list of all licenses available on the System 1 license server and
detailed information about each license.
l System 1 Servers tab displays a list of all System 1 servers and their assigned license
packages.
8/532
License Packages
These System 1 license packages are available:
License
Description
Package
Fundamental Monitor offline data collected with portable devices only.
Advanced Connect to OPC servers, and vbOnline Pro, 2300, Ranger Pro and 6.x devices.
Advanced
Combines Fundamental and Advanced packages.
Plus
Connect to OPC servers, and 3500, TDISecure, 3701, vbOnline Pro devices, 2300,
Premium
Ranger Pro, and 6.x devices.
Premium Plus Combines Fundamental and Premium packages.
Wind Monitor wind turbines using vbOnline Pro devices.
Add-on package available to GE REN wind customers who have enabled their
GE REN
analytics measurements. You can subscribe to this license for GE renewable
Analytics
analytics measurements and data computations
Available License Add-ons

Three add-ons are available.
Type Term Description
Ge Renewables
Subscription Monitor wind turbines with GE Renewables Analytics.
Analytics
Enhanced Condition Monitoring with Rules and

Decision Support Perpetual
Analytics
Enhanced Condition Monitoring with Rules and

Decision Support Subscription
Analytics
9/532
License Restrictions
Current licensing restrictions are:
l The license package applied to the System 1 Server determines database restrictions.
l Database creation is restricted if no licenses have been applied to the server.
Data Storage Restrictions
License Type
Feature Advanced Premium
Fundamental Advanced Premium
Plus Plus
High Resolution
- 30 days @ 30 days @ 30 days @ 30 days @
Trend Data
30 seconds 30 seconds 1 second 1 second
Summarized
Trend Data 5 years @ 5 years @ 5 years @ 5 years @
5 years
5 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes
Alarm Data -
Start up/
- - -
Shutdown Data
Decision Support -
Condition Monitoring Restrictions
10/532
License Type
Plus Plus
Asset Models
Software
Alarming
State-Based
-
Alarming
Diagram View
List View
Alarm & Event List
Notes
Diagnostic
Reporting
Plots Restrictions
11/532
License Type
Plus Plus
Trend
Bode -
Polar - - -
Shaft Centerline -
XvsY -
Spectrum
Waterfall
Cascade - - -
Timebase
Orbit
Recip - - -
Rod Position - - -
Bar Graphs -
Air Gap - - -
Rotor Stator - - -
Client View Restrictions
The System 1 Client view depends on the license package applied when connected to the server:
12/532
License Type
Plus Plus
Devices hierarchy -
Mapping Mode -
Route Mode - -
Device Menu
- -
(Menu Bar)
Quick Config Tool - -
Enable Online
-
Data Collection
1.6 License Proficy Add-on

If you are installing the Proficy add-on, you must first activate the Proficy license. After activation,
the Proficy license is device locked. The license client does not attempt to connect to the Proficy
license server again.
Start Proficy License Client

To start the Proficy License Client:
1. From Windows Start menu, choose All Programs.

2. Choose Bently Nevada > System 1 License Manager.
3. Choose License Client. If no license is installed, the License Client displays the available
options in the Activate Licenses tab.
13/532
4. Choose a license option from the list, and follow the instructions.
Proficy License Server

The local license server is required only for licensing Proficy on a virtual machine.
You can install the license server using one of these options:
l Install the license server on a network accessible server with which the virtual machine can
communicate.
l Install the license server locally on the virtual machine.
To install the local license server:
1. Navigate to Proficy License Manager folder on the System 1 installation disk.

2. Run ProficyLicenseServerInstaller.exe.
3. Run ProficyServerConfigurationInstaller.exe.
4. Launch the Local License Server Administration Tool and activate the license.
5. Follow the steps for local license server.
Complete Licensing
After applying a Proficy license, you must restart the Historian Data Archiver service. Otherwise,
14/532
System 1 does not recognize a Proficy license has been applied.
Return a Proficy License

To return a Proficy license to the license server:
1. Start Proficy License Client.

2. Choose Return Licenses tab.
3. Choose a license from the list, and choose Return.
Offline Proficy Licensing

To use a network drive or portable media device for offline Proficy licensing:
On an offline computer:
1. Launch Proficy License Client.
2. Choose Activate Licenses tab.
3. Select the option to activate a license for an offline computer.
4. Enter your Activation ID, found in one of these locations:
o View the confirmation email received from Bently Nevada Baker Hughes containing
your Activation ID.
o Visit the Licensing Portal
(https://bhge.flexnetoperations.com/flexnet/operationsportal) and copy your
Activation ID.
15/532
5. Choose Generate File. The License Client tool generates a request file that contains your
license activation ID and computer information.
On an online computer:
1. Transfer the request file to an online computer.
3. Choose Complete Offline Process tab.
4. Select the option to generate a response file from an online computer.
5. Navigate to the directory where the request file is stored and select it.
6. Choose Generate File. The License Client tool generates a response file.
On your offline computer:

1. Transfer the response file to your offline computer within 24 hours.
3. Choose Complete Offline Processes tab.
4. Select the option to use the response file to update the license.
5. Navigate to the directory where the response file is stored and select it.
6. Choose Update Licenses. The License Client tool activates your Proficy license.
1.7 Proficy VM Licensing

If you are installing System 1 version 19.1 or earlier on a virtual machine, you must first the activate
Proficy license. The following requirements must be met to obtain a license for Proficy from a
virtual machine:
l The license must be activated from a license server or hardware key.

l You must install and manage the license server.
The initial license is leased for 21 days. The license client renews the lease by extending it
automatically one day at a time. If the license client cannot contact the local license server, you
can continue using the application until the expiration date.
Step 1 - Install Local License Server on the Virtual Machine

1. Install System 1 with High Performance Settings, if applicable.
2. Access System 1 installation disk.
3. Select <CD-DRIVE>\{Proficy License Manager}\ directory.
4. Double-click ProficyLicenseServerInstaller.exe to launch the license server installer.
The installer walks you through the installation process.
5. Double-click ProficyServerConfigurationInstaller.exe to launch the server configuration
16/532
installer.
The installer walks you through the installation process.
Step 2 - Activate License on the Local License Server

1. From Windows Start menu, launch Local License Server Administration Tool.
2. Click Add Licenses. The Add Licenses to Server pane is displayed.
3. In the Add Licenses to Server pane, enter the Proficy license code you received with your
order.
4. Click Add Code and then click Activate.
5. The tool walks you through the process to activate the license on the local license server.
Step 3 - Register the Proficy License With the Virtual Machine

1. From Windows Start menu, locate and launch the Proficy program named License Client.
2. Navigate to the Activate Licenses tab.
3. Choose Yes, for this computer from a local license server.
4. Ensure the Local Server connection URL is http://localhost and the Local Server Port is
3333.
5. Select the license you just added from the list:
17/532
If licenses are not displaying, click Display Available Licenses to refresh the view.
6. Choose Activate.
7. Navigating to the View Licenses tab to verify the license is active.
18/532
Finalize Licensing
After applying a Proficy license, you must restart the Historian Data Archiver service to
complete the licensing process. Otherwise, System 1 does not recognize a Proficy license has
been applied.
19/532
2. Install System 1
Before proceeding, you must:
1. Uninstall prior versions of System 1.

2. Install all required Windows Patch Operating Systems.
3. Read about updates, warnings, and version issues in the ReadMe file located the root
directory on the installation files.
4. Complete product licensing.
5. Then install System 1 and begin configuration. There is not a single "right way" or a correct
order required to configure your machines and assets.
The current version of System 1 is compatible with the two prior releases.
Download the System 1 installation file from the Flexera licensing server or insert the provided DVD
into the computer.
Prepare to Install System 1

1. Run Setup.exe. If it fails to start, locate and manually run Setup. Follow the setup wizard
instructions.
20/532
2. Choose how you will install the software.
If you want
Then:
to:
Upgrade
from System System 1 continues to use Proficy as the historian.
1 19.1 or earlier
Install
System 1 uses PostgreSQL is used as the historian. If you need to use
System 1 19.2
Proficy as the historian, or intend to restore a Proficy database, first locate
or later for
the {Proficy Historian Add-on} directory in the System 1 installation files
the first time
and install the Proficy Add-on. (.NET Framework 3.5 is required to run the
on a new
Proficy Historian add-on.)
machine
Migrate System 1 stores Boolean and enum measurements as enum

System 1 measurements in your database.
Classic 6.81+
to S1 Evo Boolean and enum measurements migrated prior to System 1 18.2 release
are not affected. After the database is migrated, these measurements
remain as float data in your database.
To convert these measurements to an enum data type, you can delete

and migrate them again. Asset mapping is not retained for the
measurements.
If an error occurs during installation, remove all installed components and restart the
installation.
3. To view the license agreements, see main installation folder.

4. System 1 and vbX Manager software icons are created in the System 1 program group. To
complete firmware upgrades, use vbX Manager.
5. Log in to the computer as an Administrator.
Using the System 1 Replication Service

If you are upgrading System 1 and previously configured the Replication Service to run under a
specific user account, you must re-enter the user credentials after upgrade.
We also recommend:
l Configure the Replication Service to use a start up type of Automatic (Delayed Start).
l Set all failure actions in the Recovery tab to Restart the Service.
2.1 Patch Operating Systems

Apply these required patches to operating systems before you install System 1.
21/532
To complete the offline patching process:
1. Identify the list of patches for your operating system.

2. Navigate to each patch and download it.
3. Install each of these updates in the order given.
Windows 8.1 (x64)

Always install each of these updates in the order given.
1. Update 1 (if not already installed)

o March 2014 servicing stack update for Windows 8.1 Windows 8.1-KB2919442-x64.msu
(10.2 MB)
o Windows 8.1 Update for x64-based Systems (KB2919355) (889 MB)
n clearcompressionflag.exe
n KB2919355
n KB2932046
n KB2959977
n KB2937592
n KB2938439
n KB2934018
2. Update for Windows 8.1 x64-based Systems (KB3000850) (774.4 MB)
o KB3000850
o KB3003057
o KB3014442
3. 2021-04 Servicing stack update for Windows 8.1 for x64-based Systems (KB5001403) (10.4
MB)
4. 2021-04 Security Monthly Quality Rollup for Windows 8.1 for x64-based Systems
(KB5001382) (538.6MB)
Install System 1 and then install this .NET update:
5. 2021-02 .NET Framework September 2020 Security and Quality Rollup for .NET Framework
3.5, 4.5.2, 4.6, 4.6.1, 4.6.2, 4.7, 4.7.1, 4.7.2, 4.8 for Windows 8.1 and Server 2012 R2 for x64
(KB4603004) (201.6 MB)
Some patches contained in this .NET update do not apply to all computers. They will fail to install
without affecting your system.
Monthly Quality Rollup for Windows and .NET are released every month. You must
download and install the latest release.
Windows 10 (x64)
Cumulative Update for Windows 10 is released every month. You must download and install the
22/532
latest release.
1909
1. 2021-04 Servicing Stack Update for Windows 10 Version 1909 for x64-based Systems
(KB5003155) (14.5 MB)
2. 2021-04 Cumulative Update for Windows 10 Version 1909 for x64-based Systems
(KB5001337) (560.7 MB)
3. 2021-02 Cumulative Update for .NET Framework 3.5 and 4.8 for Windows 10 Version 1909 for
x64 (KB4601056) (76.1 MB)
2004
1. 2021-01 Servicing Stack Update for Windows Server, version 2004 for x64-based Systems
(KB4598481) (14.5 MB)
2. 2021-04 Cumulative Update for Windows 10 Version 2004 for x64-based Systems
(KB5001330) (555.4 MB)
3. 2021-02 Cumulative Update for .NET Framework 3.5 and 4.8 for Windows 10 Version 2004 for
x64 (KB4601050) (65 MB)
20H2
1. 2021-01 Servicing Stack Update for Windows Server, version 20H2 for x64-based Systems
(KB4598481) (14.5 MB)
2. 2021-04 Cumulative Update for Windows 10 Version 20H2 for x64-based Systems
(KB5001330) (555.4 MB)
3. 2021-02 Cumulative Update for .NET Framework 3.5 and 4.8 for Windows 10 Version 20H2 for
x64 (KB4601050) (65 MB)
Windows 2012
A reliable method for offline patching of this operating system does not exist.
Windows 2012 R2
23/532
1. Update 1 (if not already installed)

o Update for Windows Server 2012 R2 (KB2919442) (10.2 MB)
o Windows Server 2012 R2 Update for x64-based Systems KB2919355
n clearcompressionflag.exe
n KB2919355
n KB2932046
n KB2959977
n KB2937592
n KB2938439
n KB2934018
2. Update for Windows Server 2012 R2KB3000850 (774.8 MB)
o KB3000850
o KB3003057
o KB3016437
o KB3014442
Update KB3016437 is only applicable to Windows Server 2012 R2 Active Directory

Domain Services (AD DS) role enabled. If you attempt to install KB3016437 to a
Windows Client or a Windows Server where AD DS role is not enabled, the update is
not installed, with no adverse effect other than reporting an update installation
failure.
3. 2021-04 Servicing Stack Update for Windows Server 2012 R2 for x64-based Systems
(KB5001403) (10.4 MB)
4. 2021-04 Security Monthly Quality Rollup for Windows Server 2012 R2 for x64-based Systems
(KB5001382) (528.6 MB)
5. 2021-02 Security and Quality Rollup for .NET Framework 3.5, 4.5.2, 4.6, 4.6.1, 4.6.2, 4.7, 4.7.1,
4.7.2, 4.8 for Windows 8.1 and Server 2012 R2 for x64 (KB4603004) (201.6 MB)
Some patches contained in this .NET update do not apply to all computers. They will fail to install
without affecting your system.
Monthly Quality Rollup for Windows and .NET are released every month. You must
download and install the latest release.
Windows 2016
24/532
1. 2021-04 Servicing Stack Update for Windows Server 2016 for x64-based Systems
(KB5001402) (11.5 MB)
2. 2021-04 Cumulative Update for Windows Server 2016 for x64-based Systems (KB5001347)
(1600.1 MB)
3. 2021-02 Cumulative Update for .NET Framework 4.8 for Windows Server 2016 for x64
(KB4601051) (51.8 MB)
Cumulative Update for Windows Server 2016 is released every month. You must download
and install the latest release.
Windows Server 2019

Install each of these updates in the order given.
1. 2021-04 Servicing Stack Update for Windows Server 2019 for x64-based Systems
(KB5001407) (13.7 MB)
2. 2021-04 Cumulative Update for Windows Server 2019 for x64-based Systems (KB5001342)
(393.6 MB)
3. 2021-02 Cumulative Update for .NET Framework 3.5 and 4.8 for Windows Server 2019 for x64
(KB4601055) (78.1 MB)
Cumulative Update for Windows Server 2016 is released every month. You must download
and install the latest release.
2.2 Install System 1

You can install System 1 manually or in silent mode.
Manually Install System 1

You can install System 1 from a CD or downloaded installation file. The install wizard walks you
through the installation process. If you have problems installing System 1, see Installation Errors.
Custom Setup
If you need to decide whether to install System 1 Client and Server, see Select Client and Server
Options.
Select Power Option
25/532
If you are installing

Then:
System 1:
On a Windows Server Check Enable High Performance. This option uses maximum
operating system processing power.
On Windows 7 or 8 Access the Windows Control Panel and change the Power Options
operating systems setting to Enable High Performance.
Do not select the Enable High Performance option. It negatively

On a laptop
impacts battery life.
Enter PostgreSQL Authentication
If PostgreSQL is installed on the computer, the wizard prompts you to enter the password to
permit System 1 to connect to the database management system.
Verify Installation and Database Locations
During installation, verify the default installation location of System 1 and the database location.
The default database location is:
%PROGRAMDATA%\GE Bently Nevada\System 1
If you are upgrading System 1, the database is located in the same directory as the previous
install.
To specify a custom database location, we recommend selecting a folder on a drive and not the
drive level itself. For example, if you want to store your databases on the D:\ drive, select
D:\<folder name> and not D:\ itself. This folder structure simplifies any future back up and restore
operations.
If you installed the Proficy Historian Add-on, verify the default installation location of Proficy
Historian.
Restart your Computer
26/532
The installation progress bar displays installation status. The install wizard prompts to restart
your computer after completing the installation process:
License Your System
After restarting your computer and before starting System 1:
l If needed, download and apply System 1 Server licenses.

l If you installed the Proficy Historian Add-on, apply Proficy licensing. You must then open
Windows Component Services and restart the Proficy Historian Data Archiver service.
For more information, see System 1 License Options. For complete details, see the System 1
Machinery Management Licensing Guide (document 130M4105).
Install System 1 Silently

Installation Commands
To install System 1 silently, choose Windows > Run, and in the CMD window, enter:
Setup.exe IGNORE_REBOOT=true POSTGRES_SU_PASSWORD=SetSomeStongPassword DOTNETCMD="/q

/norestart" /silent /debuglog"%TEMP%\InstallShield.log"
To install System 1 client silently, choose Windows > Run, and in the CMD window:
Setup.exe ISFeatureInstall=Client IGNORE_REBOOT=true DOTNETCMD="/q /norestart" /silent

/debuglog"%TEMP%\InstallShield.log" CLIENTONLY=true SELECTED_FEATURES="Client,Common"
Silent Installation Options

Use these options to install System 1 silently using the command line:
27/532
Option Parameters Description
This option specifies the feature to install and must be used

with /silent command line option. Without this option, both
client and server features of System 1 are installed.
ISFeatureInst
=Client
all Example
Setup.exe /silent
ISFeatureInstall=Client
This option specifies the location where the debug log is

"<PATH TO
created.
/debuglog DEBUG LOG Example
FILE>"
Setup.exe /debuglog "%TEMP%\InstallShield.log"
This option installs .NET framework without any prompts and

must be used with /silent command line option.
DOTNETCM
D
="/q /norestart" Example
Setup.exe /silent /DOTNETCMD="/q /norestart"
This option installs System 1 silently. You must also include

these options:
/silent
ISFeatureInstall
DOTNETCMD
This option specifies the location where System 1 is installed. If

not provided, System 1 is installed using the default path. When
ISInstallDir_
=<PATH TO upgrading System 1, this option is ignored.
SYSTEM 1
S1_Server
INSTALL DIR> Example
Setup.exe ISInstallDir_S1_Server="CC:\Program Files (x86)\System 1"
This option specifies the master password for the Postgre

=<ANY
POSTGRE STRONG
instance installed with System 1 Server.
S_SU_ ALPHANUMER Example
PASSWORD IC
PASSWORD> Setup.exe POSTGRES_SU_PASSWORD=SetSomeStongPassword
This option causes pending reboots to be ignored during the

IGNORE_
=true installation process.
REBOOT
Example
28/532
Option Parameters Description
Setup.exe IGNORE_REBOOT=true
After silent installation of System 1, reboot your machine.
Start the Application
Double-click the System 1 icon to launch the application.
2.3 Connect to a Database

If you are connecting to an existing database created using a prior version of System 1, first
upgrade the database.
Create a New Database

To create a new database on a local machine:
1. Open System 1. The Open Database dialog box is displayed. Click Cancel.
2. Choose File > New. The New Database dialog box is displayed.
3. The local server name is displayed.
4. Enter a unique database Name. If you will connect this database to a remote server, you
must use a different database name than that used on the remote server.
5. Optionally, enter a Description.
29/532
6. Choose Create. After a few moments, the new database is open.

7. The Preferences dialog box is displayed. See Preferences in online help.
Connect to System 1 on a Remote Server

To create a new database on a local machine where System 1 is running or on a remote
machine:
1. Open System 1. Choose File > New. The New Database dialog box is displayed.
2. Select an existing server from the drop-down list box, or enter the name of the server or its
IP address.
3. Enter a database Name.

4. Optionally, enter a Description.
5. Choose Create. After a few moments, the new database is open.
Open an Existing Database

To open an existing database:
1. Choose File > Open. The Welcome to System 1 dialog box is displayed.

2. Select an existing database. Click Open.
30/532
3. To open other databases, choose Open Database:
System 1 displays the Open Database dialog box.

4. Select a server from the drop-down list box, or enter the name of the server or its IP
address.
5. Choose Connect. A list of available databases is displayed.
6. Select a database from this list.
7. Choose Open. The database is loaded into the application.
Multiple Database Support

The System 1 Server service supports multiple running database connections on each server:
Scenario 1
Server 1 holds three databases, and three separate users and Clients can connect to one
database concurrently:
31/532
l User 1 is connected to Database 1

In this scenario, only one database is running on the server.
Scenario 2
Server 1 holds three databases, and three separate users and clients are connected to a different
database:

In this scenario, three databases are running on the server concurrently.
2.4 Select Client and Server Options

Choose Installation Option
During installation, you are given the option to install the System 1 client or the client and server:
This enables you to customize your system based on your network security design.
One example is to complete a Server and Client installation on a machine located on one level
of network security for more secure communication to the hardware and then complete a
Client Only installation on a machine located on a separate network security level to allow for
displaying the information that System 1 gathers from the hardware from a separate level of
network security.
32/532
The ability to configure the hardware from clients depends on the permissions setup by your IT
department. Depending on your user permissions, it is possible to configure the hardware from
another machine via remote communication.
System 1 can talk between domains and workgroups on networks but has certain permission
requirements to enable this communication.
Communication Scenarios
System 1 utilizes permissions based on user logins to either allow or deny communication within
and between domains and workgroups. The following are definitions of the user login types used
in the different communication scenarios:
l Admin - Administrator account on the machine.

l Domain - User domain account. These accounts enable the user to log in to any machine
located on the same domain regardless if the user has a local account on the machine.
l Local- User account on the machine. These accounts only enable the user to log in if the
machine has a user's account on the machine. In the workgroup example, the Local
account has the same user name and password on all machines.
o Local2- A second user's account on a machine. As mentioned in the Local example
above, Local2 has the same user name and password on all machines.
Choose Local Account or Domain Account

Local accounts and Domain accounts can be described as machine accounts and network
accounts.
l A Local account is tied to a single machine. That account holds no access to other
machines on the network unless a duplicate account is created on each machine.
l A Domain account, on the other hand, is tied to a network. This account can log in to any
machine in the network domain even though the user holds no local account on the
machine.
All of the following scenarios assume that you are trying to communicate between two different
machines. Communicating within the same physical machine does not require permissions.
Within the Same Domain

If accessing a machine located on the same domain as your machine, use these login account
scenarios:
Server Login Client Login
Admin Admin
Admin Domain
Local Local
Admin Local
33/532
Between Different Trusted Domains

If accessing a machine located on a different but trusted domain than your machine, use these
login account scenarios:
Admin Admin
Admin Domain
Local Local
Admin Local
From A Workgroup to A Domain

If accessing a machine located on a workgroup while your machine is on a domain, use these
Local Local
Local Local2 (run as Local)
From A Domain to A Workgroup

If accessing a machine located on a domain while your machine is on a workgroup, use these
Local Local
Within the Same Workgroup

If accessing a machine located on the same workgroup as your machine, use these login
account scenarios:
Local Local
Local2 Local (run as Local2)
Between Different Workgroups

If accessing a machine located on a different workgroup than your machine, use these login
34/532
account scenarios:
Local Local
Local2 Local (run as Local2)
Local (different password) Local
2.5 Install Remote Comms

The Remote Comms application is not part of System 1 installation process. To install Remote
Comms:
1. Open the System 1 installation disk.

2. Select the RemoteComms folder.
3. Double-click Remote_Comms_Installer. The wizard installs Remote Comms application.
For complete details, see Remote Comms for System 1 (121M6156) in the Manuals directory on
your System 1 disk or download from Bently Nevada Technical Support.
2.6 Set up Firewall Rules and Service Ports

Firewall Rules
System 1 uses TCP and UDP communication protocols and ephemeral ports to communicate
with online devices. With TCP, communications are passed through with stateful packet
inspection, which most firewalls have.
To use the Browse feature of the Device Connect dialog box, add a Windows firewall rule
between the software server IP and the device IP to allow any UDP packets for the necessary
ports.
System 1 uses a local broadcast that does not pass through a hardware firewall or router.
For each communication scenario, you must grant access to the following ports through your
firewall:
System 1 Client and System 1 Server

Source Ports Destination Protocol Ports
7550
System 1 Client Any System 1 Server TCP
7551
System 1 Server and System 1 License Server
35/532
System 1 License
System 1 Server Any TCP 7070
Server
System 1 Server and OPC Server

If using OPC DA 3.0 Client, ensure tunneller software and redundancy broker software are OPC DA
3.0 compliant.
Third-party OPC UA System 1 OPC

Any TCP 7560
Client UA server
135;
System 1 Server Any OPC DA Server TCP 1024-
65535
System 1 Server and Device Communication

For 3701 devices:
l Use port 60005 when connecting to a device with firmware version 3.0.
l Use port 60007 when connecting to a device with firmware version 4.0.
System 1 Server Any 3500 Devices TCP 3500
60006
60005
System 1 Server Any 3701 Devices‡ TCP (v3.0)
60007
(v4.0)
60006
System 1 Server Any 2300 Devices‡ TCP
60007
vbOnline Pro 60005

System 1 Server Any TCP
Devices‡ 60006
Trendmaster 57002
System 1 Server Any TCP
DSM Device 57003
‡System 1 uses ICMP to ping the device . If ICMP is blocked by your firewall, System 1 still connects to
and collects data from the device.
36/532
6.x Connector Communication

API Server of
System 1 Server Any System 1 6.95+ TCP 5001
enterprise
Port Numbers for SCOUT Devices

Source Destination Protocol Port Detail
Broadcast
11001 Used to
UDP automatically
(optional)
discover devices
on same subnet
Initialize
vbSeries/
Ascent TCP 9999 communications
SCOUT with instrument.
Primary
communications
TCP 13000-13200 port
Uses first
available
Port Numbers Used by Third-party Services

Third party components installed with System 1 listen on the following ports. Do not open these
ports in the firewall.
37/532
Third Party Service Protocol Ports
Sentinel SDK Server

TCP 1947
(hasplms.exe)
Proficy Local License Server TCP 3333
System 1 License Server

(when installed on same computer as System 1 TCP 7070
Server)
Postgre SQL Service 9.6 (when installed on

TCP 7555
same computer as System 1)
Postgre SQL Service 11

(when installed on same computer as System TCP 7556
1)
Proficy Historian Data Archiver Service 13000

TCP
(ihDataArchiver_x64.exe) 14000
2.7 Devices Supported by System 1

System 1 supports these devices. For more information about these devices, see the Bently web
site.
Portable Devices
l vb5, firmware version 13.5.10 or higher
l SCOUT100, firmware version 13.5.10 or higher
l SCOUT100-Ex, firmware version 13.5.10 or higher
l SCOUT140, firmware version 13.5.10 or higher
l SCOUT140-Ex, firmware version 13.5.10 or higher
l SCOUT220-IS
l COMMTEST220
Online Monitoring Devices

3500 System
System 1 supports 3500 monitors with the following restrictions:
l You cannot change the configuration in read-only mode.

l Up to thirty 3500 devices can be connected at one time.
38/532
Supported l /15 Power Supply

Monitors l /22 TDI Rack Interface
l /25 Keyphasor Monitor
l /32 4-Channel Relay Monitor
l /32M 4-Channel Relay Monitor
l /33 16-Channel Relay Monitor
l /40 Proximitor Monitor
l /40M Proximitor Monitor (REBAM as custom channel)
l /42 Proximitor/Seismic Monitor
l /42M Proximitor/Seismic Monitor (REBAM and Circular Acceptance
Regions as custom channel)
l /44 Aeroderivative Monitor
l /44M Aeroderivative Monitor (Multi-Mode as custom channel)
l /45 Position Monitor
l /46M Hydro Monitor (System 1 supports Hydro Air Gap channel and
Multimode Air Gap channel)
l /50 Tachometer Monitor
l /50M Tachometer Monitor
l /60 Temperature Monitor without recorders
l /61 Temperature Monitor with recorders
l /62 Process Variable Monitor
l /64M Dynamic Pressure Monitor
l /65 16-Channel Temperature Monitor
l /70M Impulse/Velocity Monitor
l /72M Rod Position Monitor (System 1 supports Rod Position Pair 2 and Rod
Position Single 2 channels.)
l /77M Cylinder Pressure Monitor
Supported l /46M Hydro Monitor

Custom l /53 Overspeed Detection Monitor
Monitors l /63 Gas Detection Monitor
l /82 Motor Stator Insulation Monitor
Unsupported The following modules cannot display plots or bar graphs but provide alarms
Modules and events:
l /20 Rack Interface

l /34 TMR Relay Module
l /90 Communication Gateway
l /93 Display Interface
l /94 VGA Display Monitor
Other l bopONLINE
Unsupported l Encore
Devices
39/532
Data The default collection rates for data types are:

Collection
Rates Trended l Current Values Mode supports an update rate of 1
Variables second.
l Historical Mode supports 1 minute of data resolution.
l A software alarming rate of 1 minute is supported.
Spectrums l Current Values Mode supports an update rate of 1

and second.
Waveforms l Historical Mode supports 10 minutes of data resolution.
3701 System
You can connect up to twenty 3701 devices at one time:
l ADAPT 3701/40 Machinery Dynamics

l ADAPT 3701/44 Aeroderivative
l ADAPT 3701/46 Hydro
Supported Cards l PAA Input

l PAV Input
l PAS Input
l PoV Input
l Relay Output Card
Supported Firmware System 1 supports 3701 firmware 3.1 or later.
Data Collection Rates The default collection rates for data types are:
Trended l Current Values Mode supports an update rate of

Variables 1 second.
l Historical Mode supports 1 minute of data
resolution.
l A software alarming rate of 1 minute is supported.
Spectrums l Current Values Mode supports an update rate of

and 1 second.
Waveforms l Historical Mode supports 10 minutes of data
resolution.
TDISecure System
System 1 supports TDISecure systems with the following restrictions:
l You cannot change the configuration when connected in read-only mode.

l You can connect up to thirty TDISecure devices at one time.
40/532
Supported Monitors l /42E Proximitor/Seismic Monitor

l /45E Position Monitor
l Process Variable Monitor
Supported Channel Types l Keyphasor

l Radial Vibration
l Thrust Position
l Eccentricity
l Acceleration 2
l Velocity 2
l Shaft Absolute
l Temperature
l Differential Expansion
l Standard Single Ramp DE
l Non-Standard Single Ramp DE
l Dual Ramp DE
l Complimentary Input DE
l Valve Position
l Case Expansion-Paired
l Case Expansion-Single
Trended l Current Values Mode supports an update

Variables rate of 1 second.
resolution.
l A software alarming rate of 1 minute is
supported.
Spectrums l Current Values Mode supports an update

and rate of 1 second.
resolution.
vbOnline Pro System

You can connect up to 200 vbOnline Pro devices at one time:
l 60M100
l 60M500
41/532
Supported Firmware System 1 supports vbOnline Pro firmware 3.0 or later.

Variables 1 second.
l Historical Mode supports 10 minutes of data
resolution.
l A software alarming rate of 10 minutes is
supported.

and 1 second.
Waveforms l Historical Mode supports 4 hours of data
resolution.
OPC Server
OPC Imported l 15,000 OPC DA and Modbus points
Data l 60,000 setpoint OPC tags
Modbus
+ OPC Points
(Process 15,000
+ Enum) per
Database
OPC Dynamic 60,000 (with 15,000 OPC points)

Setpoints
2300 System
You can connect up to 450 devices at one time:
l 2300/20 Vibration Monitor

l 2300/25 Vibration Monitor

Variables 1 second.
resolution.

and 1 second.
resolution.
42/532
Trendmaster DSM System

You can connect up to 150 Trendmaster DSM devices at one time subject to Data Acquisition Unit
(DAQ) load. Trendmaster Dynamic Scanning Module (DSM) supports these hardware
components and channel types.
Before you can connect a Trendmaster DSM device, you must install the Trendmaster
Dynamic Scanning Module (DSM) DSMInit program. For complete information, see the
Trendmaster Dynamic Scanning Module Installation Manual (document 149823-01).
43/532
Data Primary measurements are collected at configured

Trended l
Collection
Variables Primary variables scan rate.
Rates
If the DSM device has a large number of channels (about
300 or more configured channels), the actual data
collection rate may decrease to less than the configured
rate.
l Management variables are collected at configured

Management variables scan rate.
Spectrums l Spectrums and waveforms are collected as per

and configured dynamic collection interval.
Waveforms
Supported Ethernet (149776-01)

Network cards l
Cards l Fiber Optic (149776-02)
Signal Processing Adapter (SPA) card l Model 149787
Supported Trendmaster DSM supports the following Transducer Interface Modules (TIMs):

Channel
Types
44/532
ProTIM l Pressure Point

l Process Points (Current, Flow, Force, Frequency, Load,
Mass, Mega VAR, Position, Power, Power Factor, Pressure,
Speed, Temperature, Torque, Valve Position, Voltage,
Weight)
l Accel to Velocity Point
l Low Frequency Accel to Velocity Point
l Rack Buffer Output ProTIM Point
l 2-3 wire Platinum RTD (Temperature Point)
l 4 wire RTD (Temperature Point)
l TC K Type (Thermocouple K type Temperature Point)
l Speed Input: Keyphasor
l Displacement Point
l Accel to Velocity with AE (Acceleration Enveloping)
FlexiTIMs l Accel to Velocity

l Temperature FlexiTIMs
o 100 Ohm Platinum RTD (PT100 RTD)
o J TC (J Type Thermocouple)
o K TC (K Type Thermocouple)
TIM l Keyphasor Point

l Process Points (Current, Flow, Force, Frequency, Load,
Mass, Mega VAR, Position, Power, Power Factor, Pressure,
Speed, Temperature, Torque, Valve Position, Voltage,
Weight)
l Rack Buffered Keyphasor Point
l Temperature Points
o Type J TC (J Type Thermocouple)
o Type K TC (K Type Thermocouple)
l Displacement Point
l Rack Buffered Output Point
l Accel to Velocity Point
l Velocity Point
1900 Monitors l 1900/25 Velocity Monitor

l 1900/55 Fan Monitor
Modbus Device
You can connect up to 200 Modbus devices at one time and up to a maximum of 15,000 tags per
database. The 30,000 point maximum is a combination of OPC DA and Modbus points.
45/532
Data Data is collected based on configured data collection

Trended l
Collection
Variables rate defined at Modbus group level.
Rates
l Data at sub-second interval (fastest @ 200 ms) can be
collected for 20% of the total configured Modbus points.
Modbus
Devices per 200 maximum
Database
Modbus
Devices per 70
DHP (Data
Hub Plugin)
Modbus
+ OPC Points
(Process 15,000
+ Enum) per
Database
Modbus
Points
(Process 10,000
+ Enum) per
Modbus
Device
Modbus Tags
per 15,000
Database
Dynamic
Setpoints per 20,000
Modbus
Device
Dynamic
Setpoints
with 15,000 30,000
Modbus
points in a
database
Groups
under a 200
Modbus
Device
Modbus 1000
Points
46/532
(Process
+ Enum) per
Modbus
Group
2.8 Review Data Storage Requirements

Types of Data Stores
Data stores are created depending on the type of database license you purchase.
Fundamental Package
Portable Data Store
The portable data store consists of data from offline devices. This store grows on demand and is
only limited by the disk space available.
Premium and Advanced Packages
Alarm Data Store
Whenever an alarm event is triggered, the high-resolution trend and waveform data is captured.
The alarm store is configured in terms of storage size and the space is reserved. When the
designated space is filled, the data begins to wrap.
Transient Data Store
When a start up/shutdown event is triggered, the high-resolution trend and waveform data is
captured. The transient store is configured in terms of storage size and the space is reserved.
When the designated space is filled, the data begins to wrap.
Short-Term Data Store
The short-term data store can retain up to a minimum of 1-second data for trended variables
and up to a minimum of 10-minute data for spectrum and waveforms over a period of time. No
disk space is reserved upfront, and the data store grows on demand. When storage is no longer
available, the short term data store begins to drop this high-resolution data in 3-days
increments.
Long-Term Data Store
The long-term data store consists of summary data tiers for trended variables. It also consists of
spectrum and waveform samples based on the configured long term storage rate. No disk
space is reserved upfront, and the data store grows on demand.
Summary Data Tiers for Trended Variables
47/532
To simplify data storage in System 1, long-term trend data is summarized into data tiers
designed to preserve the nature of a measurement's curve while enabling appropriate plotting
performance. Summarized data tiers provide the long-term data required for condition
monitoring without requiring excessive hard disk space. Below is a comparison of how long data
is stored in each data tier:
The incoming one-second short-term trend data is evaluated by the data store and
summarized into the tiers by storing each measurement's:
l First-in value and timestamp.

l Minimum value and timestamp.
l Maximum value and timestamp.
l Status for each summary tier, as required.
This method of reducing data is only applied to trended data and is never applied to
alarm or transient data.
This figure is an example of how each sample is categorized for each data tier and bucket:
When launching a trend plot with a selected time range, System 1 will choose the most
appropriate data tier to provide the highest resolution without exceeding sample plotting limits.
48/532
Both min and max values are plotted.
If the selected tier does not contain the desired number of samples, the algorithm continues to
the higher-density tiers. Once data is plotted, you can expose higher density long-term trend,
short-term trend, alarm, and transient data by simply zooming within the plot.
Online and Scanning Data Store Properties

Default properties for online and scanning data stores are:
l Alarm Data Store: 20% of available disk space

l Transient Data Store: 10% of available disk space
l Short-Term Data Store: thirty (30) days of storage
l Long-Term Data Store (static plus waveform): five (5) years of storage
l Highest supported resolution rate of storage:
o Static Data: one second
o Waveform Data: ten minutes
To modify these defaults, configure the state points. See the System 1 Machinery
Management User Guide (document 109M8639).
Verify that the recommended minimum disk space is available at all times while the system is
functioning. For recommended disk space, see the System 1 Datasheet (document 108M5214).
Low Disk Space Data Wrapping

When available disk space falls below 5 GB + 1% of the total disk space, short term unfiltered trend
data shrinks to six (6) days of storage. For example, this storage limitation is triggered if the
available disk space on a 1000 GB hard disk falls below 15 GB (5 GB + 1% of 1000).
l If disk space is exhausted, new trend data is collected but not stored.
l Freeing up disk space reverts the storage limitation back to the default thirty days of
storage and resume storage of new trend data.
l When the available disk space falls below 5 GB, all data collection reverts.
Troubleshooting Recommendations
If your database begins to wrap data, complete either of the following recommended
troubleshooting actions:
l Free disk space.

l Increase disk space.
l Store data at a slower rate. This is recommended for spectrums and waveforms.
2.9 Enable Data Collection

To gather data from online devices, you must enable your database for online data collection. A
database that is enabled for online data collection runs regardless of System 1 client
connections and interactions with other databases.
49/532
You can enable data collection for multiple PostgreSQL databases per System 1 Server. If using a
Proficy database, you can only enable data collection for a single database. To enable another
Proficy database on the same server, disable data collection on the active database.
The System 1 Server service automatically starts collecting data for the online database during
machine start up and shut down without waiting for you the user to open the online database.
Enabling online data collection does not change the configuration. You do not have to save
changes to the database to enable data collection.
Enable Database Data Collection
To enable online data collection, choose a method:
Machine or Devices Hierarchy

1. Select the Configure Workspace and Standard Mode.
2. Select a hierarchy locations. Choose an option:
o From the Machines hierarchy, right-click the database node.
o From the Devices hierarchy, right-click the device node.
3. Choose Online Data Collection. The online status is indicated by a check mark on the
menu.
To disable data collection, complete the same steps, and choose Online Data Collection again.
Data Import Health Icon

1. In the footer bar, click the Data Import Health icon.
2. Choose Enable | Disable Online Data Collection.
Enable Device Data Collection
You can enable or disable data collection for a specific device while a database data collection is
enabled.
To enable or disable device data collection:

2. Select the General tab.
50/532
3. In the Devices hierarchy, select a hierarchy level:

o Devices node
o Device category node
o Device node
4. Select the Data Collection tab.

5. Click the device drop-down and choose Enabled or Disabled.
Disabled Device Behaviors

A disabled device is displayed using a gray status color.
l The Status tab does not record status changes while the device is disabled.
l The Events tab does not record new alarm events, and existing active alarms remain
active.
l Current Values mode does not display any data in the Plots tab, but historical data for the
device is still available to plot.
l No data is displayed in the Bar Graph tabs.
2.10 Collect 3500 TDI Alarm Data

The 3500 Transient Data Interface (TDI) captures data before, during, and after an alarm event. It
can collect static data and waveform samples.
About TDI Alarm Events

Alarm events are displayed two ways:
l If any static value within a collection group goes into alarm, the alarm data for all points in
the collection group are collected. Alarm collection occurs for condition alarms of all
severity alert and danger protection alarms.
l System 1 can initiate an alarm event when:
o A software alarm occurs for one of the points within the collection group.
o A point on another device that is in the same collection group goes into alarm.
o A user invokes an alarm.
Alarm data is not collected when the alarm state goes from danger to alert or from alert
to no alarm.
The 3500 TDI maintains an historical buffer of data for all points in a collection group and is
always collecting speed-based and time-based transient data. When an alarm is detected, it
captures and stores the buffer and transmits its contents to the host computer system. It also
captures and stores the present waveforms and static values. When this happens, the 3500 TDI
transmits the last 200 data collection sets to the host and continues to send new data sets until
the end of transient conditions are met. Afterward, it collects additional data and transmit the
post-event data to the host.
51/532
Typical TDI Alarm Event Data Set

The data set for an alarm event typically captures the following:
l 10 minutes of 1 second interval static data from before the event,

l 20 seconds of 0.1 second interval static data from before the event,
l 2.5 minutes of 10 second interval waveforms from before the event,
l 2 to 3 waveforms from the time the event was detected,
l 1 minute of 1 second interval static data from after the event,
l 10 seconds of 0.1 second interval static data from after the event, and
l 1 minute of 10 second interval waveforms from after the event.
About TDI Alarm Event Data

l A waveform data set consists of 2048 samples of synchronous data and 2048 samples of
asynchronous data. These samples are taken at the configured sampling rate.
l The time between the event and the first set of historical data can vary based on when the
data was sampled and when the alarm occurred. Therefore, the time interval from the first
of the pre-event waveforms to the event can be anywhere between 0 to 10 seconds. The
older waveforms are ten seconds apart.
l If the sampling rate of the waveforms is such that the waveform takes longer than ten (10)
seconds to acquire, the next waveform begins at the end of the first. In this case, there can
be less than 15 waveforms for the pre-event data and less than six (6) waveforms of post-
event data.
l Once data is transmitted to System 1, the same data is not available for re-transmission.
Therefore, if there are multiple back-to-back alarms for a collection group, each alarm
does not cause the full set of data, described above, to be transmitted. However, all of the
data representative of the event is available in System 1.
l During start up conditions or after reconfiguration of the 3500 TDI, the historical data buffer
in the TDI may not be full when an alarm event occurs. In this case, only a partial data set is
transmitted.
l The alarm list indicates when alarms are detected by the rack, and the alarm events sent
to the rack by the software are not logged in the event list. There is no event listed for the
collection of the data. The only event logged is for protection hardware alarms.
2.11 Collect ADAPT 3701 Data

You can configure the 3701 firmware to capture alarm and transient data. The firmware offers a
single collection group. Alarm and transient data is captured for all measurements on all
channels if applicable conditions exist. These sections outline these conditions for alarm and
transient data.
Collect Alarm Events

Alarm events are captured when:
52/532
l Level 3 and level 4 protection alarms are triggered on a 3701 device.

l If any static value within a collection group triggers an alarm, alarm data for all points and
any severity in the collection group are collected.
l A software or hardware alarm is triggered on 3500 or OPC points on a machine train with a
mapped 3701 channel.
High resolution alarm data is collected for trended and waveform variables using the intervals
outlined in Collect 3500 TDI Alarm Data .
Collect Transient Data

The 3701 devices collect transient data including trended measurements or waveforms for:
l Fixed speed machines. The running speed property configured for the speed channel is
used.
l Variable speed machines. The operating speed ranges configured for the speed channel
is used.
You can configure these properties in Bently Nevada Monitor Configuration software.
EXAMPLE Fixed Speed Machines Scenario

Consider the following example when:
l Speed type = Fixed

l Running speed = 3600 rmp
For this example, the following table outlines the scenarios during which transient data is
collected:
Machine Initial Starts Collecting Stops Collecting

Condition Condition Transient Data at Transient Data at
Speed > 72 rpm

3960 RPM > Speed > 3420
start up Speed ≈ 0 rpm (2% of configured Running
rpm
Speed)
Speed < 3420 rpm

Speed ≈ 3600
Shutdown (95% of configured Running Speed < 72 rpm
rpm
Speed)
Speed > 3960 rpm

Over Speed ≈ 3600
(110% of configured Running Speed < 3960 rpm
Speed rpm
Speed)
53/532
EXAMPLE Variable Speed Machines Scenarios

For a variable speed machine, you can configure lower and upper operating speeds. The
machine's running speed falls within this range. The firmware captures transient data under
these conditions:
l At start up when machine speed exceeds 2% of the lower speed value

l At shutdown when the machine speed falls below 95% of the lower speed value
l During overspeed when the machine speed exceeds 110% of the upper speed value
Consider the following example when:
l Speed type = Variable

l Operating range lower = 4500 rpm
l Operating range upper = 6000 rpm
54/532
For this example, the following table outlines the scenarios during which transient data is
collected:
Machine Initial Starts Collecting Stops Collecting

Condition Condition Transient Data at Transient Data at
Speed > 90 rpm

start up Speed ≈ 0 rpm 6600 RPM > Speed > 4275 rpm
(2% of operating range lower)
Speed < 4275 rpm

Shutdown Speed ≈ 5000 rpm Speed < 90 rpm
(95% of operating range lower)
Speed > 6600 rpm

Over Speed Speed ≈ 5000 rpm Speed < 6600 rpm
(110% of operating range upper)
55/532
2.12 Collect 2300 Data

You can configure the 2300 firmware (version 3.2 or later) to capture alarm data. The firmware
offers a single collection group. Alarm data is captured for all measurements on all channels if
applicable conditions exist. These sections outline these conditions for alarm data.
Collecting Alarm Events

Alarm events are captured if any of these conditions are true:
l Level 3 and level 4 protection alarms are triggered on a 2300 device.

l Any static value within a collection group triggers an alarm. Alarm data for all points and
any severity in the collection group are collected.
l A software or hardware alarm is triggered on 3500, 3701, or OPC points on a machine train
with a mapped 2300 channel.
High resolution alarm data is collected for trended and waveform variables using the intervals
outlined in Collect 3500 TDI Alarm Data .
2.13 Add Bently Performance
Integrate Bently Performance into System 1

Bently Performance is a stand-alone product that provides thermodynamic performance
monitoring of plant assets. It is integrated with System 1 over OPC, allowing you to store and
display mechanical and thermodynamic asset condition data in System 1. Bently Performance
enables you to configure System 1 to your specific machinery applications.
Bently Performance processes both simple and complex performance-related calculations. It

performs these computations based on standard machine templates and feeds this
information back into the System 1 database. You can view this information with other asset
information, like vibration and process parameters, using standard System 1 displays such as
overview, trend plots, XvsY plots, and current value plots. This enables you to correlate and
compare machinery and performance data, gaining a complete understanding of overall
machinery health.
You can use Bently Performance to display the manufacturer's designed performance
characteristics for an operating machine. System 1 compares the OEM-provided curves in the
plot and compares it to live or historical data. This enables you to monitor many machinery-
operating conditions and diagnose and correct potential problems.
For more information about Bently Performance, contact Bently Nevada Technical Support.
Before You Install Bently Performance

Before installing Bently Performance:
56/532
1. Log in to the computer as an Administrator.

2. Install System 1 19.2 (or later).
a. Download the System 1 installation file from the Flexera licensing server or insert the
Bently Nevada DVD into the computer.
b. Run setup.exe. Follow the setup wizard instructions.
3. Install and configure Microsoft Excel.
a. Install Microsoft Excel 2013, 2016, or 2019 (32 bit).
b. (Required) Activate Excel.
c. Modify Excel security settings:
i. In Excel, choose File > Options > Trust Center > Trust Center Settings > Macro
Settings.
ii. Enable the option, Enable all macros.
iii. If existing Bently Performance templates contain Named Range blocks, see
Remove Existing Named Range Blocks.
4. Uninstall Bently Performance 19.1 or older versions.
a. Backup any existing Bently Performance templates.
b. Press Windows+R; enter services.msc and click OK. The Services dialog box is
displayed. Locate and stop:
i. System 1 Perf Eng
ii. System 1 Perf Eng OPC Server Services.
c. Choose Control Panel > Programs and Features.
i. Uninstall System 1 Performance Engine.
ii. Uninstall System 1 Performance Add-in.
d. Delete System 1 Performance Engine folder from C:\Program Files.
5. Download Bently Performance from the Flexera licensing server.
Remove Existing Named Range Blocks
If you are updating Bently Performance and existing templates contain Named Range
blocks, remove them before re-installing Bently Performance.
To remove existing Named Range blocks:
1. In Excel, choose Formulas > Name Manager. The Name Manager dialog box is displayed.
2. Select all S1BP Named Ranges for all sheets and click Delete. The Named Ranges are
deleted.
57/532
3. Click OK and Close. The named ranges are removed.
Install System 1 Bently Performance

Microsoft Excel must be installed and activated before installing Bently Performance.
To install Bently Performance:
1. Select the location where you downloaded System 1 Bently Performance and run
setup.exe.
2. Microsoft VSTO 2010 Runtime (x64) or later must be installed on your computer. If it is not
installed, you are prompted to install it.
3. Click Next and agree to the License Agreement.
4. Accept the default location or select a custom installation location for System 1 Bently
Performance.
5. Click Next and complete installation. These folders and files are installed:
o S1BP Add In - This includes Bently Performance Templates folder containing
templates, template key, BP_compr and BP_Lib files.
58/532
o S1BP OPC Server

o S1BP Server
6. Press Windows+R; enter services.msc and click OK. The Services window is displayed.
7. Locate and verify that these services are not running:
o System 1 Bently Performance Service
o System 1 Bently Performance OPC Server
8. Right-click on System 1 Bently Performance Service and choose Properties. The System 1
Bently Performance Service dialog box is displayed.
9. Select the Log On tab. Choose This account. Enter the credentials of a Windows Local User
account or a Domain User account with administrator privileges on the local machine.
10. Click Apply and OK.
11. Right-click on System 1 Bently Performance OPC Server and click Start.
12. Use the same user account with administrator privileges as in step 9 to open Excel. Verify
that the Bently Performance add-in is loaded. If the Bently Performance add-in is not
displayed:
a. In Excel choose File > Options > Add-ins.
b. Click Go. The Add-Ins dialog box is displayed.
c. Choose Bently Performance Add-In.
d. Click OK.
e. Restart Excel.
13. Press Windows+R; enter regedit and click OK. The Registry Editor is displayed.
14. Navigate to
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Microsoft\Office\
Excel\Addins\BentlyNevada.System1BentlyPerformance]
15. Verify that the value of the key LoadBehavior is dword:00000003. If not, change it to that
value. Close the Registry Editor.
Configure DCOM Settings

Prior to connecting to an Open Platform Communications (OPC) server, you must configure
Distributed Component Object Model (DCOM) communication settings.
Grant Permissions to Logged-in User

1. Press Windows+R; enter dcomcnfg and click OK. The Component Services dialog box is
displayed.
2. Choose Component Services > Computers > My Computer.
3. Right-click My Computer and click Properties > COM Security.
59/532
4. In the Launch and Activation Permission panel, choose Edit Default. The Launch and
Activation Permission dialog box is displayed.
5. Click Add. The Select Users, Computers, Service Accounts, or Groups dialog box is
displayed.
6. Enter <UserName> of the logged in user and click OK.
7. Enable these permissions:
o Local Launch
o Remote Launch
o Local Activation
o Remote Activation
8. Click OK twice. The My Computer Properties COM Security panel is displayed.
Grant Permissions to OpcEnum

To grant permissions to OpcEnum:
displayed.
2. Choose Component Services > Computers > My Computer > DCOM Config.
3. Right-click OpcEnum and choose Properties > Security.
60/532
4. In the Launch and Activation Permission panel, choose Edit. The Launch and Activation
Permission dialog box is displayed.
5. Click Add. The Select Users or Groups dialog box is displayed.
6. In the Enter the object names to select field, enter:
a. <UserName> of the logged in user.
b. If OPC Server and OPC Client are on different:
o domains, add Anonymous Logon.
o machines, enter OPC client computer <ServerMachineName>.
7. Click OK.
displayed.
11. Click OK.
61/532

o Local Launch
o Remote Launch
o Local Activation
o Remote Activation
13. Click OK.
14. In the Access Permissions panel, choose Edit. The Access Permission dialog box is
displayed.
displayed.
17. Click OK.
o Local Access
o Remote Access
19. Click OK.
Grant Permissions to the OPC Servers

Complete these steps for the third party OPC Server, System 1 OPC Server, and the System
1 Bently Performance OPC Server.
62/532
To grant permissions to OPC servers:
displayed.
3. Right-click on the third-party OPC Server and click Properties.
4. In the General tab, set Authentication Level to Connect.
Repeat these steps for System 1 OPC Server and System 1 Bently Performance OPC Server.
Grant Permissions to OPC Server User and Network Service

Complete these steps for the logged-in user and network service on the third party OPC
Server, System 1 OPC Server, and the System 1 Bently Performance OPC Server.
To grant permissions to OPC server user and network service:
displayed.
3. Right-click on the name of the third-party OPC Server and choose Properties > Security.
For example, select Kepware Communications Server 5.19:
63/532
displayed.
6. In Enter the object names to select, enter the <UserName> of the logged in user and
Network Service.
7. Click OK.
o Local Launch
o Remote Launch
o Local Activation
o Remote Activation
Repeat these steps for System 1 OPC Server and System 1 Bently Performance OPC Server.
Configure Spreadsheets
Configure Bently Performance Inputs and Export Outputs

To configure Bently Performance inputs and export outputs:
1. Navigate to the path where System 1 Bently Performance templates are located. The
default location is:
C:\Program Files (x86)\System 1 Bently Performance\S1BP Add In\Templates
64/532
2. If the file is blocked by Windows security, unblock it.

3. Copy your existing Bently Performance workbooks, if any, to the Templates directory.
4. Right click on BPTemplateKey.exe and choose Run as Administrator.
5. In the Select a BP Template to Open field, click Browse.
6. Select your Bently Performance templates workbook.
7. Click Open BP template. The template is displayed in Excel.
8. In Excel, choose Bently Performance add-in.
9. Select a blank cell in Column B below input data table.
10. Choose Add Performance > Add Performance. The Add Performance to Sheet dialog box
is displayed.
11. Click Update sheet.
12. Click OK. The Performance Named Range block is added.
You can increase Input Cell Range and Output Cell Range based on the Input data
rows and Output Data Range. For faster updates, enter the exact dell range of the
Input and Output tags.
13. Do not add Name Ranged block in BP_Overview sheet.

14. To connect sheet automatically, if Auto Start is False, manually connect the sheets or
change Auto Start to True.
15. Click Save.
16. Choose Bently Performance Add-in > Connect Sheets. Verify that the Named Range
status is OK.
17. To configure Bently Performance input, select each cell in column A to add corresponding
Performance Input from System 1.
a. Choose Bently Performance > OPC Browse. The Browse dialog box is displayed.
b. Click Browse.
c. Select Database node and expand it further till the corresponding input tag for the
selected cell.
65/532
d. Select measurement.
e. Click Add. Column A is updated with the selected measurement.
Repeat step a-e for adding all the input tags.
18. In the blank column to the right of the Outputs Column, select each cell to add the System
1 supported unit.
a. Choose Bently Performance > Units. The System 1 Unit Selection dialog box is
displayed.
b. Select correct Unit Group and corresponding Unit and Description.
c. Click Add Unit. The selected column is updated with the selected Unit.
Repeat step a-c to add units for all the output tags.
19. Choose Bently Performance > Export OPC CSV. The Export CSV File dialog box is
displayed.
a. Enter the name of column in which you added the Unit.
b. Click Export. The Windows Save As dialog box is displayed.
c. Click Save. The CSV file is used to import Output tags in System 1.
Before editing the Bently Performance workbook, verify that it has loaded
successfully. Check the C:\BPLogs\BPExLOG.log log file. Look for the message
"Completed Loading Active Sheets : <workbook name>".
20. Close the Bently Performance Template. Select the BPTemplateKey application and click
Close BP Templates.
Configure Bently Performance
66/532
Supported Machine Types

l Compressors
l Fans
l Gas Turbines
l Generators
l Pumps
l Steam Turbines
Add Performance Input and Output tags

To add performance input and output tags:
1. In System 1, Select the Configure Workspace and Standard Mode

2. Choose Device hierarchy.
3. Right click on the node you want to configure.
4. Choose Connect to Devices > OPC. The Add OPC Server dialog box is displayed.
5. To add OPC Server, .see System 1 Help, Add OPC Server.
6. To add Performance Input tags as Process Measurement, create a .CSV file. .See System 1
Help, Format OPC Data for System 1.
7. To import CSV file, .see System 1 Help, Import OPC Data.
8. Change Update Type to Sync in Process Group properties.
9. Right click on OPC Servers and choose Connect to Device.
10. Navigate to and select System 1 Bently Performance OPC Server file (S1BPOPCServer.1). Add
it as OPC Server.
11. Import Performance Output CSV file that is exported from Bently Performance workbook.
12. To import Performance Output tags as Process Measurement from CSV file, see see
System 1 Help, Import OPC Data.
13. Change Update Type to Sync in Process Group properties.
14. Click File > Save.
Add Manual Input Points

To add manual input tags, see System 1 Help, Add Data Manually.
Enable Performance Points

To enable Bently Performance Points:
1. In System 1, Select the Configure Workspace and Standard Mode

2. Select an asset in the Machines hierarchy.
3. Choose General tab.
67/532
4. In the Machine Properties pane, choose Enable Performance Points.
To add multiple section/stages, in the Shaft Property of Machine, modify Number

of section/stages.
System 1 adds predefined performance groups and points to an asset and its components,
including:
l Actual: As-is performance, based on measurements.

l Expected: New and clean performance, based on OEM information such as performance
curves and design data from the API data sheet.
l Deviation: Deviation between the actual and expected performance or Deviation between
the actual and corrected performance.
l Correction Factor: A correction factor is calculated by Bently Performance to correct
expected values and performance maps at the actual inlet condition that may vary from
OEM design input values.
If you clear the Enable Performance Points check box, System 1 removes the mapping between
assets and OPC points. You must map the OPC points to assets again.
Map Performance or PEMS Points to Assets

To map Bently Performance or PEMS Points:
1. Select the Configure Workspace and Mapping Mode.

2. In the Available Machine Points pane, choose Filter > Performance .
3. This filter displays all mappable Bently Performance or PEMS points available for an asset.
You can also select a group to filter the points in an asset hierarchy.
o Available Performance points from Performance Group in the Machine Hierarchy are
displayed on the left.
o Available PEMS points from PEMS Group in the Machine Hierarchy are displayed on
the left.
o Available Performance or PEMS Input and Output OPC Points in the Devices hierarchy
are displayed on the right.
4. You can also associate Manual Input points like Gas composition, Ambient Pressure to the
available Performance Input points.
Bently Performance must be installed on a System 1 Server computer. You must

completely configure your assets prior to enabling Bently Performance or PEMS.
Otherwise, System 1 cannot add the correct performance or PEMS groups and points to
your assets.
Configure Predictive Emission Monitoring System
68/532
To enable performance points, see Configure Bently Performance . To add manual input tags,
see Add and Update Data Manually . Predictive Emission Monitoring System (PEMS) supports the
Gas Turbines asset type.
To add PEMS inputs and outputs tags, see Configure Bently Performance .
To enable PEMS points:
1. Select the Configure workspace and Standard Mode.

2. Select an asset in the Machines hierarchy.
4. In the Machine Properties pane, select Enable PEMS Points. Predefined performance
groups and points are displayed in the Machines hierarchy.
If you clear the Enable PEMS Points checkbox, System 1 removes the mapping between assets
and mapped points. You must map the OPC points to assets again.
To map PEMS points to assets, see Configure Bently Performance .
Display Bently Performance

Before you can complete these steps, you must install Bently Performance and enable
Bently Performance Points.
Configure Bently Performance

To configure Bently Performance:
1. In Windows, choose Start menu > Bently Nevada > System 1 Bently Performance. The
System 1 Bently Performance application is launched.
2. Verify that Bently Performance is running. If not, click Start/Restart.
3. To add a Bently Performance Workbook, click Browse. The Windows Open dialog box is
displayed.
4. In the File Name field, enter Excel 97-03 Files (*.xls). Select the Bently Performance
Spreadsheet workbook.
69/532
5. Click Open and Add Workbook. The workbook is displayed in the left pane. Performance
Input and Output measurements are displayed with a green status.
If the workbook fails to load or if the measurements status is Failed, check the
C:\BPLogs\BPExLOG.log log file. Look for the message "Completed Loading Active
Sheets: <Sheetname>.XLS".
Remove a Performance Map from a Plot

To remove a performance map from a plot:
1. Right-click on the plot and choose Performance Map. The Performance Map dialog box is
displayed.
2. In Select Map, choose None.
3. Click Apply.
The performance map is removed from the plot.
Update Manual Input Point Values

To update manual input point values:
1. To update:
o Only points within a selected hierarchy, right-click in Machine or Devices hierarchy.
Choose Manual Input.
o All configured manual input points, choose Tools > Manual Input.
2. The Manual Input dialog box is displayed. For details, see Add and Update Data Manually .
70/532
3. Modify values of any or all points as needed.

4. Click Save.
The value of the Manual Input points are updated.
View Manual Input Data in Trend Plot

Historical mode - Trend Plot displays the last value entered before the Mini-Trend Bar range for
Manual Input measurement. The previous sample is plotted at an interval of 30 sec from the start
time of the Mini-Trend Bar to the next sample entered in the Mini-Trend Bar range.
CV mode - The last value entered for Manual Input measurement is displayed.
Overlay Performance Maps
Verify Bently Performance is Running
(Machine Health Admin permissions required)

Before overlaying performance maps on a plot, verify that Bently Performance is running:
1. Press Windows+R; enter services.msc and click OK. The Services window is displayed.
2. Locate and verify that the System 1 Perf Eng service is running.
Overlay Performance Map on XvsY Plots

You can only overlay performance maps when all Y curves on XvsY plot belong to same
unit.
To overlay a performance map on XvsY Plots :
1. Choose one of two methods:

o Choose Tools > Performance Maps.
o Open a XvsY plot . The Add Measurements dialog box is displayed.
a. Choose X and Y unit measurements of the same type. Click Add.

b. Right-click on the plot and choose Performance Map.
2. The Performance Map dialog box is displayed. Only the performance maps matching the
active curves parent machine type are displayed.
3. Select a Performance Map.
4. Choose Enable Correction.
5. Select the valid Correction Type.
6. Verify the X Correction Measurement. The measurements displayed are determined
based on the Correction Factor on the Map X-axis Unit Group.
71/532
7. Verify the Y Correction Measurement. The measurements displayed are determined

based on the Correction Factor on the Map Y-axis Unit Group.
8. Click Apply. The OEM specifications are overlaid on the XvsY plot.
Add and Update Data Manually
Under certain conditions, you may need to add or edit data manually. Two likely scenarios are:
l When a data point is not available from the online source or a required transducer point
does not exist, you can configure Manual Input to replace and simulate the missing data
point. For example, you can add points to obtain the results of gas composition analysis
from a gas chromatography process.
l When a data point has been established intentionally to manually capture values that
can not be obtained any other way. For example, the weekly price of fuel used by Bently
Performance to calculate return on Investment for an electrical generating station.
Add Manual Input Tags

To add manual data:
Alarming is not supported for Manual Input.

2. Right-click on the database node and choose Connect to Device > Manual Input.
3. The Manual Input dialog box is displayed. Existing manual points, if any, are displayed.
4. Enter a Group name. Alphanumeric and special characters are permitted.
5. Enter a Point Name, Value, then select a Unit Group and Unit. Description is optional. You
can multi-select and copy and paste from third-party applications. (To delete a point,
right-click and choose Delete.)
6. If you need additional rows, click the plus button. A new group row is created.
7. Click Save. A new device group named Manual Input is displayed in the Machine
hierarchy.
8. Choose File > Save.
You can now view plots and events on this tag. When viewing a Trend or Stacked Trend plot, the
trend line is continuous with the prior and next sample. See View Manual Input Data in Trend Plot
.
Update Manual Input Tags
72/532
To update manual input tags in the database, see Update Manual Input Point Values .
73/532
3. Configuration
Use the Configure workspace to define Machines and Devices properties and other tasks.
3.1 Select Configure Mode

The information displayed in the Configure Workspace Pane depends on the workspace mode
you select.
The Configure workspace has four modes:
Mode Description Machines Devices
Standard Mode Configure assets and devices. Left Tab Left

Tab
Mapping Mode Associate machine points or Left Side Right

channels with asset points. Alone Side
Alone
Route Mode Build asset data collection routes Right

to use with a portable data Side N/A
collection device. Alone
Template Mode Manage user templates. N/A N/A
3.2 Modify Asset and Devices Hierarchy

In the Configure workspace, you can copy and paste assets on these devices:
l Online devices. When you copy and paste machine configuration information for online
devices, System 1 duplicates only asset information for online devices.
If you have a GE Renewable System 1 Wind license, System 1 duplicates asset and
measurement information for online devices and preserves channel mapping by adding a
vbOnline Pro device to the Devices hierarchy.
l Portable devices. When you copy and paste machine configuration information for
portable devices, System 1 duplicates asset and measurement information for portable
devices.
74/532
Cut Asset or Device

When you cut a point, the point and its data are moved from one asset to another. It is deleted
from the original asset. When you paste data, you can:
l Add a new point to the asset location.

l Replace an existing portable point. When you replace a point, the current configuration
and data associated with the point is deleted.
You cannot cut or replace mapped points because they are associated with a device.
To move portable points and their associated data from one asset to another:
1. Choose a method:
o Right-click on the point and choose Cut.
o Press CTRL + X.
2. Select the destination hierarchy asset.
3. Right-click and choose Paste. Once a cut point is pasted, you cannot paste it to another
location.
To cancel a cut, press the Esc key.
Copy
To copy a hierarchy entry, choose a method:
l Right-click on the entry and choose Copy.

l Press CTRL + C.
Paste
You cannot paste assets or devices onto incompatible devices. See Move Assets in Hierarchy
below.
To paste the hierarchy entry, choose a method:
l Right-click on the destination and choose Paste.

l Press CTRL + V.
If you paste one hierarchy entry onto a similar hierarchy entry (for example, one bearing pasted
onto another bearing), the Confirm Replace dialog box is displayed. To overwrite the entry, click
Yes.
Special Copy and Paste Behaviors

If you copy a portable point configured with Ball Pass Frequency on the Inner Race (BPFI) or Ball
Pass Frequency on the Outer Race (BPFO) trended variables from one anti-friction bearing and
past it onto a second anti-friction bearing, the minimum and maximum spectral band
frequencies are updated to reflect the frequencies configured on the second bearing.
75/532
You can only copy device points that can be configured within System 1.
Paste in the Devices Hierarchy

You can copy and paste Devices onto the Devices hierarchy or the same device category node
as the copied device. Doing so creates another device with the copied device's properties and
sets the IP address to unknown, or ?.
You cannot copy or paste OPC servers.
Supported Bearing Replacements

You can copy and paste only bearings of the same location type.
Bearing Location Bearing Types
Radial Bearings Anti-Friction
(IB/OB or DE/NDE) Hydrodynamic Elliptical
Hydrodynamic Plain Sleeve
Hydrodynamic Tilt Pad
Unknown Bearing
Thrust Bearings Anti-Friction Bearing
Hydrodynamic
Unknown Bearing
Add Multiple Assets

To add multiple copies of assets:
1. Choose a method:
o Right-click on the database or folder and choose Paste Multiple.
o Press CTRL + M.
The Paste-Multiple dialog box is displayed.
76/532
2. Enter the number of assets you want to duplicate.

3. Click Paste. The copied asset is displayed in the hierarchy under the selected database or
folder.
4. Be sure to modify their names so that each is uniquely identified.
Delete an Asset or Device

To delete an asset or device:
1. Select the asset or device you want to delete.

2. Choose a method:
o Right-click and choose Delete.
o Press the DELETE key.
Rename an Asset or Device

To rename an asset or device:
1. Select the asset or device you want to delete.

2. Choose a method:
o Right-click and choose Rename.
o Press the F2 key.
3. Modify the name inline. If you enter an invalid character, a red box is displayed to indicate
this entry error.
Backspace and try again. The new name is reflected in the software, and you are
prompted to Save before leaving configuration.
Move Assets in Hierarchy

Okay to drop between assets: To move an asset within a group, click and drag the asset to the
new location within the hierarchy. Note the red line that is displayed between two line items, and
the green check mark when it is okay to drop.
77/532
Okay to drop into a folder: To move an asset to a different folder, click and drag the asset to the
new folder. In the example below, the asset is moved to the folder. Note the blue highlight on the
folder, and the green check mark when it is okay to drop.
Not okay to drop over another asset: When attempting to move an asset, you cannot drop it
over another asset. In the example below, you cannot drop a train on an individual asset. Note
the status symbol .
78/532
3.3 Configuration Capacity

These limitations apply to the number of assets you can add to a database or the number of
devices connected to a System 1 server:
Configuration Exceeding Asset Limits

You cannot add more than 5,000 machine cases to a machine train. To add the new asset, you
must remove an existing machine case.
For database limitations and System 1 server configuration options, see System 1 Datasheet
(document 108M5214).
Configuration Exceeding System Limits

When attempting to connect to a device, you may encounter these error message if your
database is enabled for online data collection. If your database is not enabled for online data
collection, System 1 warns you against the same system limitations.
The machine specifications of System 1 server dictate system limitations:
l CPU
l RAM
l Hard drive capacity
For database limitations and System 1 server configuration options, see System 1 Datasheet
3.4 Add Monitoring Devices
79/532
You can configure some monitoring devices using Bently Nevada Monitor Configuration or 3500
Rack Configuration Software. You can then import the configuration into System 1. You can
configure the remaining devices within System 1 and send the offline configuration to the device.
Connect to a Monitoring Device

To add to a monitoring device and connect to data sources:

2. Select the Devices hierarchy and right-click Devices.
3. Click Connect to Device.

4. Select a device to add:
o Add Ranger Pro Gateway
o Add Commtest vbOnline Device
o Add 3500 DeviceAdd 3701 Device
o Add TDISecure DeviceAdd vbOnline Pro Device
o Add OPC Server
o Add Trendmaster DSM Device
o Add Manual Input
o Add 2300 Device
o Add 6.x Device
5. Synchronize Devices
6. Authenticating Devices
Delete a Device
To delete a device:

2. In the Machines or Devices hierarchy, select a device.
3. Right-click the device and choose Delete.
Create Offline Configurations

You can create an offline configuration for 3500 devices, vbOnline Pro, TDISecure, devices.
Alternatively, you can re-import the configuration. Right-click on an existing device and choose
Synchronize Configuration. The configuration changes are displayed.
80/532

2. In the Devices hierarchy, right-click on the database and choose Offline
Configuration and the type of device that you want to configure. Choose a device:
3500
a. The Windows Open dialog box is displayed. Navigate to the location of and select the
.RAK file:
b. Choose Open.
c. After importing or reimporting from a rack file, the configuration status is set to Out-
Of-Date.
d. To update the configuration, resynchronize the rack.
a. The Windows Open dialog box is displayed. Navigate to the location of and select the
.RAK file:
81/532
b. Choose Open.
c. After importing or reimporting from a rack file, the configuration status is set to Out-
Of-Date.
d. To update the configuration, resynchronize the rack.
vbOnline Pro
When vbOnline Pro is selected for offline configuration, a default configuration is

constructed without having to connect to an actual device.
a. Offline configuration is initiated. A vbOnlinePro Device containing a vbOnline Pro

Monitor is added to the Devices hierarchy.
b. The vbOnline Pro Monitor properties pane is displayed.
c. The default IP Address is displayed as ‘?’. Enter a valid IP Address.
d. Click Credentials and enter a User Name and Password.
e. Data collection is disabled by default.
TDISecure
82/532
a. Browse and select the .TD1 or .TD2 file.

b. Click Open.
c. After importing or reimporting from a rack file, the configuration status is
Configuration Out-Of-Date.
d. Resynchronize with the rack to download the configuration to the device.
Trendmaster
a. The Dynamic Scanning Module is added to the hierarchy.
b. To complete configuration, see Create DSM Offline Configuration.
If you import multiple copies of the same .RAK, .TD1, or .TD2 file, you must change the IP address in
the General tab and synchronize the device.
To troubleshoot errors, see 3500 Device Import Errors in online help.
Add Ranger Pro Gateway
For wireless condition monitoring and diagnostics, you can use a wireless gateway to connect
System 1 to a wireless gateway. When you add the wireless gateway to System 1, the application
retrieves and stores configuration data for the sensors.
l When you add or remove sensors, you must re-sync and save the configuration data. See
Synchronize Devices.
l To collect static and dynamic Ranger Pro measurement data, you must use the gateway
Generic Device Interface (GCI). Modbus/OPC can only collect overall static measurements.
l To avoid data loss and performance issues, do not connect more than one database to a
wireless gateway.
l To avoid losing measurement historic data, do not change Ranger Pro units or sub-units
after you begin collecting data using System 1.
Before Connecting to the Wireless Gateway

l Install System 1 18.2 or later.
l Install the Ranger Pro plugin (135M4604) available from the Flexera licensing server.
l Verify that all Ranger Pro wireless sensors are using firmware version 02.01.02.02 or later.
l Verify that all Ranger Pro wireless sensors are connected and publishing data to a
ISA100.11a gateway.
l Use the Ranger Pro configuration software to configure each Ranger Pro device.
l Use your gateway wireless device manager to create meaningful device tags.
Before Connecting to a Honeywell Gateway

The Honeywell OneWireless Device Manager (WDM) using firmware R310.2-04 limits the
number of Ranger Pro devices to 140 per gateway.
83/532
1. Open Honeywell OneWireless Device Manager.

2. Select a Ranger Pro device.
3. Expand Property Panel > Input Publication.
4. Verify that all measurement attributes are set correctly for the type of device selected. For
details, see the Ranger Pro User Guide (document 125M6113).
5. Expand Selection Panel > WDM > GCI.
6. Then expand Property Panel > Configuration. In Interface, verify:
o The Interface value is TCP Interface.
o The Licensing value is Licensed.
Before Connecting to a Yokogawa Gateway

1. In the Yokogawa Field Wireless Management Console, open Configurator.
2. Click Sampling Data. The Sampling Data pane is displayed.
3. Right-click on a device and click Edit. The Sampling Settings dialog box is displayed.
4. For each Ranger Pro device, verify
o The firmware version is correct.
o The capabilities file (.CFF) file is correct.
o The Read Parameters > Publication Period and Stale Limits are correct and valid.
For details, see the release notes that you downloaded with the capabilities file (.CFF) file.
5. In the Yokogawa Field Wireless Management Console, open Monitor.

6. Click the Topology Viewer button. The Topology Viewer pane is displayed.
7. Right-click on a device and click Device Properties. The Field Device Properties dialog box
is displayed.
8. Verify for each Ranger Pro device that the Operation Status is Published or Not Published.
If the status is Session Timeout, you must resolve the timeout issue before proceeding.
Add a Wireless Gateway

You can add from one to five wireless gateways to System 1. You can enable and disable each
gateway independently.
To add a Wireless gateway:
1. Select the Configure Workspace and Standard mode.

2. Choose Devices and right-click Assets .
3. Choose Connect to Device > Ranger Pro Wireless Gateway. The Add Ranger Pro Wireless
Gateway dialog box is displayed.
84/532
4. In the Credentials pane, enter:

o IP address
o Port number. (Yokogawa and Honeywell use 4901 as the default.)
5. Choose Add. Establishing the initial configuration may take from 5 to 10 minutes.
6. After the configuration is successfully imported, save the configuration.
System 1 adds the wireless gateway to the Devices hierarchy together with all Ranger Pro
sensors that are connected to the gateway. The application also retrieves configuration data for
the sensors.
Delayed Data Collection

If data collection is delayed beyond five minutes, the delay may be due to:
l Measurement data has been published yet

l Measurement channel is disabled.
l The device start date and time has not passed.
l The device is offline.
For more information about troubleshooting, see the Ranger Pro User Guide (document
125M6113).
Update Gateway IP Address

If you change the wireless gateway IP Address, to continue to collect data, you must modify the
gateway IP address used by System 1.
To modify the Ranger Pro gateway IP address in System 1:

2. Disable online data collection.
3. Select the gateway you need to change. In the General > Properties tab, modify the IP
Address.
Modify the tag or tag name only after you modify the IP address and sync the
configuration.

5. Enable online data collection.
6. System 1 displays a Configuration Out-of-Date message.
7. In the General properties tab, click Synchronize .
Add a New Ranger Pro Device

If you add one or more Ranger Pro devices to a gateway, or modify the device parameters in
Yokogawa or Honeywell, System 1 automatically detects the new device(s). This generates a
85/532
Configuration Out-of-date event.
To prevent System 1 from detecting a partially configured device, we recommend:
1. Before adding a new device, disable System 1 data collection on the gateway used by the
device.
a. Select the Configure Workspace and Standard Mode.
b. Select the Devices hierarchy.
c. Select Ranger Pro Wireless Gateways.
d. Select the gateway on which you want to disable data collection. Select the
Data Collection field and choose Disable.
2. Use the wireless gateway to provision the new device.
3. Use the wireless gateway to update the device tag names.
4. Use the Ranger Pro configuration software to configure the device units, subunits, and
frequency settings.
5. Re-enable data collection.
For more details about using the gateway, see the Ranger Pro User Guide (document 125M6113).
When you back up System 1, you must manually make a copy of the Ranger Pro
configuration.
Remove a Ranger Pro Device

To prevent accidentally moving devices to a Decommission Group, disable System 1 data
collection before changing devices on the gateway.
To safely remove a Ranger Pro device and retain its historical data:
1. Before removing a device, disable System 1 data collection.

2. Delete the device from the gateway.
o If you're using a Honeywell OneWireless Device Manager, first unprovision the sensor.
When the device disconnects, delete the device. If you retain provisioning data, the
device automatically rejoins the gateway.
o If you're using the Yokogawa Field Wireless Management Console, open
Configurator. Delete the device and download the change to the gateway.
For complete details, see the Ranger Pro User Guide (document 125M6113).
3. Enable System 1 data collection. After several minutes, the configuration change is
detected.
4. Synchronize configuration out of date and save.
Add Commtest vbOnline Device
86/532
Before adding a Commtest VbOnline device, you must convert Ascent data. See
Database Administration Guide (document 156M4815). If you add a Commtest VbOnline
device to System 1 with a Wind license, device states configuration, data storage, and
alarming is not supported.
To add a Commtest VbOnline Device:
1. Select the Configure Workspace and Standard Mode or Mapping mode.

2. Select the Devices hierarchy.
3. Right-click on Assets and choose Connect to Device > Commtest VbOnline. The
Commtest VbOnline dialog box is displayed.
If the Commtest VbOnline menu is not displayed, you must first install the
Commtest VbOnline plugin. You can download the plugin from the Flexera licensing
server.
4. In the Credentials pane, enter the device:

o IP Address
o Port Number
5. Choose Add. The Commtest VbOnline device is added to the Devices hierarchy along with
all Commtest VbOnline devices. The device name is the same name used by Ascent.
After you add the new device and enable Enable Data Collection, you cannot migrate additional
historical data.
Add 3500 Device
To connect to a 3500 device:

2. Select the Devices hierarchy. Right-click on Assets and choose Connect to Device >
3500. The Add 3500 Device dialog box is displayed.

3. To select a device, choose a method:
o In the Browse pane, select a device. Import Device IP Addresses If your device is not
displayed in the Browse pane, choose Refresh to update the list. Alternatively, you
can Import Device IP Addresses .
o In the Credentials pane, enter the device's Module IP Address. Enter the connection
Password for the device.
4. Click Add. The monitor's configuration is displayed in the Devices hierarchy. You can now
view plots and events for this monitor.
87/532
Configure Standard Unsupported Points and Custom Points
To configure standard unsupported points and custom points, if you have just installed System
1, custom points are displayed when you import a 3500 rack file, or by connecting to the rack. To
view custom points after upgrading your database, first synchronize the device.
Limitations
l Only Mode 0 protection setpoints configured on a 3500 device are imported into System 1.
l If there is a unit configuration conflict between a 6.x and 3500 device, synchronization may
result in data loss.
Add TDISecure Device
To connect to a TDISecure device:

3. Right-click on Assets and choose Connect to Device > TDISecure. The Add TDISecure
Device dialog box is displayed.

4. In the General pane, verify that TDISecure is the selected Type.
5. In the Browse pane, select a device, or in the Credential pane, enter the device's Module
IP Address. If your device is not displayed in the Browse pane, click Refresh.
6. Enter the connection Password for the device.
7. Click Add.
The device's configuration is displayed in the Devices hierarchy. You can now view plots and
events on this device.
Add Modbus TCP Devices
A System 1 database supports a maximum of 200 Modbus devices.
Connect to a Modbus TCP Device

System 1 is acting as Client/Master and the Modbus device is the Server/Slave.
To connect to a Modbus TCP device:
88/532

2. Right-click on a node in the Devices hierarchy and choose Connect to Device >
Modbus. The Add Modbus Device dialog box is displayed.
3. In the Type field, Modbus TCP is selected.

4. In the Module IP Address field, enter the Modbus device IP address.
5. Enter the Port Number. The default is 502.
6. Enter the Modbus RTU Slave Address. The default is 1. If you slave a Modbus device, the
IP address and the RTU slave address must be unique for each device.
7. Click Add. In the General pane, the Modbus Devices group is displayed.
8. Choose File > Save. The device status is updated to Communicating.
9. In the Devices hierarchy, expand Modbus Devices group and select the Modbus Device
under it. The properties are displayed.
89/532
10. 1 Based Device is enabled by default. If the first device register address begins with the digit
0, clear 1 Based Device.
11. Enter the device Serial Number.
12. Enter Timeout and Maximum Data Byte Size.
o Timeout The time that System 1 waits for the Modbus device to respond before
invalidating the call.
o Maximum Data Byte Size The maximum size of a block of data that can be
transferred by the Modbus device.
Create Modbus Group
To add points to a Modbus Device, first create a group:
1. In the Devices hierarchy, choose one of two methods to create a group:

o Right-click on Modbus Device and choose Add Group. A Modbus Group is displayed
in the Devices hierarchy under Modbus Device. Its properties are displayed in the
General pane.
o Select a Modbus Device and import a Modbus Item Template.CSV file.
2. In the Modbus Group properties tab, rename the generic group name. The group name
must be unique to the device. Use a name that describes the points you want to add to
this group.
90/532
3. (Optional) Modify the Modbus Data Collection Rate. The fastest rate is 200 ms.
You can configure a maximum of 20% of all points to collect data at sub-second
collection rate. We recommend you create a group that contains only points that
collect data at sub-second rates. Sub-second rates are only supported when
using PostgreSQL.
You can also configure sub-second storage rates (200 ms fastest supported for
Trended Variables for Modbus group under state-based storage settings in
Configure Data Collection States and Points . The fastest supported Device storage
rate for Trended Variables is 200 ms for Modbus devices.
4. After you create a Modbus group, to bulk configure Modbus points, export, edit, and then
import a Modbus Item Template.CSV file as described below.
Manage Modbus Points

To create and modify Modbus points, the quickest method is to export the Modbus Item
Template.csv file from System 1. Modify the points in the template and import the template file into
the database as described below.
Export Modbus Template

To export and edit a Modbus template:

2. Right-click on a Modbus Device or Modbus Group and choose Export > Modbus Items
Template. The Windows Save As dialog box is displayed.
3. Navigate to the location in which you want to save the file. The default file name is Modbus
Item Template.csv . Click Save.
4. Using a third-party tool, edit the Modbus Item Template.csv file.
5. Add points. The template column headings are described below. Required values are in
bold.
91/532
Field Name Status Description
Action type Required Valid values are: Add, Update, or Delete.
Point Name Required Alphanumeric characters only.
Tag Name Optional Alphanumeric characters only.
Group Name Required Alphanumeric characters only.
Function Register
Description
Code Type
1 Read Coil Reads the ON/OFF

Status status of discrete
outputs (0X
references, coils) in
the slave
2 Read Input Reads the ON/OFF

Status status of discrete
inputs (1X references)
Function Code Required in the slave
3 Read Reads the binary

Holding contents of holding
Registers registers (4X
references) in the
slave
4 Read Input Reads the binary

Registers contents of input
registers (3X
references) in the
slave
Enter the location of the Register Address from

Location Required which the data is to be read. The Function Code and
Location combination must be unique to the group.
If the Action Type is Update, New Function Code is

New Function
Optional required to replace the Function Code for the
Code
Modbus point.
New Location Optional If the Action Type is Update, New Location is
92/532
Field Name Status Description
required to replace the Location for the Modbus

point.
Enter a data type number from the Supported

Data Type Required
Modbus Data Types table below.
Hardware Min
Required Device minimum scale
Scale
Hardware Max
Required Device maximum scale
Scale
Min Scale Required System 1 minimum scale
Max Scale Required System 1 maximum scale
Required if you add a unit measurement; optional if

you add an enum measurement. Must be a valid
measurement unit. To view available units and a
Unit Optional
description, select a Modbus Group. Right-click and
choose Export > Units. The units.CSV file created
contains all valid units.
Required only if you add an Enum point. Enter the

Enum Required
system- or user-defined Enum.
Valid values are Over, Under, In band, Out of band. To

Alarm Type Optional configure or disable setpoints for Modbus points,
Alarm Type is required.
Enter a static or dynamic setpoint. The format of a

dynamic setpoint is "Function Code|Location". For
Level 4 3 2 1
Optional example, if the dynamic setpoint tag is configured at
Under
location 100 (register address 100) of Holding
registers, enter 3|100.
Enter a static or dynamic setpoint. The format of a

dynamic setpoint is "Function Code|Location". For
Level 4 3 2 1
Optional example, if the dynamic setpoint tag is configured at
Over
location 100 (register address 100) of Holding
registers, enter 3|100.
6. Import the modified Modbus Items Template.csv. For details, see Import Modbus Device
Configuration .
Modbus Points Configuration Examples
93/532
Figure 3 - 1: Modbus Enum points configuration example
Figure 3 - 2: Modbus Process points configuration when Modbus device is exporting real
values
Figure 3 - 3: Modbus Process points configuration when Modbus device is exporting scaled
values
Supported Modbus Data Types

Data Type Decimal
Data Type Supported Data Range
Number Precision
A single byte of data with a range of 0 - 255. If

1 UL - 1 Byte there are multiple bytes, the first byte of data 0
received is used.
2 UL - 2 Bytes Two bytes of data with a range of 0 - 65,535. 0
Four bytes of data with a range of 0 -

3 UL - 4 Bytes 0
4,294,967,295.
UL - 4 Bytes Same as the UL - 4 Bytes above, except that

4 0
reverse the byte order is reversed after it is received.
A single byte of data with a decimal precision

of one and a range of 0 - 25.5. If there are
5 UL 1 dec - 1 Byte multiple bytes, the first byte of data received is 1
used. The decimal place is shifted after the
byte is received.
UL 1 dec - 2
6 0 - 6553.5 1
Bytes
94/532
Data Type Decimal

Number Precision
UL 1 dec - 4
7 0 - 429,496,729.5 1
Bytes
UL 1 dec - 4 0 - 429,496,729.5 (bytes reversed after data is

8 1
Bytes reverse received)
9 UL 2 dec - 1 Byte 0 - 2.55 2
UL 2 dec - 2
10 0 - 655.35 2
Bytes
UL 2 dec - 4
11 0 - 42,949,672.95 2
Bytes

12 2
13 UL 3 dec - 1 Byte 0 - 0.255 3
UL 3 dec - 2
14 0 - 65.535 3
Bytes
UL 3 dec - 4
15 0 - 4,294,967.295 3
Bytes

16 3
17 UL 4 dec - 1 Byte 0 - 0.0255 4
UL 4 dec - 2
18 0 - 6.5535 4
Bytes
UL 4 dec - 4
19 0 - 429,496.7295 4
Bytes
UL 4 dec - 4 0 - 429,496.7295 (bytes reversed after data is

20 4
Four bytes of data represented in floating

21 Float - 4 Bytes 4
point
Float - 4 Bytes Four bytes of data represented in floating

22 4
Reverse point that are reversed after data is received.
A single byte of data that uses Two's

23 2 CS - 1 Byte Complement Representation, with a range of 0
-128 to 127.
Two bytes of data that use Two's Complement

24 2 CS - 2 Bytes 0
Representation, with a range of -32768 to
95/532
Data Type Decimal

Number Precision
32767.
Four bytes of data that use Two's

25 2 CS - 4 Bytes Complement Representation, with a range of 0
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.
2 CS - 4 Bytes Same as the 2 CS - 4 Bytes but the bytes are

26 0
reverse reversed after data is received.
2 CS 1 dec - 1
27 -12.8 to 12.7 1
Byte
2 CS 1 dec - 2
28 -3276.8 to 3276.7 1
Bytes
2 CS 1 dec - 4
29 -214,748,364.8 to 214,748,364.7 1
Bytes
2 CS 1 dec - 4
30 -214,748,364.8 to 214,748,364.7 1
Bytes reverse
2 CS 2 dec - 1
31 -1.28 to 1.27 2
Byte
2 CS 2 dec - 2
32 -327.68 to 327.67 2
Bytes
2 CS 2 dec - 4
33 -21,474,836.48 to 21,474,836.47 2
Bytes
2 CS 2 dec - 4
34 -21,474,836.48 to 21,474,836.47 2
Bytes reverse
2 CS 3 dec - 1
35 -.128 to .127 3
Byte
2 CS 3 dec - 2
36 -32.768 to 32.767 3
Bytes
2 CS 3 dec - 4
37 -2,147,483.648 to 2,147,483.647 3
Bytes
2 CS 3 dec - 4
38 -2,147,483.648 to 2,147,483.647 3
Bytes reverse
2 CS 4 dec - 1
39 -0.0128 to 0.0127 4
Byte
2 CS 4 dec - 2
40 -3.2768 to 3.2767 4
Bytes
96/532
Data Type Decimal

Number Precision
2 CS 4 dec - 4
41 -214,748.3648 to 214,748.3647 4
Bytes
2 CS 4 dec - 4
42 -214,748.3648 to 214,748.3647 4
Bytes reverse
l UL A positive range of numbers.

l CS A range of numbers that can be negative or positive.
l Float Real numbers that are typically shown in scientific notation.
l N dec The decimal precision.
l Reverse The received data bytes are reversed.
l All data types vary in size, from one to four bytes.
l If the number of bytes used by a single register is less than the total number of bytes in
the data value, then multiple registers are read in succession, beginning at the
configured register address. For example, it is common for each register to only hold two
bytes of data. To read a data type of four bytes, two consecutive registers are read. The
configured register address is the first one.
Import Modbus Device Configuration

To import Modbus device configuration:

2. Right click on device or group and choose Import > Modbus Items. If you right-click on a
Group, only points in that group are added or updated.
3. Select Modbus Item Template.csv.
4. The points are displayed in the General properties tab.
5. To view and modify setpoints, choose Measurements > Setpoints. Spectrums and
Waveforms are not supported. Modbus only supports static data.
Add 3701 Device

3. Right-click on Assets and choose Connect to Device > 3701. The Add 3701 Device
dialog box is displayed.
97/532
4. In the General pane, select a Type:

o ADAPT 3701/44 Aeroderivative
o ADAPT 3701/46 Hydro
o ADAPT 3701/40 Machinery Dynamics
o In the Browse pane, select a Device Name. If your device is not displayed in the
Browse pane, click Refresh. If the device is still not displayed in the Browse pane, see
Firewall Rules.
When selecting a Duplex device from the Browse pane, both Module 1 IP Address
and Module 2 IP Address is displayed. System 1 connects to the Module 1 IP Address
and import the configuration. To connect to the Module 2 IP Address, enter this into
the Module 1 IP Address field.
o In the Credentials pane, enter the device's Module IP Address.
Enter the User Name and connection Password for the device.
6. Choose device Redundancy: Simplex or Duplex.
Simplex and Duplex redundancies are supported for all three ADAPT device types.
7. Click Add.
The monitor's configuration is displayed in the Devices hierarchy on the left side of the screen.
You can now view plots and events on this monitor.
System 1 supports 3701 GT Firmware version 3.0 and later.
Configure LM2500 or LM6000 Assets
If you attempt to use Bently Nevada Monitor Configuration to configure a 3701 device with either
a General Electric LM2500 or LM6000 turboshaft gas turbine, the train configuration is not
displayed in System 1.
To monitor these assets, configure them in System 1. Use the Asset Library and map the
channels in Mapping Mode.
Add 2300 Device
98/532

2300. The Add 2300 Device dialog box is displayed.

3. In the General pane, select a Type.
If you are connecting to an in-process OPC server, leave these fields blank.
o 2300/20 Vibration Monitor

o 2300/25 Vibration Monitor
a. In the Browse pane, select a device. If your device is not displayed in the Browse
pane, click Refresh.
b. In the Credential pane, enter the device's Module IP Address. Enter the connection
User Name and Password for the device.
5. Click Add.
The device's configuration are displayed in the Devices hierarchy. You can display plots and
events on this monitor.
Add vbOnline Pro Device
To connect to a vbOnline Pro device:

vbOnline Pro. The Add vbOnline Pro Device dialog box is displayed.
3. In the General pane, verify that vbOnline Pro is the selected Type.
4. In the Browse pane, select a device, or in the Credential pane, enter the device's Module
IP Address. Alternatively, you can Import Device IP Addresses . If your device is not
displayed in the Browse pane, click Refresh.
5. Enter the User Name and connection Password for the device.
6. Click Add.
The monitor's configuration is displayed in the Properties pane. You can now view plots and
events on this monitor.
To configure latching for a vbOnline Pro device, see Configuring vbOnline Pro Devices.
Upgrade vbOnline Pro Firmware
99/532
To upgrade vbOnline Pro firmware for: Use:
One monitor Bently Nevada Monitor Configuration
Two or more monitors System 1
Upgrade Firmware of Multiple vbOnline Pro Devices

Only authorized users can upgrade firmware.
To upgrade the firmware of vbOnline Pro devices connected to System 1:

2. In the Devices hierarchy, right-click on the vbOnline Pro device group and choose
Firmware Upgrade. The Firmware Upgrade dialog box displays a list of all connected
vbOnline Pro monitors.
3. Copy the password from an external application.
4. Select the password column of one or more vbOnline Pro devices. To select multiple
devices, press or .
5. Right click and choose Paste.
6. Choose Upgrade. System 1 begins to upgrade the firmware of each device and displays
the process status in the Firmware Upgrade dialog box.
7. While the firmware upgrade is in progress, you can click Cancel.

o The process is completed for the devices whose firmware upgrade is already in
progress.
o The process is canceled for all other devices.
8. To complete other tasks during the upgrade process, you can minimize the Firmware
Upgrade dialog box.
Configure vbOnline Pro Devices
Unlike other supported devices, you can only use System 1 to configure vbOnline Pro devices.
To configure network settings, manage users, and upgrade firmware for vbOnline Pro
devices, use Bently Nevada Monitor Configuration.
Configure Synchronous Waveforms
100/532
For vbOnline Pro devices, synchronous waveforms are calculated based on the configured input
speed and appropriate ratios. This configuration information is sent to the device to either
compute synchronous waveform samples or tag the asynchronous waveforms with a speed.
Default Configuration
When connecting to a vbOnline Pro device that has not been configured, a default configuration
is loaded.
l Points The default configuration displays 12 acceleration channels and two Keyphasor
channels. In the Associated Speed field, select a speed channel to associate with the
Acceleration Channel.
l Spectrums and Waveforms Each acceleration channel is configured with three
asynchronous waveforms:
o Accl Wf(5000Hz)
o Vel Wf(2000Hz)
o Demod Wf(2000Hz)
When you change the Fmax value, the application changes the default measurement
names, and each Keyphasor channel is configured with a Speed Wf(10000Hz) waveform.
l Trended Variables
o Each acceleration channel is configured with two trended variables: Bias and Direct.
o Each Keyphasor channel is configured with two trended variables: Speed and Gap.
l Setpoints
o Condition monitoring over alarm setpoints are generated for each Direct and Speed
measurement.
o State-based alarms configured in the Data Collection Tab are displayed in the
Setpoints tab.
l PeakDemod Use PeakDemod for measuring very low speed machines because the
Algorithm widens the peak measurements and retains the full amplitude of the impacting
events in the waveform. The impact spikes are clearly displayed above the noise floor. Both
eClassic and Peak Demod detect roller element bearing faults extremely effectively before
any physical surface damage is visible (while the fault is still a sub-surface spall). To
configure PeakDemod measurement, choose Algorithm Type in the Demod Waveform
measurement as Peak. Set the Demod bandwidth and FMax.
Alarm Information
vbOnline Pro devices do not support high resolution alarm data capture. Alarm plots
display a snapshot of the all the measurements associated with the alarm.
These alarm settings cannot be modified.
Severity 3 and 4 Hysteresis
101/532
l The acceleration channel severity 3 and 4 hysteresis for vbOnline Pro devices is 1/64 of the
Full Scale Range of the measurement.
l The speed channel severity 3 and 4 hysteresis for vbOnline Pro devices is 10 rpm.
Alarm Time Delay

The alarm time delay is 60 seconds. When the alarm value is greater than or equal to the
setpoint value of the measurement on the acceleration channel, alarms are initiated between 30
and 60 seconds after the event.
Edit vbOnline Pro Configuration

Edit the default configuration properties for non-wind vbOnline Pro devices. You can only edit
bold items. For details, see Modify Machine or Device Properties .
To configure both software states and device states on vbOnline Pro devices, see vbOnline Pro
State Configuration.
Add and Edit Measurements
l To add more trended variables in addition to the default measurements, see Add Trended
Variable .
l To add more waveforms, see Add Spectrum/Waveform .
The vbOnline Pro devices only support synchronous acceleration waveforms.
For details on editing measurements, see Modify Instrumentation Properties .
Edit Wind Turbine Controller Configuration

If you have a System 1 Wind license, you can configure wind turbine controllers that
communicate with vbOnline Pro.
Edit Wind Controller Configuration

To edit the wind controller configuration:

2. In the Devices Hierarchy, select the vbOnline Pro Monitor. The General tab displays the
monitor properties.
3. In the Controller Configuration field, select a value:
o Simulated. No communication between the controller and the monitor. The monitor
uses the power speed curve of the turbine to derive the mode and torque value.
o IONet. Communication between the controller and the monitor uses IONet. The
controller power and speed values are automatically communicated to the
monitor.
o Modbus TCP. Communication between the controller and the monitor uses Modbus
TCP. The device reads power and speed values from the controller via either Holding
102/532
or Input Registers. The monitor also communicates CBM Alert, CBM Warning, and

CBM Instrument Fault status to the controller.
Modify Wind Controller Modbus Properties

The device uses the configured registers to read reads power and speed data from the wind
turbine controller.
To modify the wind controller Modbus properties:
1. Select the Data Collection tab and the Modbus subtab. The Modbus Protocol and the
Register Configuration properties are displayed. In the General pane:
a. Modify the default Controller IP Address.
b. (Optional) Enable the Most Significant Word First check box. When enabled, if a
numerical quantity larger than a single byte is transmitted, the most significant byte
is sent first.
2. In the Register Configuration pane, modify the default value as needed:
a. Controller Power.
b. Controller Speed.
c. Configure the register you want to use to export status values:
o CBM Alert. If at least one device trended measurement is in Level 4 alarm state,
the device sends the CBM alert status to the turbine controller.
o CBM Warning. If at least one device calculated measurement is in Level 3
alarm state, the device sends a CBM warning status to the turbine controller.
o CBM Instrument Fault. If at least one channel is in Not OK state, the device
sends a CBM Instrument Fault status to the turbine controller.
Download the Configuration

To download the new configuration to the vbOnline Pro device, See Synchronize Devices on
page 177. the configuration.
vbOnline Pro Device States
vbOnline Pro devices support device states that enable offline state computation. To configure
device states, see State Configuration.
About Device States

Device states are software-created states that are sent to vbOnline Pro devices so they can
monitor assets when the device is not connected to System 1. Before importing offline data into
System 1, you need to accurately tag and filter data and associate custom device states with the
103/532
asset.
To associate device state data to an asset:
l Add a custom mapping point to the asset.

l Map the asset to a point included in the device state collection group.
To set up device states, see Add Device State.
Device States Parameters

Table 3 - 1: vbOnline Pro device state parameters
Feature Device State
Trigger Logic Application Applied within the device
Maximum of twelve (12) states

Number of States
supported
Maximum of 6 user-defined groups

State Groups
available
Data Collection Populated only in Devices hierarchy

Hierarchy Selection selection
Maximum of 6 trigger definitions per

Trigger Limits
device state
Limitations
Device states cannot be triggered using the measurements of other vbOnline Pro device or
software calculated measurements.
Device State Configuration and Behavior

Device state configuration and behavior:
l State variables update every 2.5 seconds in current values mode.

l Multiple states are reported when state definitions overlap.
l State triggers are not evaluated for inactive states.
l True AND voting is supported.
Data Storage Specifications Example
104/532
Figure 3 - 4: Example storage rates configuration
Based on the example Storage Rates configuration above, the Pump On state is enabled for
data collection and begins to collect Trend Data and Waveform Data every 2 minutes and 30
minutes, respectively.
The Pump Off state is disabled for data collection, so no data is collected while this state is active.
Figure 3 - 5: Example of alarm, trend, and waveform data collected for this device
Alarm snapshots are always stored irrespective of machine state, and states and alarms are
evaluated every 5 seconds.
If a machine switches states more frequently within a configured waveform storage rate, the
waveform is first collected at the initial state transition and then again only after the elapsed
time configured. State transition data is always stored to facilitate accurate plotting.
Trend data can be stored as fast as once every 30 seconds while waveforms can be stored as
fast as once every 10 minutes.
To calculate long term waveform storage rates, view the General tab of the System 1
Database Manager. This setting configures long-term waveform storage rates across the entire
device and is not tied to each individual device state.
105/532
Because vbOnline Pro devices are scanning devices, data stored by the device always uses a
timestamp 10 minutes older than the current data in System 1. During offline operation, data can
(depending on the current configuration) be collected as often as every 5 seconds.
State-Based Alarming Behavior

In addition to the standard set of alarm setpoints, you can choose state-based alarm setpoints
for each device state:
l Choose Standard alarming to evaluate data against the configured alarm levels for the
standard set of setpoints regardless of what device state the machine is operating in.
l Choose State-Based to configure setpoints for:
o Device-calculated measurements such as Direct
o Software-calculated measurements such as spectral bands
Use Modbus to Export vbOnline Pro Data
You can use vbOline Pro to export data to third-party systems, like Distributed Control System
(DCS) data, using Modbus over Ethernet protocol. Data available for export includes Direct, Bias,
Gap, Speed, and channel status Not OK for all applicable vbOnline Pro channels. The export uses
fixed holding registers from either port A or port B of a vbOnline Pro device. Either port supports up
to three Modbus clients. One port connects with Modscan, or similar tool, to get Modbus data
and another port connects with System 1.
Data Export Overview

The vbOnline Pro device can export trend data and channel status like Not OK via Modbus using
any port on the device (Port A and Port B) to third party systems.
106/532
Figure 3 - 6: Example of a customer who wants to restrict and segregate

ports for communicating with System 1 and to the DCS via Modbus.
Register Data Mapping

The holding registers are a "fixed" type with Full Scale Range of 65535 and with the Most
Significant Word First field set as true. Do not modify these registers.
l All direct measurements - 1 register/measurement

l All bias data - 1 register/measurement
l All speed data - 1 register/measurement
l All gap data - 1 register/measurement
l All channel states - 4 registers/channel
You can verify values received on Modbus by changing the Full Scale (top scale to bottom scale)
for every measurement. The formula is:
Measurement value in Engineering Units = (Full Scale Range / 65535) * (Data in Modbus Tool)
Modbus exported values and statuses are for trending purposes only. They are used to
understand the overall health of the machine and should not be used for any other
purpose.
Fixed Register Table
107/532
l Most Significant Word First: Yes

l Register Configuration: Fixed
l Full Scale Range: 65535
108/532
Startin
Top Botto Scale Scale
g Modul Channe Tag Channel Data Unit
Bit Scal m Facto Facto
Registe e l Name Type Type s
e Scale r r Unit
r
40001 16 1 1 Direct. Accel. Real

Channe Channel As Configured
l1

l2

l3

l4

l5

l6

l7

l8

l9

l 10

l 11

l 12
109/532
Startin
e Scale r r Unit
r
40013 16 1 1 Bias. Accel. Real

l1

l2

l3

l4

l5

l6

l7

l8

l9

l 10

l 11

l 12
110/532
Startin
e Scale r r Unit
r
40025 16 1 1 Speed . Speed Real

l1
40026 16 2 2 Speed . Speed Real

l2
40027 16 1 1 Gap . Speed Real

l1
40028 16 2 2 Gap. Speed Real

l2
40032 1 1 Status. Accel. 64-bit

6 Channe Channel Statu -
4 l1 s

4 l2 s

4 l3 s

4 l4 s

4 l5 s

4 l6 s

4 l7 s

4 l8 s
111/532
Startin
e Scale r r Unit
r

4 l9 s

4 l 10 s

4 l 11 s

4 l 12 s
40080 1 1 Status. As 64-bit

6 Speed Configure Statu -
4 Channe d s
l1
40084 2 1 Status. As 64-bit -

6 Speed Configure Statu
4 Channe d s
l2
Use vbOnline Pro as Modbus Client

You can use vbOnline Pro to import data from third-party systems, like Distributed Control
System (DCS) data, using Modbus over Ethernet protocol. The device measurements also help
drive the device states. For supported data types, see Supported Modbus Data Types.
Connect to the Modbus TCP Device

To use vbOnlinePro to import data, first connect to the Modbus TCP device:

3. Expand the vbOnline Pro Monitor devices and a vbOnline Pro Monitor.
4. Select a Modbus Server node.
5. Select General > Properties.
6. If the first device register address begins with the digit 0, clear 1 Based Device.
7. In the IP Address field, enter the Modbus Device IP address.
112/532
8. Verify that the Modbus RTU Slave Address field is correct. The default is 1. If when you
added the Modbus device, you entered a Modbus RTU Slave Address, the IP Address and
the Modbus RTU Slave Address must be unique for each device.
9. In the Port Number field, enter the device port number. The default is 502.
10. In the Timeout field, enter the time (in ms)that vbOnline Pro waits for the Modbus device to
respond before invalidating the call. The default is 15,000.
11. Click File > Save. The device status is updated and the configuration status changes to Out
of Date.
12. Synchronize the Modbus device. Right-click on the Modbus Server and choose Import >
Modbus Items.
13. Click File > Save. The device status is updated and the configuration status is updated.
Manage Modbus Points

To create and modify Modbus points, the quickest method is to export the Modbus Item Template.csv
file from System 1. Then modify the points in the template and import the template file into the
database.
To export and edit the Modbus template:

3. Right-click on the Modbus Server and choose Export >Modbus Items Template. The
Windows Save As dialog box is displayed.
4. Navigate to the location in which you want to save the file. The default file name is Modbus
Item Template.csv . Click Save.
5. Using a third-party tool, edit the Modbus Item Template.csv file.
6. Add points to the file. The template column headings are described below. Required values
are in bold.
113/532
Name Status Description
Action Required
Valid values are: Add, Update, or Delete.
type
Point Required
Alphanumeric characters only.
Name
Tag Optional
Alphanumeric characters only.
Name
Modbus Required
Server Alphanumeric characters only.
Name
Register Required Holding Reads the binary contents of holding registers (4X
Type Registers references) in the server.
Input Registers Reads the binary contents of input registers (3X

references) in the server.
Register Required Enter the location of the Register Address from which the data is to
Address be read. The Register Type and Address combination must be
unique to the group.
New Optional
If the Action Type is Update, New Register Type is required to
Register
replace the Register Address for the Modbus point.
Type
New Optional
If the Action Type is Update, New Register Type is required to
Register
replace the Register Address for the Modbus point.
Address
Data Required Enter a data type number from the Supported Modbus Data Types
Type table below.
Hardware Required
Device minimum scale.
Min Scale
Hardware Required
Max Device maximum scale.
Scale
Min Scale Required System 1 minimum scale.
Max Required
System 1 maximum scale.
Scale
114/532
Name Status Description
Unit Required Must be a valid measurement unit. To view available units and a
description, select a Modbus Server. Right-click and choose
Export > Units. The units.csv file created contains all supported units.
Alarm Optional Valid values are Over, Under, In band,and Out of band. To
Type configure or disable setpoints for Modbus points, Alarm Type is
required.
Level 4 3 Optional
Enter a static setpoint.
Under
Level 4 3 Optional Enter a static setpoint.

Over
7. Import the modified Modbus Items Template.csv. For details, see Import Modbus Points below.
Import Modbus Points

To import Modbus points:

3. Right click on Modbus Server and choose Import > Modbus Items. The Windows Open
4. Navigate to the location where you saved the modified Modbus Items Template.csv file. Select it
and click Open.
5. The new or modified points for the selected Modbus Server are displayed in the General
properties tab.
6. To view and modify setpoints, choose Measurements > Setpoints.
Modbus only supports static data. Spectrums and Waveforms are not supported.
Add OPC DA Server
Before completing these steps, verify the DCOM settings for the OPC server and client have
been configured. See Configure OPC DCOM Settings.
System 1 supports a maximum of 1,000 points.
To connect to an OPC DA server:
115/532

2. Right-click on a node in the Devices hierarchy and choose Connect to Device > OPC.
The Add OPC Server dialog box is displayed.
3. In the Type field, verify that OPC DA is selected.

4. In the Server Name field, enter localhost or the name of the local machine, or if on a
different machine, enter an IP address.
5. In the Browse pane, available Program IDs are displayed, if any.
6. Select the Program ID of the OPC DA program.
7. In the Credentials pane, enter the OPC server connection Domain, User Name, and
Password. (If connecting to an in-process OPC server, leave these fields blank.)
8. Click Test to test the connection before adding. If the connection is valid, this message is
displayed:
116/532
9. Click Add. In the General pane, OPC Server properties are displayed.
10. If needed, modify the Server Location.

o Standard (default). Data is collected on the transmitter.
o Replicated Network. Data is collected only on the receiver.
To initiate the connection on the replicated server:

a. Locate the directory in which System 1 is installed.
b. Right-click on System1.Opc.Authentication.Manager and choose Run as
Administrator.
c. Enter the OPC server connection Domain, Server, User Name, and Password.
d. Click Save. Data collection on the replicated server begins.
Next: Format OPC DA Data
After adding the OPC DA server to the Devices hierarchy, format OPC data for import into System
1.
Configure OPC DCOM Settings
117/532
Before connecting to an OPC server, you must configure Distributed Component Object Model
(DCOM) communication settings.
If you encounter errors, see Troubleshoot OPC Errors in online help.
Definitions
l OPC Server is the computer on which the OPC Server is hosted. When you are configuring
DCOM settings to use System 1 as an OPC server, this computer is also the location of the
System 1 OPC Server.
l OPC Client is the computer on which the System 1 Server is installed.
Supported Scenarios
l The OPC Server and the OPC Client are located on the same Windows domain.
l The OPC Server and the OPC Client are located on the same Windows workgroup.
l The OPC Server is on a workgroup and the OPC Client is on a domain.
User Credentials
l Domain - Domains can use both local user accounts and domain accounts.
l Workgroup - Workgroups only use local user accounts.
If using local user accounts, verify that the user and associated credentials are identically
created on both the OPC Server and the OPC Client.
Configure Same Domain or Workgroup

Before configuring the client or the server, complete these steps:
l Disable Windows Firewall and Simple File Sharing on both the OPC Server and OPC Client.
l If a hardware firewall exists between the OPC Server and OPC Client, verify that the ports
required for DCOM communication are enabled. For details, see Select Client and Server
Options.
Configure OPC Server

To configure DCOM communication on the OPC Server computer:
Grant Permissions to Logged In User
1. Press Windows+R; enter dcomcnfg and click OK. Component Services is displayed.
2. Choose Component Services > Computers > My Computer.Right-click My Computer and
click Properties > COM Security.
118/532
3. In the Launch and Activation Permission pane, choose Edit Default. The Launch and
4. Click Add. The Select Users or Groups dialog box is displayed.
5. In Enter the object names to select (examples), enter the user name of the logged on
user.
6. Click OK.
7. Verify that all permissions are enabled for the user. Click OK.
8. In My Computer Properties, click OK.
Grant Permissions to OPC Enum
1. In the left pane of the Component Services dialog box, choose My Computer
> DCOM Config.
119/532
2. Right-click OpcEnum and choose Properties > Security.
3. In the Launch and Activation Permission pane, choose Customize > Edit. The Launch and
4. Click Add. The Select Users, Computers, Service Accounts or Groups dialog box is
displayed.
5. In Enter the object names to select (examples), enter the machine name of name of the
OPC Client computer.
6. Click OK.
7. Verify that all permissions are enabled for the OPC Client computer. Click OK.
8. Click OK twice. The OpcEnum Properties dialog box is displayed.
9. In the Access Permissions pane, choose Customize > Edit. The Access Permission dialog
box is displayed.
displayed.
11. In Enter the object names to select (examples), enter the machine name of the OPC
Client computer.
12. Click OK.
13. Verify that all permissions are enabled for machine name of the OPC Client computer. Click
OK.
If both the OPC Server and OPC Client are on different domains, instead of the machine
name of the OPC Client computer, use "ANONYMOUS LOGON".
120/532
Grant Permissions to Logged In User on the OPC Server
> DCOM Config
2. In the DCOM Config folder, right-click the name of the OPC Server and click Properties. In
this example, our OPC Server is Kepware Communications Server 5.19.
3. From the Kepware Communications Server 5.19 Properties dialog box, choose Security:
4. In the Launch and Activation Permission pane, choose Edit. The Launch and Activation
5. Choose Add. The Select Users or Groups dialog box is displayed.
user.
7. Click OK.
9. Click OK twice. The Kepware Communications Server 5.19 Properties dialog box is
displayed.
10. In the Security tab Access Permissions pane, click Edit. The Access Permissions dialog box
is displayed.
displayed.
12. In the Enter the object names to select (examples), enter the user name of the logged on
user.
13. Click OK.
121/532
Configure Authentication Level (Workgroup Only)
Complete these steps only if the two computers are on the same Windows workgroup.
> DCOM Config.
2. Right-click the name of the OPC Server from with in the DCOM Config folder and click
Properties. In this example, our OPC Server is Kepware Communications Server 5.19.
3. In Kepware Communications Server 5.19 Properties, choose General. Verify that
Authentication Level > Connect is selected.
4. Click OK.
Configure OPC Client

To configure DCOM communication on the OPC Client computer:
Grant Permission to OPC Client Host Service
displayed.
2. Choose My Computer > DCOM Config.
3. Right-click Host.System1.OPC.ClientDhp and choose Properties. The
Host.System1.OPC.ClientDhp Properties dialog box is displayed.
122/532
4. Choose Security.
box is displayed.
6. Choose Add. The Enter the object names to select (examples) dialog box is displayed.
7. Enter the machine name of the OPC Server.
8. Click OK.
9. Verify that all permissions are enabled for machine name of the OPC Client computer. Click
OK.
If the OPC Server and OPC Client are on different domains, instead of the machine name
of the OPC Client computer, use "ANONYMOUS LOGON".
Configure for Workgroup to Domain

Before configuring the client or the server:
l Disable Windows Firewall and Simple File Sharing on both the OPC Server and OPC Client.
l If a hardware firewall exists between the OPC Server and OPC Client, verify that the ports
required for DCOM communication are enabled. For details, see Select Client and Server
Options.
Configure OPC Server

To configure DCOM communication on the OPC Server computer:
Step 1: Grant Permissions to Logged In User
123/532
displayed.
2. In the left pane of the Component Services dialog box, choose Component Services >
Computers.
3. Right-click My Computer and click Properties > COM Security.
4. In the Launch and Activation Permission pane, choose Edit Default. The Launch and
Activate Permission dialog box is displayed.
displayed.
user.
7. Click OK. The Launch and Activation Permission dialog box is displayed.
9. In My Computer Properties, click OK.
Step 2: Grant Permissions to the OPC Server
1. In the left pane of the Component Services dialog box, choose My Computer >
DCOM Config.
2. Select the OPC Server you are using:
o If you are using System 1 as an OPC Server, choose System 1 OPC Server.
o If you are using a third-party server, choose OPCEnum.
124/532
3. Choose Properties > General. Set Authentication Level to Connect.
4. Choose Security.
5. In the Launch and Activation Permission pane, choose Customize > Edit. The Launch and
6. Click Add.
7. In Enter the object names to select (examples), enter <ServerMachineName>/<UserName> .
8. Click OK.
9. Verify that all permissions are granted to <ServerMachineName>/<UserName> :
10. Click OK.
11. In the Properties dialog box, click OK.
Configure OPC Client

Configure DCOM communication on the OPC Client computer where the System 1 Server is
125/532
hosted.
Step 1: Enter User Credentials
displayed.
3. Right-Click System 1 Server service and click Properties.
4. Choose Log On > This account. Enter the user name and password of the domain user:
The domain user should have Administrator privileges. If not, you must grant the OPC
Client User explicit rights in the OPC Server to communicate.
Step 2: Grant Permission to OPC Client Host Service
displayed.
3. Right-click Host.System1.OPC.ClientDhp and click Properties. The Host.System1.OPC.ClientDhp
Properties dialog box is displayed.
126/532
4. Choose Security tab.
box is displayed.
6. Choose Add. The Select Users, Computers, Service Accounts or Groups dialog box is
displayed.
7. In Enter the object names to select (examples), enter <ServerMachineName>/<UserName> .
8. Click OK.
9. Verify that all permissions are enabled for <ServerMachineName>/<UserName> :
10. Click OK.
Import In-Process OPC Server Data
In addition to out-of-procedure OPC servers, System 1 supports importing in-process OPC

servers. To connect to an in-process OPC server, see Add OPC Server.
Edit an Existing OPC Server
To add an in-process OPC server, edit an existing OPC server:

2. In the Devices hierarchy, select an existing OPC Servers group entry or individual
OPC server.
127/532
3. In the Process Data-PX pane, select a server.

4. Choose Program ID and enter the program ID of the new in-process server.
5. In Authentication, click Credentials. The User Authentication dialog box is displayed.
6. Choose Domain and clear the field.
7. To confirm the connection, click Test.
8. Click OK.
Format OPC DA Data
System 1 provides a .CSV file template you can use to import OPC items from an OPC server.
Format Data in .CSV File

To format your data in the .CSV file:
Export the OPC DA Items Template

To export the OPC DA Items Template file:
1. Right-click on an OPC Group and choose Export > OPC Items Template. The Windows Save
As dialog box is displayed.
2. Navigate to the directory where you want to save the .CSV file. The exported .CSV template
contain all the OPC DA points (including FSR range, Unit, Enum, setpoints, and item path) of
that group. Remember the name of the file and the location in which you saved the file.
3. Click Save.
Export OPC DA Items From OPC Server

After exporting the OPC DA Items Template, export the OPC items you want to add from your
OPC server. To obtain the OPC UA address space, you must be connected to the device.
View the data created by the OPC Server and copy the necessary values to the .CSV file. For
complete information on how to export items from your OPC server, consult the documentation
provided with your OPC server.
Edit the OPC DA Items Template File

To edit the template file:
1. Open the saved .CSV file in a third-party application.

o The data must be formatted as it is displayed in this template.
o We recommend creating a copy of the original file as a backup. Be sure to save the
file in either ANSI and UTF-8 format.
128/532
o Different applications may modify the original content in unintended ways.

o The .CSV file must be in the same language as the application, including units and
action types.
2. To modify a static or dynamic setpoint, modify the OPC .CSV template file. To configure
dynamic setpoints, see below.
3. Modify the .CSV file as needed and save the file.
Configure Dynamic Setpoints

To configure dynamic setpoints on Process measurements and Enum measurements, you
must set the values in the OPC template file.
When you import a OPC .CSV template file containing dynamic setpoints for Process
Measurements and Enum Measurements, a new setpoints group is created for the selected
OPC group.

2. Choose Measurements > Setpoints. The Tag Name of the dynamic setpoint is displayed in
the Setpoints grid.
o If you modified a static or dynamic setpoint in the OPC .CSV template file, import the
template file.
o To delete or disable a dynamic setpoint, modify it in System 1.
o To map a dynamic setpoint to an asset:
a. Select the Configure Workspace and Mapping Mode.
b. Select the asset in the Machine hierarchy.
c. Map the device dynamic setpoint to an Custom Machine Point.
3. Save the file.
You can trend dynamic setpoint tags. You cannot configure static or dynamic setpoints on
dynamic setpoint measurements.
Import OPC Data

After editing the .CSV file, import the OPC data template file. See Import OPC DA Data.
OPC Items Template .CSV File Format

The template header identifies data imported to System 1 and allows you to enable, disable, and
configure static setpoints. Use the template to configure over-, under-, in- and out-of-band
condition monitoring alarms. When you import level setpoints, the setpoint is enabled by
default.
Required Fields
129/532
Scenario Required Fields
Process Points and no

Action Type, Item Path, Min Scale, Max Scale
setpoints
Process Points with

Action Type, Item Path, Min Scale, Max Scale, Alarm type
setpoints
Enum Points and no Action Type, Item Path, Min Scale, Max Scale, Data type (Enum),
setpoints Enum
Enum Points with Action Type, Item Path, Min Scale, Max Scale, Data type (Enum),
setpoints Enum, Alarm type
To disable multiple setpoints, leave the level setpoint in the template blank. Upon import,
empty setpoints are disabled. If a previous setpoint existed, the value is retained.
The file contains these headers:
130/532
Header Description Valid Values / Notes
The action performed during the Add, Delete Update, No Action

Action Type
import process If blank or No Action, the row is skipped.
Point Name Point name of a measurement
Tag Name Tag name of a measurement
Item Path Item ID
Minimum scale of a
Min Scale
measurement
Maximum scale of a
Max Scale
measurement
Unit Measurement units See Data Export in online help.
The type of data the OPC server

Data Type
receives
New Item The new item path for a Use this field to replace the item paths of
Path measurement multiple measurements.
An enum predefined in System 1 Choose a system-defined or a user-defined

Enum
or defined by the user enum
Alarm Type The type of alarm required. Over, Under, Out of Band, In Band
Level 4 Value of the Level 4 under

Under setpoint.
Level 4 Over Value of the Level 4 over setpoint.
Level 3 Value of the Level 3 under

Under setpoint.
Level 3 Over Value of the Level 3 over setpoint. A static value, or the dynamic setpoint item
Level 2 Value of the Level 2 under path, or combination of both.

Under setpoint.
Value of the Level 1 under

Level 1 Under
setpoint.
Migrate Enum and Boolean Measurements

When you migrate the configuration and data of boolean and enum measurements from a
131/532
System 1 Classic Enterprise using S1 6.81+ data source, System 1 stores them as enum
measurements in your database.
Boolean and enum measurements migrated prior to System 1 18.2 release are not affected. After
the database is migrated, these measurements remain as float data in your database.
To convert these measurements to an enum data type, you can delete and migrate them again.
Asset mapping is not retained for the measurements.
Assign Enums to Migrated OPC Enum Measurements

After migrating the configuration of OPC enum measurements, their enum values are undefined
in System 1.
To assign values to the enum measurements:
1. Copy the OPC items template file.

2. Use a third-party application like Excel to open the .CSV file template.
3. For each migrated OPC enum measurement, add a row to the file and include:
o Action type The action type is update for these measurements.
o Point name
o Tag name
o Item path
o Data type The data type is enum for these measurements.
o Enum Use the name of the system or user defined enum.
4. In System 1, choose Import > OPC Items. The OPC items template file for the Enum Group is
imported.
5. Click Save.
Supported .CSV File Import Delimiter and Separator

To delimit or separate data in .CSV files, use these delimiters (quotation marks) and separators
(commas) as part of a string in the .CSV file.
Using Excel
Use quotation marks (") or commas (,) directly in the string, and save as a comma delimited
.CSV file.
Example Input Example Output
DefinitionRecords.IP_
DefinitionRecords.IP_PVDef."R1A"R,ATE.PV
PVDef."R1A"R,ATE.PV
Using Notepad
To import quotation marks (") as part of a string, use double sets of quotation marks:
132/532
"DefinitionRecords.IP_PVDef.""R1A""RATE.PV"
PVDef."R1A"RATE.PV
To import commas (,) as part of a string, enclose the entire string in quotation marks:
"DefinitionRecords.IP_PVDef.R1AR,ATE.PV"
PVDef.R1AR,ATE.PV
Batch Update OPC Item Paths

You can update the OPC item path for a measurement added to System 1. Using System 1 to
modify each OPC item path for each measurement is time consuming. To speed the process,
you can batch update OPC item paths.
To update the OPC item paths for multiple measurements:
1. Use a third-party application like Excel to open the .CSV file template. The template
contains a header that identifies the data imported to System 1.
2. Set the Action Type value of each measurement to Update.
3. Set the New Item Path column to a value that must replace each Item Path.
4. Save the .CSV file as a text file.
5. In System 1, right-click on the OPC group you want to update. Choose Import > OPC Items.
The Windows Open dialog box is displayed.
6. Navigate to the location of the OPC .CSV template file and click Open. The values assigned
to Item Paths of the corresponding measurements are displayed in System 1.
7. Use a third-party application like Excel to open the .CSV file template.
8. Replace the Item Path of each measurement that has been changed with the value of the
New Item Path.
9. Clear the values of the New Item Path column for each measurement.
10. Save the .CSV file as a text file and reimport it into System 1.
Import OPC DA Data
Import OPC DA Data
To use System 1 to modify each OPC item path for each measurement is time consuming. To
speed the process, you can batch update OPC item paths. First export the OPC DA Items
Template and then Format OPC DA Data .
If you use the OPC Redundancy Broker (ORB) first see Issues with OPC Redundancy Broker.
133/532
To import OPC data:
1. Right-click on an OPC Group and choose OPC Server > Add Group. Choose an option:

o Process Measurements. Adds OPC points whose data types are float or compatible
with the float data type.
o Enum Measurements. Adds OPC points whose data types are Enum.
See Supported Static Data Types. System 1 adds the group to the OPC server.
2. Right-click the newly created OPC group, and choose Import > OPC Items. The Windows
Open dialog box is displayed.
3. Navigate to the directory where you saved the OPC DA Items Template file and select it.
4. Click Open. System 1 attempts to import the OPC data and displays a message:
o If the .CSV file is not formatted properly, System 1 cannot import the OPC data and
displays an error message. See Format OPC DA Data .
o If the OPC data cannot be imported for other reasons, choose View Log from the
message to view details.
Otherwise, choose OK. The OPC data is imported and the OPC Server hierarchy is updated.
Issues with OPC Redundancy Broker

If you use the OPC Redundancy Broker (ORB) to configure OPC servers into redundant pairs, you
must use the 32 bit OPC executable to import OPC data.
To use the 32 bit OPC executable:
1. Open Notepad using Administrator privileges.

2. Click File > Open. The Windows Open dialog box is displayed.
3. Navigate to the System 1 installation directory.
4. Navigate to the OpcClientServiceDHP folder.
5. Change the file filter to All Files (*.*).
6. Open System1.OPC.Client.dhp file.
7. Modify this entry
OutProcFile=Host.System1.OPC.ClientDhp.exe
to
OutProcFile=Host.System1.OPC.ClientDhp.x86.exe.
8. Choose File > Save. Exit the file editor.

9. Select the Windows Start menu and open Services.msc.
10. Stop and restart the System 1 Server service.
Collecting Alarm Events

When an alarm event is triggered:
134/532
l High-resolution alarm data is collected for measurement variables when the data
mapped to a train triggers any software or hardware alarms.
l High-resolution data is captured for the 10 minute period before the event and for one
minute after the event.
l High-resolution and transient alarm data is collected depending on the update rate of the
assigned OPC group.
If any static value within a collection group goes into alarm, the alarm data for all points in the
collection group are collected. Alarm collection occurs for condition alarms of all severity alert
and danger protection alarms.
Supported Static Data Types

System 1 supports these data types.
Supported
Data Abbreviations
Notes
Type (Not Case-
Sensitive)
System 1 supports float data types in addition to any data type that
can be converted to float. Float compatible data types can be
float float, single
imported by leaving the data type column blank. Data loss may
occur for some values and data types.
boolean bool, boolean See Supported Static Data Types.
int, int32,
int
integer
uint, uint32,
uint
uinteger
short short, int16
ushort ushort, uint16
byte byte
sbyte sbyte
Enum enum
Export OPC Units
Export OPC Units
To export units:
135/532
1. Right-click on an OPC Group, and choose Export > Units. The Windows Save As dialog box
is displayed.
2. Navigate to the location where you want to save the .CSV file.
3. Enter a file name. Remember the name of the file and the location in which you saved the
file.
4. Choose Save. The exported .CSV file contains a list of supported units:
o Unit Group
o Unit
o Description
To ensure System 1 reads the units of the incoming measurement data correctly, copy and
paste the units from this file into the OPC .CSV file you use to import data.
Add OPC UA Server
You can import static data and tags from third-party hardware using the OPC UA protocol. You
must add a third-party OPC UA server and create a secure connection.
Connect to an OPC UA Server
If the server and client are not on the same workgroup, you must add the DNS suffix of the
server (displayed in Network Connections) to the Endpoint URI. You must also add the
port number to the exception list in the firewall settings.
To connect to an OPC UA server:

2. Right-click on the database node in the Devices hierarchy and choose Connect to
Device > OPC UA Server. The Add OPC UA Server dialog box is displayed.
136/532
3. In the General pane, enter the Endpoint URI.
4. In the Browse pane, available OPC UA server endpoints are displayed.

5. Select the Security Policy and Security Mode you want to use.
6. In the User Authentication pane, enter the User Name and Password for the selected
endpoint, or select Anonymous.
7. Click Add. The device is displayed in the Devices hierarchy.
137/532
8. In the General tab, configure the OPC UA Server properties as needed.
9. You must accept the certificate. In the Certificate field, click Certificate. The certificate is
displayed.
10. Accept and trust the certificate.
Add OPC UA Group
You can add Process Measurements or Enum Measurements to the OPC UA Server.
To add measurements to an OPC UA Server:
1. In the Devices hierarchy, right-click on OPC UA Server and choose Add Group. Choose an
option:
o Process Measurements. Adds OPC points whose data types are float or compatible
with the float data type.
o Enum Measurements. Adds OPC points whose data types are Enum.
See Supported Static Data Types. The Properties tab displays the Process Group
properties.
2. To enable the server to subscribe to tags, configure the OPC UA Group properties.
Format OPC UA Data for Import

To add OPC UA Static Tags to OPC UA Group, you need to export the OPC UA Server address
space, export the template, edit it, and import the edited file.
Export the OPC UA Items Template
138/532
To export the OPC UA Items Template file:
1. Right-click on the Process or Enum Group and choose Export > OPC UA Items Template.
The Windows Save As dialog box is displayed.
3. Click Save. The file created contains descriptions of the address space.
Export OPC UA Items From OPC Server

After you export the OPC UA Items Template (above), export the OPC address space from the
OPC server. To obtain the OPC UA address space, you must be connected to the device.
To export the OPC address space:
1. In the Devices hierarchy, right-click on the OPC UA Server and choose Export

OPC UA Device Address Space to CSV. The Windows Save As dialog box is displayed.
3. Click Save. The Health Tray displays file export progress. A notification is displayed when
the export file is created.
View the data created by the OPC Server and copy the necessary values to the OPC UA Items
Template file.
Edit the OPC UA Items Template

To edit the template file:
1. In Windows File Explorer, navigate to the location where you saved the OPC UA Items
Template file.
2. Use a third-party application to edit the template and add data to the fields described in
the table below.
o The data must be formatted as it is displayed in this template.
o We recommend creating a copy of the original file as a backup. Be sure to save the
file in either ANSI and UTF-8 format.
o Different third-party applications may modify the original content in unintended
ways.
o The .CSV file must be in the same language as the application, including Action
Types and Units.
139/532
Header Required? Description Notes
Action Type The action performed during Add, Delete, Update, No

the Import Process. Action. If blank or No Action,
the row is skipped.
Point Name Point Name (parent node) of

a measurement.
Point NodeID Point Node id (parent node's

NodeID) of a measurement.
Point New The New NodeID of the Point

NodeID Node (parent node) of a
measurement.
Measurement Name of the measurement.

Name
Measurement Node ID of the measurement.

NodeID
Measurement New Node ID of the

New NodeID measurement.
Min Scale Minimum scale of a

measurement.
Max Scale Maximum scale of a

measurement.
Unit Measurement units.
Data Type Data type of the OPC Tag.
Enum An enum predefined in Choose a system-defined or

System 1 or defined by the a user-defined enum.
user.
3. Click Save.
Import the OPC UA Items Template

To import the OPC UA Items Template:
1. Right-click the newly created Process Group, and choose Import > OPC UA Items. The
Windows Open dialog box is displayed.
2. Navigate to the directory where you saved the OPC UA Items Template file and select it.
140/532
3. Click Open. System 1 attempts to import the OPC data and displays a message:
o If the .CSV file is not formatted properly, System 1 cannot import the OPC data and
displays an error message. See Format OPC DA Data .
o If the OPC data cannot be imported for other reasons, choose View Log from the
message to view details.
Otherwise, choose OK. The OPC data is imported and the OPC Server hierarchy is updated.
Add 6.x Device
Connect to 6.x Devices

To connect to a System 1 6.x Classic device, use the Data Migration tool that is part of the
Database Manager.
To launch the Data Migration tool:
1. Launch the Database Manager using one of two options:

o Choose Windows Start Menu > System 1 Database Management.
o In System 1, choose Tools > Database Manager.
2. The System 1 Database Manager is displayed.
3. In Database Manager, choose Tools > Data Migration. The Data Migration wizard is
displayed.
4. In the General pane, identify the destination database and the type of data you want to
migrate. (If connecting to an in-process OPC server, leave these fields blank.)
o System 1 destination database.
o Data source S1 6.x Connector. (Available for System 1 database version 6.97 or later
on non-native devices.)
o Import options: for more info, see Database Administration Guide (document
156M4815).
141/532
5. In the Source Database pane, identify the source database and provide user credentials:
Fields Description
Database
System 1 configuration server name or IP address.
location
SQL account
SQL credentials required to connect to a System 1 6.x configuration
user name and
SQL server.
password
System 1 6.x database from which configuration and data is

Database name
migrated.
Windows
To connect to System 1 API Server using the S1 6.x Connector, enter
account user
your Windows credentials. To verify that the credentials you entered
name and
are valid, choose Test Connection.
password
If the Next button is disabled, verify that you entered your Windows account user name
and password correctly.
6. Click Next. The Data Sources dialog box is displayed.

7. Select a Data source. Data sources are groups of configured devices from your System 1
6.x database.
8. If you are importing historical data, select a Data range:
o All - Import all data for selected devices and servers.
o Custom data range - Select the start time and end time.
9. Click Next. The database manager begins importing the configuration. You can proceed
to the next screen only when the configuration is successfully imported.
10. Click Next. The tool saves the configuration and starts importing the historical data if you
selected this option.
11. Click Finish.
Verify the 6.x Devices are Imported
1. To verify that 6.x devices are imported:

a. In System 1, select the Configure workspace.
b. Select the Devices hierarchy.
142/532
c. Find the 6x Devices in the hierarchy. The imported 6.x database name is displayed:
The device's configuration is displayed in the Devices hierarchy on the left side of the screen.
You can display plots and events on this monitor.
6.x Connector Data Sources and Collection Rate

Use the System 1 6.x Connector data source to connect to import device configuration and data
from System 1 6.x or later supported devices that are not natively supported by System 1 19.1 and
later.
Supported Data Sources

Use the 6.x connector to import data from these data sources:
l 3500 (TDI)
l TDISecure
l OPC Servers
l Trendmaster DSM
l 1701 FMIM (with TDXnet)
l Essential Insight.Mesh
l 3500 (with Rack Interface Module (RIM) installed with TDXnet)
l 3300 (with TDXnet and TDe module)
l 2201 (with TDXnet)
l 3500 ENCORE
l bopONLINE
l TDIXConnX with TDXnet
l MODBUS / GSM Devices
l API Data Collector
l Instrumentation Rules (Instrument Rules folder)
143/532
Unsupported Data Sources

The 6.x connector does not support these data sources:
l Lube Points
l DDE Server Points
l OLE Automation Exporter Points
l Enumerated Points from OPC and API data collector
l Hidden points / modules / devices (in case if 6.x archive is converted into database)
l Orphaned Points
l Snapshot Points
l MUX Points
l Collection Groups
l Points from Database Hierarchy
l Non-Configured Points / Rack
6.x Connector Data Collection Rates

The 6.x connector can request data at these intervals for different types of measurements and
devices:
Measurement Collection Rate in Seconds
Statics (online) 1
Statics (scanning) 10
Software statics (online and scanning) 60
Waveforms (online and scanning) 600
System 1 polls high-resolution alarm and transient data from 6.x devices every 10 minutes.
The default storage rate for 6.x devices in System 1 is:
Measurement Short Term Storage Rate Long Term Storage Rate
Trended variables 1 second N/A
Spectrums and waveforms 10 minutes 3 hours
To change the global storage rates in System 1 databases, see Preferences - Units in online help.
6.x Connector Requirements and Setup

To import data from a System 1 6.x database into a System 1 18.x or later database, these
conditions must be met:
l System 1 6.x database must be System 1 database version 6.97 or later.

l System 1 Classic API server must be in running state on configuration database server for
migrating configuration database.
144/532
l For multi-DAQ (Data Acquisition Unit) input and distributed 6.x setup:

o All servers must reside on the same network.
o You must use the same user account to access the API and data acquisition
services.
o System 1 Classic API server on remote DAQ must be in running state in order to
collect CV data.
To use the 6.x connector, you must have:
l The name or IP address of the machine where the System 1 6.x database resides
l A user name and password authorized to access the SQL database
l A Windows account authorized to connect to the API server
Use the System 1 6.x Connector Data Source

Use the System 1 6.x Connector data source to import device configuration and data from
System 1 6.x or later devices that are not natively supported by System 1 19.1 and later.
Supported 6.x Operations

You can complete these operations in a System 1 database:
l Import device configuration from a System 1 6.x database.

l Import historical data from a System 1 6.x database.
l Import hardware setpoints from a System 1 6.x database.
l Import software setpoints:
o Severity 1, 2, 3, or 4
o Over-, under-, in- , or out-of-band Types
You can import software setpoints only for hardware devices imported using a 6.x
connector. In a database, these software setpoints are read-only external setpoints visible
in bar graphs and plots. You can acknowledge imported external alarm events in a
database.
l Import all 6.x device configuration options from 6.x device to System 1 Evo. If you change a
6.x device configuration in System 1 Classic, you must manually synchronize 6.x device in
System 1 Evo. For 6.x devices, the Synchronize button is always enabled and the
Configuration Out-of-date message is not displayed. Before synchronizing, we
recommend you wait for System 1 classic data acquisition and API server to reconcile.
l XY pairing and KPH association information
l Delete a 6.x device.
l Enable and disable data collection for a 6.x device or a 6.x hardware device in a 6.x device
group. When data collection is disabled for a 6.x device, System 1 stops collecting data for
all hardware devices under that device.
l View current and historical data in different plots.
l Configure 6.x device condition monitoring alarms for standard and user defined states.
l Import, store, and view high-resolution static and waveform data for alarm or transient
data collected in a 6.x device.
l Modify the global storage rate for 6.x devices.
145/532
l Configure states.
l Create reference data for 6.x devices.
l Map points.
l Add trended variables.
l View live hardware and external alarm events for 6.x devices.
Unsupported 6.x Operations

After importing the data, you cannot complete these operations in a System 1 database:
l Import historical alarm events.

l Edit device configuration.
l Delete a 6.x hardware device or its group.
l View recip plots for reciprocating monitors.
Modify the Unit Field

If you import measurements that use an unsupported unit, the unit field is displayed as
Unknown.
To modify the unit field:
1. Select the Unit drop-down list box and click Add. The Add Custom Unit dialog box is
displayed.
2. Enter the Unit Name and (optionally) a Description.
3. Click Add. The custom unit is displayed in the list.
To replace a custom unit with a Bently unit, see Replace Custom Units in online help.
Add Trendmaster DSM Device
For supported Trendmaster Dynamic Scanning Module (DSM) devices supported by System 1,
see Trendmaster DSM System. When installed, you can review Supported Trendmaster Features.
Install Trendmaster DSM Initialization Tool

To install the Trendmaster Dynamic Scanning Module (DSM) DSMInit tool:
1. Locate the installation executable on the System 1 install disk in the folder:
Disk1\Standalone Installation Packages\DSMInitialization.
You can copy the installation executable if needed.
2. Open Setup.exe and follow the instructions.
Set up Trendmaster DSM Devices

Each Dynamic Scanning Module (DSM) device contains a unique, factory-programmed Ethernet
146/532
address in non-volatile memory. This address is also printed on top of the device
Communication Card. The Ethernet address is different from the IP address that you must set.
The DSMInit program broadcasts a User Datagram Protocol (UDP) message that prompts DSM
devices to respond.
When you use DSMInit to browse and initialize DSM devices and the DSM device is
rebooting or is busy, the connection fails. If you are unable to connect to a device, look for
an error in the Windows Event Viewer.
To set up Trendmaster Dynamic Scanning Modules (DSMs) on your network:
1. Choose Windows > Bently Nevada > DSM Initialization. DSMInit is launched.
2. Click Browse for DSMs. DSMInit lists responding DSMs that have not been configured using
the name unconfigured.
3. Click on an unconfigured DSM. The selected DSM’s IP Address, Subnet Mask and Ethernet
Address are displayed. The device is now set up.
Initialize Trendmaster DSMs

Initializing multiple DSMs at the same time may cause network errors. Initialize only one
DSM at a time.
To Initialize Trendmaster DSMs on your network:
2. Right-click on a DSM and choose Enter Init Mode. A message is displayed confirming your
action.
3. Click Yes. The DSM is initialized.
The next step is to Configure Trendmaster DSMs.
Upgrade Trendmaster Firmware
Upgrade Trendmaster Devices Firmware
Obtain current DSM firmware from Bently Nevada Tech Support. Save the firmware file on your
local directory.
If you upgrade the DSM improperly, for example, if you select the wrong firmware or modify the
downloaded firmware file, you can damage the DSM. An inoperative DSM must be serviced by an
authorized Bently Nevada service center.
To upgrade DSM firmware:
147/532
1. Open DSM Init. First Initialize Trendmaster DSMs.

2. Right-click on a configured DSM and choose Upgrade Firmware.
3. The Upgrade DSM dialog box is displayed. Navigate to and select the DSM firmware file.
Click Open.
4. Click Load Image. DSMInit displays a warning message. Confirm that you want to
continue.
5. Wait 1-2 minutes for the firmware upgrade to complete. If the upgrade is interrupted, the
DSM device reverts to the prior firmware version.
Setup Trendmaster DSM
Setup Network Settings

All Trendmaster Dynamic Scanning Module (DSM) are shipped with a default IP address
(192.168.0.1). Obtain valid permanent IP addresses from your network administrator. Trendmaster
DSMs do not support dynamic IP address schemes (such as DHCP). Use DSMInit to enter the valid
IP addresses.
Before you can connect to a Trendmaster DSM device, you must set up Trendmaster DSM
devices using the DSM Initialization Tool. For complete information, see the Trendmaster
Dynamic Scanning Module Installation Manual (document 149823-01).
To configure a DSM to work in your network environment:
148/532
2. To find DSMs on the network, click Browse for DSMs. Available DSMs are listed.
o DSMs that have not been configured are displayed as unconfigured.
o Click on a DSM to display its properties.
3. To initialize a DSM, right-click on the DSM and choose Enter Init Mode. The DSM is displayed
in the DSMInit window.
To avoid network errors, do not initialize more than one DSM at a time.
4. Right-click on a DSM that is in initialize mode and choose Change HW Setup. The
Properties of DSM dialog box is displayed.
5. Modify the DSM properties.
149/532
Parameter Description
User Name A descriptive DSM name. Maximum characters: 19.
An additional name to help identify the DSM device. Maximum characters:

Tag Name
19.
Enter a valid permanent IP address. To obtain a permanent IP address, you

IP Address
may need to contact your network administrator.
The subnet mask permits using subnets on the LAN. If you need to use
Subnet
subnets on your LAN, consult your system administrator. The default
Mask
subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
6. To save the changes to DSMInit, click OK. DSMInit displays the changed settings.
7. To confirm the changes to the DSM device, right-click on a DSM and choose Exit Init mode.
The DSM settings are committed and saved on the DSM device. The DSM device performs a
self-test and begins operating using the stored parameters.
Manage DSM Hardware

Use DSMInit to manage Trendmaster DSM hardware, including self-tests, firmware upgrades,
Transducer Interface Module (TIM) tests, and troubleshooting.
You can run the DSMInit program simultaneously with System 1 collecting data. However,
some DSMInit commands take DSM resources and will temporarily stop loop scanning.
To set up DSM hardware on your network, first view all DSMs:
2. Click Browse for DSMs. DSMInit lists all DSMs and their properties. You need to configure
DSMs labeled Unconfigured.
Upload a Hardware Image

You can upload current DSM device hardware information, including cards, lines and proTIMs
(Transducer Interface Modules).
To upload a hardware image:
1. Open DSM Init. Right-click on a DSM and choose Upload HW Image.

2. When the hardware image is loaded, the DSM name is displayed in bold and the details
displayed in the DSM Information is refreshed.
3. To view DSM slots, lines and individual proTIMs, expand the items.
Complete a DSM Self-test

The DSM device performs a self-test and begins operating using the store parameters.
150/532
To complete a DSM self-test:
1. Open DSM Init. If you have not yet, you must first Upload a Hardware Image .
2. Right-click on a DSM and choose Self Test Results. The Self Tests Results dialog box
displays the latest hardware information.
If DSMInit finds: Then the Self Test Results dialog box:
No errors States that the DSM passed all tests
Errors Lists self-test errors
DSM Self Test Error Codes and Descriptions

DSM Self Test Error Codes
151/532
Self Test Error Code Description
Ethernet Self Test Error Checks the Ethernet communications.
A check that the Ethernet physical address is an acceptable

Ethernet Address Error
value.
Power OK Self Test Error Checks the main system voltages.
Subnet Mask Error Verifies that the programmed subnet mask is a valid number.
Flash Memory Error Verifies successful reads and writes to non-volatile memory.
A check to verify that the primary program code has not been
Flash Checksum Error
corrupted.
Comm Card Serial EEPROM

Checks the serial EEPROM of the Comm Card.
Error
DSP1 through DSP4 Critical Checks the Digital Signal Processors (DSPs) on the input cards
Fault for faults that prevent operation.
DSP1 through DSP4 Serial

Checks the serial EEPROMs on the input cards.
EEPROM Fault
DSP1 through DSP4 Node Checks the input card critical node voltages (+2.5V, +5V, and -
Voltage Fault 24V).
DSP1 through DSP4 Line Checks the input card critical node voltage (+15V) on each line of
Node Voltage Fault the input card (SPA card only).
DSP1 through DSP4 Line Verifies that the TIM lines are being successfully de-addressed
Deaddress Fault (SPA card only).
A check that the DSPs on the input cards can be reset

DSP Reset Isolation Test
independently.
Validate proTIM Status

To obtain current proTIM device hardware status:
1. Open DSM Init. Right-click on a DSM and choose Upload HW Image.

2. When the hardware image is loaded, the DSM name is displayed in bold.
3. Right-click on a DSM Line and choose Check Responding TIMs. The Responding Points on
Line dialog box is displayed.
4. Click Run Test. The DSM line is scanned for responding proTIMs.
Test TIM and proTIM Line Response

To test Transducer Interface Module (proTIM) line response:
152/532
1. Open DSM Init. If no details are displayed, right-click on a DSM and select Upload HW Image.
2. Select and expand a DSM device.
3. Right-click on a TIM line and choose Check Responding TIMs. The Responding Points on
Line dialog box is displayed.
4. To scan the TIM lines, click Run Test. When you are satisfied with the results, click Stop Test.
Validate TIM and proTim Point Test

To validate Transducer Interface Module (TIM or proTim) Point test response:
1. Right-click on a TIM line and choose Point Test by Address. The Enter Point Address dialog
box is displayed.
2. Enter the channel / address you want to test. Click OK.
3. The Points Test dialog box is displayed.
4. Select the Test Options you want to complete. Click Run Test. The results are displayed in
the Test Results pane.
proTIM Status Descriptions
Status
Description
Response
Indicates that the utility found no problems at that address. The SPA received
Good calibration values that are in range and the proTIM did not send back a
Response transducer Not OK indication.
System 1 considers this as an OK response.
Indicates that the utility received no response from the proTIM. This could be due
to:
A malfunctioning proTIM.
No
l
An improper or missing TIM line connection.

Response
l
l An incorrect address setting.

l No proTIM at that address.
System 1 considers this as a NO DATA response.
Indicates that the proTIM has sent acceptable calibration values but registered a
proTIM off-line when reading the data value for the transducer. This is normally
Transducer due to a faulty transducer or a wiring problem between the proTIM and the
Error transducer.
System 1 reports this occurrence as a transducer Not OK.
proTIM Indicates that the SPA received calibration values that were not in range,
Calibration indicating a faulty proTIM.
Error System 1 considers this as a proTIM Not OK response.
153/532
High and Low Cal Acceptable Operating Values

To calibrate the data signal, the DSM uses the proTIM High Cal and Low Cal values.
Test Range of Values Nominal
LOW CAL 1117 to 5295 1953
HIGH CAL 11629 to 15807 14971
DATA Inside the range of calibration values for Read Average Data N/A
Check TIM or proTim Point Test

To test TIM or proTim Point test response:
1. Expand DSM > TIM Line, and right-click on proTim or Tim.
Figure 3 - 7: Individual TIM Test Options
154/532
2. Select Run Point Test. The Point Test dialog box is displayed.
Figure 3 - 8: Figure Point Test dialog box
3. Select the Test Options you want to complete. Click Run Test. The results are displayed in
the Test Results pane.
Check TIM or proTim Waveform Display

To capture a dynamic waveform sample from any point in the system, use the Waveform
Display command.
To capture a TIM or proTim Waveform display:
155/532
1. Expand DSM > TIM Line, and right-click on proTim or TIM.

2. Choose Waveform Display. The Asynchronous Waveform Display dialog box is displayed.
Figure 3 - 9: Figure Asynchronous Waveform Display Screen
3. If valid, choose Treat As Keyphasor.

4. In the Keyphasor Info pane, choose Automatic or Manual.
5. Enter a valid voltage for Threshold.
6. If valid, select a Hysteresis value.
7. To display timebase divisions, select a msec/div value on the right side of the screen.
8. Click Get Waveform. A waveform is displayed.
o To view the value in the Current Sample field, click on the waveform.
o To view details of the current cursor location, select the arrow control at upper left of
the graph.
o The point name, slot, line, and address are displayed in the Point Information pane
above the graph.
Check proTim Line Voltage or Line Noise

A voltage check causes the proTIM to loop its power supply back to the SPA input card. The SPA
measures this voltage and determines how much the line has attenuated the proTIM power
supply. Power supply attenuation can be caused by excessive line length, high cable resistance,
poor or wet connections, or too much line current. A line noise check causes the proTIM to
156/532
output a fixed voltage. The DSM measures the peak-to-peak AC noise voltage on the line.
To check proTIM Line voltage check or Line noise check:
1. Expand DSM > TIM Line and right-click on proTIM.

2. Choose Line Check. The Voltage/Current Check dialog box is displayed.
Figure 3 - 10: Voltage/Current Check Screen
l Line Voltage is displayed in Volts DC. If red, the voltage is less than the minimum voltage
required.
l Line Noise is displayed in Vpp. If noise exceeds 3% of full scale, an alert is displayed.
l The point name, slot, line, and address are displayed.
Check proTim Line Frequency Response

Trendmaster proTIMs return an analog voltage that the system cable capacitance and
resistance can attenuate. This test causes the proTIM to output to the DSM over the system
cable a test signal with known harmonic content. The software analyzes the signal to determine
the 3 dB corner frequency of the cable.
To check proTIM Line frequency response:
1. Expand DSM > TIM Line and right-click on proTIMs.

2. Choose Line Frequency Response. The Line Frequency Response dialog box is displayed.
3. Click Perform Test.
o Current Signal Frequency and Corner Frequency are displayed.
o The point name, slot, line, and address are displayed.
157/532
You can continue to run System 1 while performing individual TIM tests. However, the
DSMInit program interleaves data requests from the utility program with the System 1
data requests and both programs’ performance is slower.
Configure Trendmaster DSM Devices

After you connect a Trendmaster Dynamic Scanning Module (DSM) device, you need to add
Transducer Interface Modules (TIMs). The DSM does not automatically recognize a newly added
TIM. You must either reboot the DSM using the DSM Initialization Tool, which interrupts data
collection, or add and configure the device offline.
Before you can connect to a Trendmaster DSM device, you must set up Trendmaster DSM
devices using the DSM Initialization Tool. For complete information, see the Trendmaster
Dynamic Scanning Module Installation Manual (document 149823-01).
Configure DSM Device Online

If you add new devices and then reboot the DSM, it scans the SPA lines for new hardware and
automatically assigns channel address to the new ProTIM. The DSM stops sending data for
several minutes while it reboots. If interrupting sending data is undesirable during a reboot, you
can add and configure the device offline. See Configure Trendmaster DSM Devices.
Add and Configure DSM Device

To add and configure an online Trendmaster DSM device:

3. Right-click on the database name and choose Connect to Device > Trendmaster. The
Add Dynamic Scanning Module dialog box is displayed.

4. In the Credentials pane, enter the device IP Address. To locate the IP Address, use the
Install Trendmaster DSM Initialization Tool.
5. Click Add. The DSM device and all supported cards are displayed in the Devices hierarchy.
Any unsupported cards and points are displayed as Unsupported Card and Unsupported
Channel, respectively.
158/532
Device properties are displayed in the General tab.
6. Click File > Save. Data is only collected for the ProTIM points containing Direct Variables,
Asynchronous waveform, Asynchronous spectrum, and Asynchronous Waveform 2.
The DSM device displays the default configuration of Signal Processing Adapter (SPA) cards,
ProTIM, and ProTIM points.
Modify Online DSM Device Configuration

To modify an online Trendmaster DSM default device configuration:

2. Select the Devices hierarchy > Trendmaster Devices.
3. Modify the properties of the Dynamic Scanning Module and its sub-components.
o You can associate a ProTIM Keyphasor channel with more than one dynamic
channel if the Keyphasor channel is on a different Line of the SPA card on the same
DSM.
o For dynamic channel, you can enable either Synchronous Waveform or
Asynchronous Waveform 2.
o You can enable additional static variables as desired. The properties displayed vary
depending on the channel type you select.
o Modify the Primary Variables - Scan Rate, Management Variables - Scan Rate,
and Dynamic Collection Interval as needed.
159/532
4. The ProTIM device and its channel configuration are displayed. Due to hardware
limitations, System 1 does not recognize FlexiTIM and TIM devices, or 1900 monitor. A FlexiTI
and TIM devices or 1900 monitor are initially displayed as Unknown TIM.
5. You must select the device you want to configure in the steps described below.
Configure Online FlexiTIM and TIM Devices and 1900 Monitor

You must manually configure FlexiTIM and TIM devices and 1900 Monitor. For FlexiTIM device, one
Unknown TIM displays an even numbered Channel 1 Address and the other displays an odd
numbered Channel 1 Address. For TIM device and 1900/25, select the Unknown TIM and
configure the TIM Type property.
For 1900/55 Fan Monitor device, select the Unknown TIM having address in multiple of 4 and
configure the TIM Type property.
160/532
To configure online FlexiTIM devices:
1. Select the Unknown TIM with an even numbered Channel 1 Address.

2. In the General > Unknown TIM properties TIM Type field, choose FlexiTIM. The Devices
hierarchy displays the FlexiTIM device and the properties pane is updated.
o A FlexiTIM with two empty points are displayed in the Device hierarchy.
o The Unknown TIM with the odd-numbered Channel 1 Address is deleted.
o In the Point Type field, choose a supported channel type.
3. Click File > Save. The configuration is downloaded to the DSM hardware.
Configure DSM Device Offline

When you add a ProTIM device on an active DSM, there are two ways to complete the
configuration:
l Reboot the DSM. Use DSMInit to reboot the DSM. The DSM scans the SPA lines for new
hardware and automatically adds the new hardware. Data collection is interrupted.
l Manually configure the DSM in System 1. If you want to avoid interrupting data collection,
add the new ProTIM device offline in System 1.
To add and configure an offline Trendmaster DSM device:

2. Choose Devices. Right-click on the database name and choose Offline
Configuration > Trendmaster. A Dynamic Scanning Module is added to the Device

hierarchy. It is displayed with four Empty Slots.
3. Enter the IP address of the DSM in System 1 configuration.
4. In the Device hierarchy, choose Dynamic Scanning Module > Empty Slot. The Empty Slot
properties are displayed.
5. In the Card Type field, choose Signal Processing Adapter (SPA) card. Click outside the
Card Type field. The Device hierarchy displays the Signal Processing Adapter Card and
two lines in the hierarchy underneath. The Signal Processing Adapter Card properties
pane is displayed.
6. Right click on the Line and choose Add TIM / 1900 Monitor option. A ProTIM with two Empty
Channels will get added under the Line.
7. Modify the properties of the ProTIM device, or optionally, modify the type of TIM device. In
the TIM Type field, choose a device:
o 1900/25 Velocity Monitor See Configure Offline 1900/25 Velocity Monitor.
o 1900/55 Fan Monitor See Configure Offline 1900/55 Fan Monitor.
o FlexiTIM See Configure Offline FlexiTIM Device .
o ProTIM See Configure Offline ProTIM Device .
o TIM See Configure Offline TIM Device .
Configure Offline 1900/25 Velocity Monitor
161/532
1900/25 channel address is set using DIP switches on the hardware device. Note the DIP switch
settings for use below. You must manually configure the hardware in System 1 to match the
device configuration.
To configure 1900/25 Velocity Monitor offline:
1. The Devices hierarchy displays the 1900/25 Velocity Monitor device with a single Accel to
Velocity Channel. The properties pane is updated.
2. Modify the 1900/25 Velocity Monitor properties as needed.
3. Modify the Accel to Velocity Channel as needed.
4. Click File > Save. The configuration is downloaded to the DSM hardware.
Configure Offline 1900/55 Fan Monitor

To configure 1900/55 Fan offline:
1. The Devices hierarchy displays a the 1900/55 Fan Monitor device with four Velocity Point
channels. The properties pane is updated.
2. Modify the Channel 1 Address. The address must be a multiple of 4.
3. Modify properties of 1900/55 Fan Monitor and Velocity Channels as needed.
4. Choose File > Save. The configuration is downloaded to the DSM hardware.
Configure Offline FlexiTIM Device

FlexiTIM channel addresses are set using DIP switches on the hardware device. Note the DIP
switch settings for use below. You must manually configure the hardware in System 1 to match
the device configuration.
To configure FlexiTIM device offline:
1. The Devices hierarchy displays the FlexiTIM device with two empty channels. The
properties pane is updated.
2. In the Point Type field, choose a Point Type and a Channel 1 Address. Modify other FlexiTIM
properties as needed.
3. Modify the properties of the Point Type you selected as needed.
Configure Offline TIM Device

TIM channel address is set using DIP switches on the hardware device. Note the DIP switch
settings for use below. You must manually configure the hardware in System 1 to match the
device configuration.
To configure TIM device offline:
1. The Devices hierarchy displays the TIM device with one empty channel. The properties
pane is updated.
162/532
2. In the Point Type field, choose a Point Type and a Channel 1 Address. Modify other FlexiTIM
properties as needed.
3. Modify the properties of the Point Type you selected as needed.
Configure Offline ProTIM Device

To configure ProiTIM device offline:
1. The Devices hierarchy displays the TIM device with two Empty Channels. The properties
pane is updated.
2. When you receive the physical ProTIM device, note the Physical Address printed on ProTIM
device.
3. In the ProTIM properties pane Channel 1 Address field, enter an even number. The address
must be unique to the Line number.
4. In the Device hierarchy, under the ProTIM device, select the Empty Channel.
5. In the Type field of the Empty Channel, select the ProTIM point you want to configure. The
Empty Channel name used in the Device hierarchy and the properties pane are updated
with the name of the channel type you selected. The default properties are displayed in the
property pane.
6. The default configuration enables Direct and Async spectrum and waveforms for dynamic
points. If you want to collect data for additional variables, enable the Spectrums
& Waveforms and Trended Variables desired.
7. Repeat these steps for the second Empty Channel.
8. Click File > Save. The configuration is downloaded to the device matching the physical
addresses you entered. The device begins collecting data.
Supported Trendmaster Features

Trendmaster supports these tasks and features.
Configuration Tasks
l Configure asset states with mapped DSM points and state-based storage.
l Map DSM points with assets.
l Configure condition monitoring alarms for standard and custom states, including delay,
suppression, and latching. Download condition monitoring setpoints configured for
standard state DSM hardware. After you upgrade a System 1 database created prior to
version 20.1 to a later version and you enable data collection, setpoints are downloaded to
the hardware. The hardware alarm is generated on the downloaded setpoints and the
alarm status is exported over Modbus.
l Add software trended variables.
l Configure software measurements.
163/532
l Migrate configuration and data for individual Trendmaster DSM device from System 1
Classic to System 1 Evo. System 1 supports migration for 19.2 and 20.2 supported hardware
and channel types only. All other channel types are not migrated.
These configurations and data are migrated:

o Channel Configuration Channel properties, setpoints, Keyphasor association, XY
pairing (Note: post migration, you will not be able to edit or delete XY pair
configuration in Evo)
o Spectral Band Configuration Spectral band properties, Spectrum/Waveform
association, setpoints and historical data. (Note: Fault Frequency bands configured
in classic will get migrated as spectral bands in Evo)
o Historical Data This includes channels and spectral bands with alarm events.
The Input Source property of the Generic Dynamic Point may not be
migrated correctly because of an incorrect value in System 1 Classic. A
warning message is displayed if the migration fails.
l Once you begin collecting data for a configuration migrated DSM, if you want to migrate
that DSM's historical data from System 1 Classic, you must be using PostgreSQL as the data
historian. Proficy does not support this feature.
l You cannot migrate Trendmaster DSM configuration from System 1 Classic if there are
multiple Keyphasors associated with one vibration channel or if a vibration channel is
associated with a Keyphasor on the same DSM line.
Retain Historical Data and Configuration

Data and Configuration Retained
Historical data and configuration are retained when you replace specific types of TIMs as shown
in Table 3 - 2: Supported replacement scenarios.
l Retained configuration includes channel and measurement properties, software trended

variables, setpoints, spectrum and waveform configuration, Keyphasor association, asset
mapping and state trigger definition.
l If you replace a TIM with another TIM of same TIM type and channel type, historical data
and configuration are retained.
l If you need to replace a TIM that is not listed in Table 3 - 2: Supported replacement
scenarios, and want to retain historical data, you can keep the old TIM as-is in the current
hierarchy and add a new TIM and configure channels under it. This enables you to collect
real-time data. Alternately, you can create an audit file and then replace the TIM.
164/532
Original TIM Replacement TIM
FlexiTlM Accel to Velocity ProTlM Accel to Velocity
TIM Accel to Velocity 1900/25 Velocity Monitor
FlexiTlM 100 Ohm Platinum RTD FlexiTlM / ProTIM any other supported Temperature Type
FlexiTlM J Type TC FlexiTlM / ProTIM any other supported Temperature Type
FlexiTlM K Type TC FlexiTlM / ProTIM any other supported Temperature Type
TIM J Type TC TIM K Type TC
ProTlM 2-3 wire Platinum RTD ProTlM / FlexiTIM any other supported Temperature Type
ProTlM 4 wire RTD ProTlM / FlexiTIM any other supported Temperature Type
ProTlM K Type TC ProTlM / FlexiTIM any other supported Temperature Type
Table 3 - 2: Supported replacement scenarios
Data and Configuration Not Retained

Historical data and configuration are not retained in these examples of TIM replacement
scenarios:
Original TIM Replacement TIM
Single Channel Legacy TIM 1900 Monitor/FlexiTlM/proTlM with same channel type
ProTlM Accel to Velocity w/ Enveloping or ProTIM Low Freq.

FlexiTlM Accel to Velocity
Accel to Velocity
ProTlM Accel to Velocity w/ Enveloping or ProTIM Low Freq.

ProTlM Accel to Velocity
Accel to Velocity
Table 3 - 3: Unsupported replacement scenarios
Display Tasks
l Collect static and dynamic data for supported channel types based on configured scan
and data collection rates.
l Display data in plots in Current Value (CV) and historical mode. Data in CV mode is
updated based on the configured data collection rates.
l Display and store alarm data when alarm is triggered for Trendmaster DSM point. Alarm
data includes static data and one additional dynamic waveform. Additional waveform is
collected and stored only if Collect Dynamic Data on Alarm option is enabled for the
channel.
l Import and view DSM hardware events.
l Obtain Current Value data / data on demand. (CV mode only) When you display a plot,
bar graph, status list, or HMI view, System 1 displays data at the current static and dynamic
165/532
data rate. You can Request a maximum of 50 measurements. To obtain samples at a

faster rate, choose an option:
o Select a different tab or view and then select the prior view.
o Add additional measurements to an existing plot.
o Select historical mode and then select CV mode.
l If you request a data on demand sample before the device is ready, the on demand
sample is not updated and a DSM internal error is logged in the Windows Event Viewer.
l The samples fetched on demand are stored in the database. The samples are evaluated
for alarms and states, and then exported via OPC DA/UA to replicated setup.
Unsupported Features
Trendmaster does not support:
l Channel XY pairing
l Device copy and paste
l Upload configuration changes from hardware on previously installed DSM device
l Download configuration to hardware when data collection is disabled
l Append channel address with ProTIM/FlexiTIM Name
l TIM Tester
Configure Trendmaster DSM Modbus Registers
Overview
Use the Dynamic Scanning Module (DSM) Modbus Utility to:
l Create a new configuration.

l Open and edit an existing configuration file.
l Find a DSM on your network.
l Upload a configuration from a DSM on your network.
l Download a configuration to a DSM on your network.
l Save, and open a configuration as a .CSV file.
When you create a Modbus configuration, you are mapping data from a Trendmaster Dynamic
Scanning Module (DSM) device to registers that a device using the Modbus communications
protocol can access.
Before the DSM can send data using Modbus, you must configure channels to create a
trending configuration, and create a Modbus configuration.
Summary Steps
To configure the DSM:
1. Open the DSM Modbus Utility.

2. Enter or browse for the IP address of the Dynamic Scanning Module you want to configure.
3. Set the global configuration parameters as needed.
166/532
4. Generate a map, and select the register types you desire.

5. Customize the map by editing registers you created in the prior step.
6. Select the kind of register blocks you wish the software to display in the register list.
7. Select the Register Address you wish to configure from the register list.
8. Select the Field Type you wish the register to represent.
9. Select Slot, Line, Channel and Variable values if a Field Type requires the information.
10. Save the configuration.
11. Do one of the following:

o Close the DSM Modbus Utility.
o Download the configuration to the target DSM.
Launch DSM Modbus Utility

The DSM Modbus Utility is not installed with System 1. You can find it in the install package in the
Standalone Installation Packages folder. When used with System 1 20.1+, you do not need a
license to configure Modbus registers in DSM hardware.
To find a Dynamic Scanning Module (DSM) device on your network:
167/532
1. Open the DSM Modbus Utility.
If the DSM is rebooting or busy, the connection fails. A DSM internal error is displayed
in the Windows Event Viewer.
2. If known, enter the IP address of the Dynamic Scanning Module you want to configure in
the IP Address field. Otherwise, click Browse for DSMs. The DSM Modbus Utility broadcasts a
User Datagram Protocol (UDP) message that prompts DSM devices to respond. The
Browsing for DSMs dialog box is displayed. Expand the drop-down list box to view all
available DSM devices.
168/532
3. Select the DSM device you want to configure.

4. If you want to modify an existing configuration, first retrieve the configuration from the
DSM device. Click Upload. Modify the parameters below as needed.
5. Set the global configuration parameters in the Global Configuration properties displayed
in the Global Configuration pane of the DSM Modbus Utility window.
o Enter the analog-to-digital conversion count that defines a

Set Full Scale Data full scale value. The DSM uses this value to scale
Range proportional variable amplitudes.
o The default value is 65535. Acceptable values are 1-65535.
o Enter the analog-to-digital conversion count that defines a

Set Invalid Clamp Variable Invalid Condition. If a variable is invalid, the DSM will
Value set the Variable Proportional Amplitude to this value.
o The default value is 0. Acceptable values are 0-65535.
o When enabled, the DSM transposes the most significant 16

bits of a 32-bit number with the least significant 16 bits. This
allows a Modbus client to view data in the order the client
Word Swapped
requires.
o Word swapping applies only to Modbus data that requires 2
registers.
o When enabled, synchronizes the internal DSM Modbus clock

to System 1 time.
Use System 1 Time o When cleared, the DSM uses time based on the last set time
command sent from the DSM Modbus Utility or based on
the last time sent from a Modbus client.
6. Select the type of register blocks you want to display in the register list. In the Block
Selection drop-down list box, select the range of register block addresses you want to
display.
169/532
Lists address ranges 10001 to 147000. This type of register provides

Discrete Input
a Modbus device read-only access to status data from the DSM.

Input Registers a Modbus device read-only access to 16-bit amplitude or status
data from the DSM.

a Modbus device with read and write access to the DSM. The
Holding Registers device can read 16-bit amplitude or status data, and can write
multiple-word data. These are distinct non-overlapping Modbus
address tables.
7. The Register List displays addresses based on what you selected in the Block Selection
drop-down list box.
Not all input types require you to specify slot, line, channel or variable values.
170/532
Identifies the type of DSM function that maps to this register. To

Field Type assign variables, point, or DSM status values, select the Field Type
drop-down list box.
Specifies the Modbus address of the register that is assigned to a

Address
given row.
Identifies the DSM data input card slot that the register references.
Slot 4 slots are available in the DSM, and are identified as Slot 1 through
Slot 4.
Refers to a Transducer Interface Module (TIM) line. A SPA card may

Line
have 1 or 2 lines, which are identified as Line 1 or Line 2.
Refers to 1 of up to 255 points on a line. The DSM identifies points as

Channel Channel 1 through Channel 255. A SPA card may have up to 255
channels per line.
Identifies the type of vibration parameter that the DSM presents

Variable on this channel. Examples of variable values are Direct, Gap,
Enveloped, 1X Amplitude, etc.
171/532
8. To modify register configuration, modify the parameters listed below.
Field Type Describes the type of data available at the selected register.
Select the type of fields listed in the DSM Modbus Utility window:

o Variable Status and values associated with a specific
variable of a transducer located at a point on a machine
train. For example: Proportional amplitude and overall
alarm status.
o Point Status and values associated with transducers
Field Type Filter located at a point on a machine train. For example: Not OK
and overall alarm status.
o DSM System-oriented status and values like date and time,
event lists, and DSM operating state.
The Modbus client does not export DSM alarm status for 1x, 2x
measurements. If an alarm is triggered for these measurements
in System 1, the Modbus client does not display them.
Select the Slot value (Slot 1 through Slot 4) that represents the
Slot
data source for the register you are configuring.
Select the line number (Line 1 or Line 2) that represents the data
Line
source for the register you are configuring.
Select the channel number (1 through 255) that represents the

Channel
data source for the register you want to configure.
Limit the display to the selected data. Select the channel number
Variable that represents the data source for the register you want to
configure.
9. Choose File > Save. The Windows Save As dialog box is displayed. Navigate to a preferred
location and save the configuration (*.CSV) file.
10. Alternatively, to generate a Modbus map based on an existing trending configuration, click
Generate. The Import Filters dialog box is displayed.
172/532
11. To generate Modbus maps for each of the Discrete Input, Input Registers, and Holding
Registers register blocks:
a. Enter the Starting Address for the block.
b. Select the Variable Registers you wish to map.
c. Choose Status Templates.
d. Select amplitude templates.
e. Select the DSM Status Registers you wish to map.
f. Choose Point Status Templates.
g. Select other registers for download.
h. Click OK. The Register Map is generated.
The Other Registers group refers to multi-byte values. For this reason, they
are displayed only on the Input Registers tab and Holding registers tab.
Registers that can be written to are displayed only on the Holding Registers
tab.
173/532
12. To transfer the configuration from the Modbus Configuration Utility to the DSM device, click
Download.
13. To save the configuration to your local machine, click Save.
DSM Utilities
Verify Configuration
You can use DSM utilities to verify that the configuration you are building is valid.
To verify that the configuration you downloaded to the DSM Configuration Utility is valid:
1. Choose Utilities > Verify Registers.

2. Enter a starting register address.
3. Enter the number of register addresses you want to display.
4. Click Read Registers.The register addresses are retrieved.
5. To continually read the registers, click Poll Registers.
6. The DSM sends register addresses as integers. You may need to convert units manually.
Set Date and Time

If you need to use a separate time stamp for Modbus system events and other time-related
features, choose Utilities > Set Date, and Time. Enter the new date and time and click Save.
Diagnose Modbus Connection

To use a Modbus diagnostic command, choose Utilities > Diagnostics. To execute a command,
select the one you want.
Get DSM ID
To get the DSM part number and firmware version, choose Utilities > DSM Identification. The part
number and firmware version are displayed.
View DSM Events

To view the most recent 500 DSM events since the last reset or power-off condition, choose
Utilities > Event List. The Event List is displayed.
DSM Configuration Utility Port Numbers

Purpose Port Numbers
Browse the DSM Send: 56009

Receive: 56010
Send DSM command 57004
Modbus transaction 502
174/532
Add Orbit 60 Device
You can add an Orbit 60 device only if System 1 is using PostgreSQL as the data historian. You
can import protection configuration, events (alarm and System), and data (static and
dynamic). The protection configuration displayed is with a few exceptions read-only. Once you
add the device, you can map assets to device points. Within System 1, you can view Orbit 60
Alarm and System health events and acknowledge alarm events.
When you install System 1, an Orbit 60 series device root certificate is also installed. The
root certificate is required to validate the Orbit 60 device. If the certificate is missing, in
Windows File Manager, locate the System 1 installation files. In the Orbit 60 Certificate
Installer folder, run Orbit60CertificateInstaller.exe.
Connect to an Orbit 60 device

To connect to an Orbit 60 device:

Orbit 60 Series. The Add Orbit 60 Series Device dialog box is displayed.
3. In the Credentials pane:
a. Enter the Condition Monitoring Module IP Address and the device Port
Number (61780).
b. Enter the User ID and Password for the device:
n Default User ID: Admin
n Default password: Admin+01
4. Click Add. The Orbit 60 device is displayed in the Properties pane and added to the Devices
hierarchy.
o You can view plots and events for the added device in the Display workspace.
o Live data is stored based on the device rates set in the Database Manager. You can
also configure state-based storage rates for machine trains mapped with Orbit 60
points. When the machine enters the specified state, data is stored based on the
state-based storage rates.
o All the existing points in Orbit 60 Protection Groups are displayed in a single Default
Collection Group. When you map Orbit 60 points to a machine train, the points are
added to a new collection group.
o If a speed channel is not mapped to a machine train, you cannot collect transient
data for that collection group.
5. You can modify only these properties of an Orbit 60 device:
175/532
o Transducer orientation.
o Sync and async waveform properties.
6. If the Orbit 60 configuration changes, you must synchronize the configuration with
System 1. Upon sync, the CMM is not rebooted.
If you are connecting to more than one Orbit 60 Series device, change the device name so you
can easily differentiate the devices.
Add Trended Variables

You can add sync and async waveforms on Orbit 60 vibration channels, configure the
properties, and send the configuration to Orbit 60. The Orbit 60 Condition Monitoring Module
(CMM) computes the waveforms and sends the data to System 1. To add waveforms, see Add
Spectrum/Waveform .
After you add waveforms to the Orbit 60 points, add trended variables:

2. Select Measurements > Trended Variables.
3. Click and select Add Trended Variable. The Add Trended Variable dialog box is
displayed.
4. These trended variable types are supported:
o Bearing Fault Bands
o Spectral Bands
o Waveform Pk-Pk
5. Click Add. The variables are displayed.
You can enable and configure condition monitoring setpoints for the added trended variables.
The trended variable values are computed and displayed in System 1.
Import Offline Diagnostic Files

You can use the Orbit 60 Condition Monitoring Module (CMM) to generate offline diagnostic files
that contain system and alarm events, alarm and transient data. You can import the offline
diagnostic file (ODF) into System 1 for additional insight into machine-related issues and to
analyze the recorded events and data. This feature is useful for Orbit 60 customers who do not
have System 1 installed locally.
To import a diagnostic file:

2. Right-click on a Orbit 60 Series device and choose Import Offline Diagnostic File. The
Windows Open dialog box is displayed.
176/532
3. Navigate to the location in which the .ODF file is located. Select it and click OK. The
protection configuration, events, alarm and transient data is imported and displayed in
the Devices hierarchy. Events and data are visible in the Display workspace.
4. To view a summary of what is imported, in the footer click View ODF File Status. Select
the diagnostic file name you imported. The file is displayed in the default log file app.
5. (Optional) To enable data collection for these devices:
a. Select General > 60 Series System properties.
b. Enter the device IP Address.
c. Enter the credential necessary to connect to the device.
d. Enable data collection.
If the Orbit 60 protection configuration for the device is the same, you can import additional
Offline Diagnostic Files (.ODF) as needed from that device.
Synchronize Devices
If you restore or upgrade a database on a machine with different encryption keys, you
must re-authenticate your devices to authorize the synchronization process.
You must synchronize System 1 application to devices:
l To modify a device configuration.

l To resolve communication issues.
You must confirm configuration changes when you:
l Delete a module
l Replace a module
l Replace a channel
l Modify a unit or subunit
Synchronize Multiple Devices

System 1 cannot currently sync multiple 6X devices. You must synchronize each 6X device
individually.
To synchronize multiple devices:

2. Right-click on the database in the Devices hierarchy. Click Synchronize Configuration. The
Configuration Synchronization dialog box is displayed.
3. To multiselect devices, press or .
177/532
4. Click Synchronize. Confirm you want to make the changes. One device is synced at a time.
Progress is displayed in the Configuration Synchronization dialog box.
5. When synchronization is complete, close the dialog box and choose File > Save.
Synchronize Individual Devices

To synchronize individual devices:

2. Choose a device category such as 3500 devices:
3. Select the General tab in the central pane.

4. Select a device from the list.
5. Choose Synchronize :
When you synchronize System 1 with a 3500 rack, if the synchronization causes data to be
deleted, the application displays a warning message.
6. If System 1 displays a warning message, confirm the configuration changes.
Synchronization with ISA100.11a Wireless Gateway

If you modify configuration of an ISA100.11a Wireless Gateway, you must resync System 1 with the
gateway. When complete:
l The primary measurement of a channel may be updated.

l New sensors may appear in the Devices hierarchy under the gateway.
l Deleted sensors are added to a Decommission Group under the gateway. You can delete
a Decommission Group and their sensors from System 1.
178/532
l Deleted channels or measurements are removed from the Machines or Devices

hierarchies.
Import Device IP Addresses
To reduce the time it takes to configure multiple devices, you can import the IP addresses
attached to devices.
Create the Import File

To create the .CSV file
1. Create a new .CSV file using your preferred application.

2. To create a .CSV file that lists existing devices:
a. In the Device hierarchy, select a device name column.
b. To select all devices, press .
c. Copy and paste the selected devices to a Excel file.

d. Remove unneeded headers like the database or group name.
e. Only the device names should be displayed in the first column.
f. In the second column, enter the IP address for the device. Each IP address must be
unique.
3. Click Save. Note the name of the file and the location where you save the file.
Import .CSV File
Use a third-party application to edit the file and add IP addresses to the .CSV file. Then import it
back into System 1.
To import the .CSV file:

2. In the Device hierarchy, right-click on a device group to which you want to add devices.
3. Choose Import IP address from .CSV. The Windows Open dialog box is displayed.
4. Navigate to and select the .CSV file you created in the prior step. Click Open.
5. System 1 attempts to import the .CSV data and displays a message:
o If the .CSV file is not formatted properly, or if another error is found, System 1 cannot
import the .CSV data and displays an error message.
o Otherwise, click OK. The IP addresses are assigned to the matching device names.
Authenticate Devices
179/532
You can resolve Authentication Failure system health events and update connection
credentials at any time.
For server versions earlier than 16.1, the Credentials field is only displayed if an
Authentication Failure event was triggered.
Enter Credentials
To authenticate devices:

2. In the Devices hierarchy, select a device.
4. In the Authentication field, click Credentials. The User Authentication dialog box is
displayed.
5. Enter a valid Password and click OK.
If you changed the configuration, you may need to synchronize your device.
3.5 Create Machine Train Diagram
The machine train is a digital representation of the assets in your physical plant. System 1
includes an Asset Library that contains common assets you can use to build a diagram of your
plant. You can also use User Templates that represent common assets in your plant. The
machine train diagram displays customizable properties for each asset.
180/532
Create a Machine Train Diagram

The maximum number of asset types you can add per custom train are 10 drivers, 40
driven assets, or 500 couplings.
To create a machine train diagram:

2. Select the Machines hierarchy.
3. Select the General tab. The machine train diagram canvas is displayed and the Asset
Library is displayed on the right.
4. Add assets and pre-defined machine trains to the diagram. Select relevant assets in the
Asset Library. If suitable to your purposes, you can drag preconfigured trains from the
Trains group onto your canvas.
181/532
If you add multiple drivers, always add the main driver first. All drivers added after
the first driver are treated as secondary drivers when propagating speeds.
We recommend you add each machine in the order of driver to driven. This orders
the property grid tabs correctly.
5. To insert a new object, choose a method:

o Drag Asset onto Machines Hierarchy:
a. Select the asset template on the right and drag to the database, group, or
train.
b. Verify the green check indicating it is okay to drop.
o Drag Asset onto Overview Tab
a. Click the asset template on the right and drag it to the General tab canvas.
b. The green check indicates when it is okay to drop the asset. You may need to
wait a few seconds for the message to display.
c. Release the left mouse key to drop the asset.
When you drag a new asset from the library to the diagram area where another
asset is already present, the software creates a new train to combine the two assets.
The new train is called "Train" and is displayed at the same location in the Machines
hierarchy as the original asset with the two assets placed beneath. For details, see
Create Custom Train
The new asset is displayed in the diagram area.
6. To connect the assets, couplings are required. Add suitable couplings to match the
selected train and assets. Click and drag a coupling towards the asset to which you want
to connect. A blurred copy of the coupling is displayed connected to the asset to indicate
that a connection is made:
182/532
You can add couplings to either side of an asset. If the blurred copy of the coupling is
displayed on the incorrect side of the asset, move the coupling farther away from the
asset to reveal the blurred copy on the appropriate side. For example, to add a coupling to
the left side of an asset when the blurred copy displays on the right side, move the
coupling farther to the left to reveal the blurred copy on the left.
7. When you create a new asset, there are two bearings per shaft. The Machine hierarchy
displays the machine and two bearings.
8. To connect to a Gbx (Configurable) or Roll Section asset:
Because it can be custom configured, you cannot create a snap connection to a

Gbx (Configurable) or Roll Section asset in the machine train canvas.
a. Add a Direct Coupling asset.

b. In the Machine hierarchy, select the machine train. The machine train assets
properties are displayed under the Machine Diagram.
c. Select the Direct Coupling properties.
Do not connect the Direct Coupling to two shafts on the same asset. To
prevent this, we recommend that you give the shaft of each asset unique
names before to connecting them with a Direct Coupling.
183/532
d. Use the Connection 1 and Connection 2 fields to assign each connection point:
9. Release the mouse button to complete the coupling connection. Repeat this process to
connect all of your assets.
10. In the Properties pane for each asset, modify measurement values as needed.
Disconnect Assets
To disconnect assets, hover your mouse near the coupling, and click the displayed X:
To disconnect a Gbx (Configurable), remove the shaft connection in the Direct Coupling
properties associated. Choose Not Connected.
Add Asset Groups
184/532
Add Groups to an Asset

You can optionally organize your database by adding groups to the Asset hierarchy.
To add asset groups:

3. In the Asset Library, expand and choose Asset Group.
4. Click and drag Asset Group to the database or group you want.
5. Verify a green check mark is displayed. It indicates it is okay to drop the asset.
6. Release left mouse button to drop the Asset Group.
Edit Folder Name

To modify the name of the new folder:
1. Click the newly created group.

2. Double-click Name property.
3. Type new name.
You must save your configuration before you can display the new group or folder.
Add Crank Angle Bands
185/532
About Crank Angle Bands

You can add crank angle bands to 3500 70M Impulse Accel channels and 3500 72M dynamic
waveform channels. Crank angle bands provide data at discrete intervals during the crankshaft
revolution.
You can add a maximum of 36 crank angle bands to a 70M channel and a maximum of 8
crank angle bands to a 72M channel.
Add Crank Angle Bands

To add crank angle bands to a recip channel:
1. Select Select the Configure Workspace and Standard Mode.

2. In the Machines hierarchy, select an asset.
3. Select the Measurements tab.
4. In the central pane, select Manual Instrumentation. and then select Add Trended
Variable.
The Add Trended Variable dialog box is displayed.

5. Choose Crank Angle Band from the Trended Variable Type drop-down list box.
6. Select an associated spectrum/waveform.
7. To exclude historical samples from the crank angel bands measurements, clear Calculate
Historical Sample.
8. From the Select Point(s) pane, choose one or more points where the trended variable is
added. This pane includes only points for which the selected waveform or spectrum are
configured.
186/532
9. Choose Add. System 1 creates the bands and adds them to the channel. The application
displays the crank angle bands in the Trended Variables panel under the CA Bands
group. A set of bands represents a measurement of a waveform in the channel.
187/532
Add Performance Measurements
About 3500/ 77M Measurements

Performance measurements are trended variables that you can add to the 3500 / 77M cylinder
pressure channels. These performance measurements are available in System 1:
l Discharge Volumetric Efficiency

l Suction Volumetric Efficiency
l Indicated Horse Power
l Adiabatic Discharge Temperature
l Discharge Capacity
l Suction Capacity
l Median Capacity
l Adiabatic Median Capacity
l Flow Balance
l Adiabatic Flow Balance
l Power to Median Capacity
l Indicated Clearance Volume
l Discharge Power Loss
l Suction Power Loss
Add 77M Performance Measurements

To add performance measurements to a 77M Cylinder pressure channel of a 3500 device:

2. In the Machines hierarchy, select an asset.
188/532
4. In the central pane, choose Manual Instrumentation and choose Add Trended Variable.
The Add Trended Variable dialog box is displayed.

5. In the Trended Variable Type drop-down list box, choose Performance Measurements
6. Select an associated spectrum/waveform.
7. To exclude historical samples from performance measurements, clear Calculate
Historical Samples.
8. In the Select Point(s) pane, select one or more points where the trended variable is added.
This pane includes only points for which the selected waveform or spectrum are
configured.
9. Choose Add. The performance measurements are added to the channel.
3.6 Modify Machine or Device Properties
You can modify machine and device properties.
If you change the bearing property of an online device, any device channels mapped
using that bearing are un-mapped. If you change a bearing property used for
measurements by a portable device, the measurements are deleted.
Machines
1. Select an asset.
2. Select the tab for the asset in the central pane. A set or train of assets has a tab for the set
and a tab for each asset.
189/532
3. Enter property information for each asset.

o Values critical for instrumentation and diagnostics are specially important.
o Properties appearing in bold are editable.
o A question mark (?) indicates a property has not been configured.
o A dash (-) indicates a property is not applicable.
o To display only important properties, select the filter button in the property grid
bar.
4. The status bar displays the relevant information when properties affecting other assets
change. See Status Bar Warnings and Errors in online help.
5. After building your assets, Choose File and Save to store the configuration.
Devices
1. Select a device.
3. Enter property information for the device card:
o Modify Channel Properties .
o Modify Spectrums and Waveforms .
o Modify Trended Variables .
o Modify Setpoints .
190/532
To customize the view, select the Filter button.
The status bar displays information when properties affecting other assets change. See
Status Bar Warnings and in online help.
4. Click Save.
Modify Asset Properties
The properties grid displays detailed information about each configured machine component
or instrument.
Filter Important Properties

To filter options displayed in the properties grid:
1. Choose Configure> Standard Mode.

2. In the Machines hierarchy, select an asset. Alternatively, drag an asset from the Asset
Library to the Train canvas.
3. In the Properties pane, select the Filter button. When enabled, it is displayed in blue
and only important properties are displayed.
191/532
Unfiltered Properties List

All properties can be entered to keep track of details on each asset.
For the Devices hierarchy, the unfiltered list displays all active and inactive measurements.
Filtered Properties List

The filter option displays only the properties critical for diagnostic calculations and
instrumentation.
For the Devices hierarchy, the filter option displays only active measurements.
192/532
Delete Multiple Rows

To select multiple rows, choose a method:
l Click and drag to select:
l Click, then press CTRL and click to select each row separately:
l Click, then press Shift and click for a range selection:
To complete the delete operation, right-click and choose the Delete option.
193/532
Properties Grid Copy and Paste

You can copy and paste specific types of properties in the Properties grid.
All single and multiple cells can be copied

l If you copy multiple cells, they can only be copied to Microsoft Office products. System 1
cannot paste content from multiple cells from the clipboard.
l You cannot copy multiple unconnected cells (illustrated below) to the clipboard:
An error message is displayed.
Single or multiple selected cells can be pasted only if the unit type is the
same
Gray text without bold is read-only and cannot be pasted. When text cannot be copied, the copy
and paste options are dimmed.
Bold blue text can be pasted only if the data type is the same. For example, you cannot copy a
text entry type to a drop-down selection type field. If you copy a drop-down selection field to
another field, it must be one of the drop-down selections. If the data types are different, the
following message displays:
Custom fields, like Fmax and Transducer Type, can also be copied to like
fields
l Fmax notes:
194/532
oCopy/paste operations replace the numeric value and unit.

oNewly pasted values update across static and dynamic tabs, Fmax related
measurement names, and associated variables, like Demod Spec and associated
Demod Wf.
o If the newly pasted Fmax range is not supported by that variable, like 40K on Demod,
then the warning message in step 4 is displayed.

l Transducer Type notes:
o When copying a transducer type, all associated properties are copied: units,
dynamic range, scale factor, and lower/upper frequency ranges.
Modify Isentropic Process Properties
Select a Recip Asset

You can apply isentropic compression properties to a recip asset. To enable these properties,
select a recip asset one of these ways:
l Machine hierarchy
l Train canvas
l Property grid.
The isentropic button is enabled.
Modify Isentropic Compression Process Properties

To modify Isentropic Compression Process Properties:

2. In the Machines hierarchy, select a reciprocating compressor.
3. Select the isentropic button in the right top of the properties bar. The Isentropic
Compression Process dialog box is displayed.
Modify the Isentropic Compression Process properties to:

o Name a stage.
o Set the gas model for a stage.
o Save a stage.
o Add or delete a stage.
o Modify compressibility constants. System 1 calculates compressibility constants
using the property values of chambers associated with a stage. Compressibility
constants depend on the type of gas model and the gas composition.
Compressibility constants include:
195/532
n Z Standard
n Z Suction
n Z Discharge
n K Average
n K Suction
When you modify one of the compressibility constants or a property used to

calculate a compressibility constant, System 1 removes the link between the
constant and the template. To establish the connection again, link the
property to the template.
o Create and configure a gas composition for a recip compressor. See Modify Gas
Composition Properties .
Add a New Stage

1. Select a recip asset.
2. Select the isentropic button. The Isentropic Compression Process dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select Add. A new recip asset is displayed. A recip asset may contain a maximum of 20
stages.
Configure a Stage
displayed.
3. Select the stage Name property you want to modify.
4. Edit the stage Name.
5. Modify the gas model properties.
Delete a Stage
displayed.
3. Select a stage.
4. Right-click on the stage Name property and choose Delete. You can delete all stages but
one.
Modify Gas Composition Properties
196/532
You can create a gas composition for a recip compressor. A gas composition can contain a
maximum of 20 gases.
To modify gas composition properties:

4. In the General section, select the Gas Composition drop-down list box.
o To create a gas, click New.
o To modify an existing gas, click Edit.
The Gas Composition dialog box is displayed.
197/532
You cannot create a custom template from a gas composition. When you modify
the composition of a gas, System 1 recalculates the compressibility constants in
the recip stages tied to the gas composition.
To save a gas composition, the total sum of all gases together must be 100%.
Use the Gas Composition dialog box to:

o Create a new gas composition.
o Name a gas composition.
198/532
o Select a gas and set its percentage in a composition.

o Delete gases from a composition.
5. Click Save. The Isotropic Composition Process dialog box is displayed.
Associate Chambers to Stages
To associate one or more chambers with only one stage, modify the Isentropic Compression
Process properties.

3. Click the Isentropic button in the right top of the properties bar. The Isentropic
4. In the General section, select the Gas Composition drop-down list box.
5. The Chamber Process Parameters properties must be the same for all stages. If you
attempt to modify them, System 1 prompts you to set the values to those displayed for the
199/532
chamber of the first stage. If you do not reset these property values, the chamber can not
be associated with the stage.
When you modify the chambers with which a stage is associated, System 1 does not
remove the existing links between compressibility constants of the stage and the
template. We recommend delinking the constants before changing the chamber-stage
association.
To associate chambers of cylinders to stages:


4. In the Chamber/Stage Association section, select a Throw > Cylinder drop-down list box.
A list of available chambers is displayed.
5. Select a chamber from the list. If you attempt to associate a chamber with multiple stages,
System 1 displays an error message:
6. Click OK. The asset properties pane is displayed.
Propagate Speed Across Trains
The Rated RPM property of driven assets is calculated based on the relationship of the asset to
the driver. This relationship is mathematically expressed as a ratio and is primarily dependent on
the types of assets in the train.
Modifying Speeds in Trains

When modifying the RPM properties of assets within trains, the following conventions are used to
200/532
propagate the RPM properties to other driven assets in the train:
l If the RPM of the main driver is changed, the change is propagated appropriately to all
other assets in the train.
l If the RPM of a secondary driver is changed, only the RPM of assets driven by the secondary
driver is affected.
The main driver is always the first driver added to the train. All subsequent drivers are
secondary drivers.
EXAMPLE: Complex Machine Train
To demonstrate these conventions, refer to the train illustrated:
l The central AC Motor is driving assets on both sides.

l The left side is driving an integrally geared screw compressor that in turn drives two
independent pumps.
l The right side is driving a gearbox that drives a compressor and a fan.
l Changing the RPM on the central motor affects the RPM settings on all of the six other
assets in the train.
l Conversely, changing the RPM of the pumps does not affect the RPM settings on the rest of
the train.
l Changing the RPM of the screw compressor affects the pump RPM settings but not affect
the central motor, gearbox, right compressor, and fan.
l If a speed ratio is set on assets with multiple shafts, like a gearbox, the RPM setting is
propagated with respect to the ratio.
Asset RPM Ratio Properties

Gearboxes, screw compressors, and belt couplings have asset properties that define the ratios
between their internal shafts.
Gearboxes Properties
For gearboxes, there are two main ratios referenced:
l Overall Ratio (OR) - This ratio is entered in the Overall Ratio property in the Nameplate
Information section of the gearbox.
From driver to driven, this ratio can be expressed as:
201/532
OR = Rated rpm of Shaft X/Rated rpm of Shaft 1, where Shaft X is the output shaft: Shaft 2
for single-stage gearboxes or Shaft 3 for two-stage gearboxes.
l Internal Ratio (IR) - This ratio is calculated from the Number of Input Gear Teeth and
Number of Output Gear Teeth properties in the Stage X sections of the gearbox. From
driver to driven, this ratio can be expressed as:
IR = Number of Output Gear Teeth/Number of Input Gear Teeth.
The overall ratio details the relationship between the input shaft speed and the output shaft
speed. The internal ratio details the relationship between the each individual shaft in the
gearbox. For single-stage gearboxes, these two ratios are equal.
For two-stage gearboxes, there are two internal ratios:
l IR 1 = Number of Output Gear Teeth of Shaft 2/Number of Input Gear Teeth of Shaft 1
l IR 2 = Number of Output Gear Teeth of Shaft 3/Number of Input Gear Teeth of Shaft 3
IR 1 is the relationship between Shaft 1 and Shaft 2.
IR 2 is the relationship between Shaft 2 and Shaft 3.
These ratios are given from input to output. To understand speed propagation from
output to input, take the inverse of these equations.
The following table lists the locations of the shafts on the asset images:
Asset Shaft 1 Shaft 2 Shaft 3 Shaft 4
Gbx (1 Stg Bevel) Left Right - -
Gbx (1 Stg Fixed Ring Planetary) Left Right - -
Gbx (1 Stg Parallel) Left Right - -
Gbx (2 Stg Bevel/Parallel) Left - Right -
Gbx (2 Stg Parallel) Bottom Middle Top -
Gbx (2 Stg WTG Cmpd Plt

Left Middle Top -
Planetary)
Middle-
Gbx (3 Stg WTG Planetary) Left Middle-Top Top
Bottom
Attaching a driver to an output shaft is propagated speed using the inverse of the
relationships explained.
Speed Propagation in Configurable Gearboxes

The speed ratio is calculated slightly differently for the following configurable gearboxes:
202/532
l Gbx (1 Stg Fixed Ring Planetary)

l Gbx (2 Stg WTG Cmpd Plt Planetary)
l Gbx (3 Stg WTG Planetary)
l Gbx (Configurable)
For configurable gearboxes, the Stage Ratio property is considered an internal ratio.
The Stage Ratio uses the output and input Rated rpm properties associated within the
gearbox instead gear teeth.
Rolls Section Properties

The Stage Ratio is calculated from the Number of Input Gear Teeth and Number of Output
Gear Teeth properties from the Gear sections on the rolls/couplings. The ratio property is saved
at the Stage section. From driver to driven, this ratio can be expressed as:
l Stage Ratio = Number of Output Gear Teeth/Number of Input Gear Teeth
Screw Compressors Properties

Screw compressor assets do not have an Overall Ratio property. Speed propagation ratios for
each type of screw compressor are derived from other properties:
The following ratios are given from input to output. To understand speed propagation
from output to input, take the inverse of these equations.
Single Stage Dry and Wet Screw Compressors
Single-stage dry and wet screw compressors each only contain two shafts, so they have an
effective overall ratio (OR) that can be expressed as the following:
l Dry compressor - OR = Number of Driven Rotor Teeth/Number of Drive Rotor Teeth

l Wet compressor - OR = Number of Female Rotor Flutes/Number of Male Rotor Lobes
Integrally Geared Wet Screw Compressor
The integrally geared wet screw compressor contains four total shafts and does not have an
effective overall ratio. As such, these compressors have internal ratios (IR), expressed as the
following property relationships:
l IR 1 = Number of Male Shaft Gear Teeth/Number of Input/Bull Gear Teeth

l IR 2 = Number of Female Rotor Flutes/Number of Male Rotor Lobes
l IR 3 = 1
The third internal ratio is a direct one-to-one relationship.
l IR 1 is the relationship between the Input Shaft and the Male Rotor.
l IR 2 is the relationship between the Male Rotor and the Female Rotor.
l IR 3 is the relationship between the Female Rotor and the Lube Pump.
Shaft Locations
203/532
Below is a table to list the locations of the shafts on the asset images:
The shaft order for Screw Cmp Int Gear (1 Stg Wet) assets is 1, 2, 3, 4 from top to bottom.
Drive Input Male Female Lube

Asset Driven Rotor
Rotor Shaft Rotor Rotor Pump
Screw Cmp
Bottom Top - - - -
(1 Stg Dry)
Screw Cmp
- - - Bottom Top -
(1 Stg Wet)
Screw Cmp Int
Gear (1 Stg - - 3 1 4 2
Wet)
Attaching a driver to an output shaft is propagated speed using the inverse of the
relationships explained.
Belt Couplings Properties

Belt couplings have a single overall ratio (OR) to drive speed propagation, expressed as the
following property relationship:
OR = Pulley 1 pitch diameter/Pulley 2 pitch diameter
This ratio is given from driver to driven. To understand speed propagation from driven to
driver, take the inverse of these equations.
In the coupling image, pulley 1 can be on the top or the bottom. Its location is determined by the
position attached to the driver.
Whichever position is attached to the driver is designated as pulley 1.
Use the Bearing Database
Use the ISI Bearing Database included in System 1 to search for bearing properties by
Manufacturer or Part Number. When you include manufacturer's bearing properties, you can
significantly improve preventative and diagnostic maintenance results.
Search for Bearings

To search for bearings:
204/532

3. In the Device hierarchy, select the bearing whose properties you want to modify.
4. In the property tab for the bearing, choose the Advance Bearing Properties field.
Alternatively, click .
5. Click More. The Advance Bearing Properties dialog box is displayed.

6. Select the Bearing field and choose Open Bearing Database. The Bearing Database
205/532
7. Search on Manufacturer, Part Number, or both. Enter manufacturers information, such as

SKF, Timken, NTN, INA, FAG. Tor a fast and accurate search, enter the part number.
8. Click Search. The ISI Bearing Database results are displayed. The bearing list is initially
displayed unsorted. To sort results, select a column header.
9. Select the bearing you need.
10. Double-click on the bearing to select it and click OK.
Advanced Bearing Properties
To improve preventative and diagnostic maintenance, we recommend you specify bearing

properties.
Set Bearing Properties

To set bearing properties:
206/532
1. In the Machines hierarchy, select a bearing.

2. In the property grid, choose Advanced Bearing Properties and click More. The Advanced
Bearing Properties dialog box is displayed.
3. Select values for bearing properties and options:

o If you do not know the bearing manufacturer or part number, select three similar
bearings.
o For each bearing option, turn on fault frequency markers and examine them.
207/532
o Identify the best match and set that bearing as default.
4. Click Done.The bearing properties grid is displayed.
About Bearing Properties

When setting bearing properties, consider:
l Cage frequency depends on the rotating component and either FTFI or FTFO. See
Configure Sideband Energy Ratio and Bearing Bands.
For planet bearings, consider:
208/532
l Rotating component depends on the cage attached to the planet. Possible values are:
o Inner Race - Use this value when the outer race is attached to the carrier.
o Outer Race - Use this value when the inner race is attached to the carrier.
209/532
l For a rotating inner race, cage frequency depends on the carrier, planet speeds, and FTFO.
l For a rotating outer race, cage frequency depends on the carrier, planet speeds, and FTFI.
l When the rotating component is not set, rotating outer race is assumed.
3.7 Add Instrumentation to Assets

Before you can begin collecting data for an asset, you need to add points to each asset, and
then add measurements to each point.
You can only use the Measurement Quick Configuration tool to instrument assets
containing a single IB/DE and single OB/NDE Anti-Friction bearing. You cannot use this
tool to configure hydrodynamic or unknown bearing types.
To add instrumentation to assets, choose a method:
l Automatically, using Measurement Quick Configuration

l Manually, using Manual Instrumentation.
Quick Configure Measurements
Use the Measurement Quick Configuration tool to automatically instrument assets using
standard recommended methodologies.
210/532
You can only use the Measurement Quick Configuration tool to instrument assets
containing a single IB/DE and single OB/NDE Anti-Friction bearing. You cannot use this
tool to configure hydrodynamic or unknown bearing types.
Open Measurement Quick Configuration Tool

If the Measurement Quick Configuration button is disabled, the selected asset is already
instrumented.
To configure measurements:
1. Select the asset or train you want to instrument in the Asset Hierarchy. Choose a method
to begin to configure measurements:
o Click the Measurement Quick Configuration button .
o Right-click and choose Measurement Quick Configuration.

2. If the configuration tool detects that you have selected a single asset within a train, you
are prompted to confirm which asset you want to configure:
3. If you choose:
o Asset. The configuration tool instruments the selected asset, leaving other assets on
the train unmodified. You must manually select and instrument each asset on the
train.
o Train. The configuration tool instruments all assets on the train in proper relation to
each other.
The Measurement Quick Configuration dialog box is displayed.
211/532
Verify Asset Readiness

In the Measurement Quick Configuration dialog box, Asset Property Status is displayed at the
top of the dialog box. If the indicator is red or yellow, Click for details. The missing configuration
properties is displayed.
Required Properties are Missing

l This status indicates that the asset has not been minimally configured with enough
information to be instrumented.
l When you choose Click for details, the Asset Property Status dialog is displayed. To
display the minimum configuration information that must be completed before
instrumentation can occur, select the Required tab.
To complete the required configuration information:
1. Click OK.
2. Click Cancel to close the Measurement Quick Configuration dialog box.
3. Click General tab.
4. Click the asset's tab in the property window in the lower middle section.
5. Navigate to the property that needs to be changed.
6. Enter the correct information.
Recommended Properties are Missing

l This status indicates that the asset has been configured for the minimum information, but
the recommended information has not been completed. If the status indicator is yellow,
212/532
you can continue with instrumentation.

l To view Asset Property Status, click Click for Details. To display the minimum
configuration information that must be completed before instrumentation can occur,
select the Recommended tab.
To complete the recommended configuration information:
1. Click OK and close the dialog box.

2. Click Cancel to close the Measurement Quick Configuration dialog box.
3. Click General tab.
4. Click the asset's tab in the property window in the lower middle section.
5. Navigate to the property that needs to be changed.
6. the correct information.
Good
If the Asset Property Status is Good, then the asset has been configured with enough
information to be instrumented.
Select Instrumentation Methods

In the Measurement Quick Configuration dialog box, in the Setup tab:
213/532
1. Select the Instrumentation you want to use. Portable is the default.
2. Select the Configuration standard you want to apply.

o TA Proven Method. The industry standard created by Technical Associates.
o ISO. The BS-ISO standard values from the International Organization for
Standardization.
3. Select the Naming standard for point configuration.
o Condensed naming convention to display names like:
n MOB_H - motor, outboard bearing, horizontal placement

n PIB_A - pump, inboard bearing, axial placement
o Full displays names like:
n Motor Inboard Horizontal

n Pump Inboard Axial
214/532
4. Select the Alarming method.

o TA Proven Method Configuration Standard
n None
n TA Both Overall and Spectral Bands. This selection uses the Technical
Associates alarming method for Overall and Spectral Band data.
n TA Overall Only. This selection gives the Technical Associates alarming
method for Overall alone.
o ISO Configuration Standard.
n None
n ISO
5. Choose Alarm Levels, there are check boxes to choose Level 3 and Level 4 alarm triggers.
Click to select.
6. Choose Speed Measure.
o Configured Speed uses the speed configured for the asset.
o Ask For Speed option prompts you to enter the speed from a source provided by
you.
7. Click Preview.
Preview Instrumentation Options

1. In the Measurement Quick Configuration dialog box, select the Preview tab.
215/532
2. Verify the information is accurate. By default, most points are activated. Deselect the
points you want to deactivate.
Review and verify the Collection Time calculated for each point and the Total Collection
Time for all assets.
Build Instrumentation and Save

1. To automatically build all instrumented points, click Build. The instrumentation is
completed.
Instrument Assets Manually
Supported PeakDemod Measurement

Peak Demod is useful for measuring very low speed machines because the Algorithm widens the
216/532
peak measurements and retains the full amplitude of the impacting events in the waveform. The
impact spikes are clearly displayed above the noise floor. Both Classic and Peak Demod detect
roller element bearing faults extremely effectively before any physical surface damage is visible
(while the fault is still a sub-surface spall).
Peak Demod is only available on SCOUT200 portable devices.
Instrument Assets Manually

If you need to apply custom instrumentation to assets or groups, you can instrument them
manually.
To instrument assets manually:
1. Select the asset in the hierarchy to which you want to add a point, spectrum, waveform, or
trended variable.
2. Click the Manual Instrumentation button.
3. Before you can collect data for an asset:

o Add points to each asset
o Add measurements to each point.
Manual Instrumentation Scenarios

There are two basic scenarios for adding manual instrumentation:
l Add additional measurements to existing points. If you used the Measurement Quick
Configuration tool to create points already, you can use Manual Instrumentation to add
trended variables or Spectrums and Waveforms to an existing point.
l Create a new point and add measurements. You can create a new point with
automatically-configured default measurements or manually add measurements to
existing points.
o Add Point
o Add Spectrum/Waveform. Add spectrums or waveforms first so to enable you to set
up trended variables.
o Add Trended Variables
Add Points
217/532
You can add vibration or process points to an asset. Only portable devices are supported.
Display the Points Tab

The Points tab is only displayed when you select the Device hierarchy.

2. Choose Data Collection > Points. The Points tab is displayed.
3. For vbOnline Pro devices, the columns in the Points tab display each State Group currently
configured. By default, all vbOnline Pro channels belong to every state:
4. Choose which channels you want to associate with groups of states.
Channels can belong to multiple state groups.
Add Vibration Point

218/532
2. Choose Measurements > Points.

3. Click the Manual Instrument button and choose Add Point. The Add Point dialog box
is displayed.
4. In the Point Type field, choose Vibration.

5. In the Available Points field, select the appropriate type, either Acceleration, Velocity, or
Displacement.
6. In the Transducer field, select the model you are configuring. The Lower and Upper OK
Limits of the transducer depend upon the type of collection method in use.
o Rack Buffered outputs from a Bently Nevada monitoring system are negatively
biased.
o Magnetic mounted transducers from a portable device instrument are positively
biased.
7. In the Add Following Points field, select the points to be instrumented.
8. To create these measurements automatically, enable Create default measurement for
219/532
these points. Selecting this option automatically populates Spectrums and Waveforms
and Trended Variables associated with the newly created points. If not selected, you must
manually add Spectrums and Waveforms and Trended Variables for the points.
9. In the Location pane, select the specific locations, usually asset bearings, to which the
points are added. To select all locations, check All.
10. Click Add.
Add Keypad Entry Point

3. Click the Manual Instrument button and choose Add Point. The Add Point dialog box
is displayed.
4. Choose Point Type > Keypad Entry.
220/532
5. In Unit Type, select one of:

o Temperature
o Current
o Power
o Flow - Volume
o Pressure - Gauge
o Custom - See Add Custom Units.
To add a point not included in these options, click More Options. The Keypad Entry Points
6. Select the Units for the selected Keypad Entry point.

7. Using the Add Points To Locations section, select the points to be added to specific assets
or locations. To select all locations, check All.
8. (Optional) To add a custom point name, click the point name text box.
9. Click Add.
Add Custom Unit

To add custom units to the Keypad Entry point type:
221/532
1. Choose Unit Type > Custom. The Add Custom Unit dialog box is displayed.
If custom units already exist, select the Unit Type > Add. You can also add custom
units in the Custom Component Manager.
2. Enter the custom unit Name.

3. (Optional) Enter the custom unit Description , for example, the long form name of the
abbreviated unit.
4. Click Add.
Modify Point Properties

You can add, modify, or delete the measurements, setpoints, as well as specific properties of the
predefined Spectrums and Waveforms, Trended Variables, and Setpoints.
For details, see Modify Instrumentation Properties .
222/532
OPC Server Support

System 1 does not support software and state-based alarming for OPC servers. The Data
Collection pane is not displayed at this hierarchy level.
2300 Device Support

System 1 does not support transient data collection for 2300 devices. The Data Collection pane is
not displayed at this hierarchy level.
Add Spectrum/Waveform
To add a new spectrum or waveform measurement:

3. Click Add Spectrum/Waveform . Depending on what is selected in the Device
Hierarchy, the Add Spectrum/Waveform dialog box displays relevant points

(measurement locations).
For example, if you select a machine train, then all the points that belong to individual
machines (motor, gearbox, pump, and so forth) in that train are displayed.
223/532
4. Select the Unit Type.

5. Select the Measurement Type.
6Pack is only available with an Asynchronous Sampling Type.
6. Select the Sampling Type.

o Async Asynchronous waveforms are sampled at a fixed frequency irrespective of the
speed of the machine.
o Sync Synchronous waveforms are sampled at a fixed number of samples per
revolution of the machine shaft.
7. Modify the Waveform Properties as needed. This list displayed is a filtered view of important
properties that are needed to configure the measurements. These properties are
calculated based on the speed of the first asset on the train.
a. In the General pane, depending on the device selected, modify properties displayed
as needed:
224/532
Property Notes
If High Freq Fmax = If High Freq Fmax = If High Freq Fmax =

10,000 Hz . . .(Default) 20,000 Hz . . . 40,000 Hz . . .
Demod Default is 2-10 kHz. Default is 2-20 kHz.

Default is 2-40 kHz.
Bandwidth
Fmax Defaults are 1000 Hz, Defaults are 1000 Hz,

Defaults are 1000 Hz,
60,000 cpm, or 60,000 cpm, or
60,000 cpm, or orders
orders based on orders based on
based on speed.
speed. speed.
Spectral
Default is 800
Lines
Algorithm Select the type of processing to be applied by the data collector

Type when recording a demodulation measurement.
Peak Uses a peak-based algorithm to detect full amplitude of

low frequency machinery impacts in a high-frequency
carrier (up to 40kHz). The algorithm retains the true
amplitude of short duration pulses, but can introduce
significant spurious spectral peaks. Only supported in
SCOUT200 series portable devices.
Classic Uses an industry-standard demodulation algorithm to

identify low frequency events in a high-frequency carrier
(up to 20kHz). The Classic algorithm produces a very
clean measurement with few spurious spectral peaks.
But peak amplitude levels can be low, especially for
infrequent events on low speed machines.
Average
Linear, Exponential, or Peak Hold.
Type
Averages The number of data samples to average: 1 - 128
Number of
Default is 4
Averages
Samples per
Default is 256
Rev
Revs Default is 32
225/532
b. In the Location pane, select the points where the waveform and/or spectrum are
added. Depending upon the type of waveform or spectrum currently selected, the
points that are not applicable are disabled. For example, if you are trying to add an
Acceleration waveform, you cannot modify either Velocity or Displacement points.
o Low Freq Unit Default is Velocity.
o High Freq/Demod Unit Default is Acceleration. Not editable.
o You can add the 6Pack measurement type under acceleration points.
8. Click Add.
9. The new measurements are displayed at the bottom of the properties grid with the default
configuration. Modify the configuration as needed.
10. When you add a spectrum and waveform measurement, a default Trended Variables is
automatically created.
o For spectrums - Overall (O/All) trended variable, like:
o For waveforms - Waveform peak-to-peak (Wf pp) trended variable, like:
o For complex measurements - Overall (O/All) and Waveform peak-to-peak (Wf pp),
like:
226/532
For a Demod complex measurement, only an overall trended variable is

created.
Add Trended Variable
You must configure Spectrums and Waveforms before adding Trended Variables.
You can add trended variables from either the Machines or Devices hierarchy.
Machines Hierarchy
To add trended variables in the Machine hierarchy:

2. Select Measurements > Trended Variables.
227/532
displayed.
4. Choose Trended Variable Type.

5. Select the Associated Spectrum/Waveform. Choose the spectrum or waveform you want
to associate with this trended variable. This drop-down selection varies, depending upon
the spectrums or waveforms already configured. It filters to only include applicable
spectrums and waveforms based on the trended variable type selected.
6. Set Properties to configure trended variables. To configure up to ten variables for each
point at one time, click and select the type of variable you want to add.
o Ball Fault Bands (BPFI or BPFO): Band lower and higher frequencies are
automatically set, depending on configured bearing properties after selecting the
Add Selected. Only the name can be changed in this dialog for these trended
variable types.
228/532
o Crest Factor: Band lower and higher frequencies are not applicable for this trended
variable type. Only the name can be changed in this dialog box.
o Spectral Bands: Set the band lower and higher frequencies for the range in which
you want your measurement calculated. A default name is given based on values
entered. This name can be changed. Choose X, Hz, or cpm as the units.
o Wf Pk-Pk: Band lower and higher frequencies are not applicable for this trended
7. To Calculate Historical Samples, select this option. It uses existing samples from the
associated waveform to calculate the selected trended variable values for the same date
ranges.
8. To select the point(s) where the trended variable is added, select points in the Select Point
(s) pane. This dialog box is filtered based on the selected hierarchy. Points are disabled if
the selected waveform or spectrum is not configured for this location.
Machine Points mapped to the hierarchy selection is available. They are disabled
for all Trended Variable Type selections except Spectral Bands.
For example, if you select a machine train, then all the points that belong to individual
machines (motor, gearbox, pump …) in that train are displayed.
9. When complete, click Add Selected. The trended variables are created and displayed in
the Trended Variables pane.
10. Update added measurements as needed.
a. Measurement: A default is provided but can be changed. For Spectral Band

variables, the name is updated with respect to the Band Lower and Upper Frequency
until you have otherwise changed it. The O/All and Wf pp variable names is
automatically populated depending on which spectrum or waveform sample it is
associated with. At any time, if you overwrite this name, it is not automatically
populated.
229/532
b. Band Lower Frequency: Lower end of the frequency band that is measured.
c. Band Upper Frequency: Upper end of the frequency band that is measured.
d. Associated Wf/Spec: The waveform or spectrum that is being used to calculate the
trended variable. The trended variables created in the software are calculated using
the associated spectrum or waveform that is selected in this option. The list of
spectrums and waveforms are filtered based on the trended variable being
configured.
e. Unit: The associated unit for the variable.
f. Add Setpoints as required.
Devices Hierarchy
To add trended variables in the Devices hierarchy:
1. Select Measurements > Spectrums and Waveforms.

displayed.
230/532
3. Choose Trended Variable Type.

4. Select the Associated Spectrum/Waveform. Choose the spectrum or waveform you want
to associate with this trended variable. This variables displayed in the drop-down vary
depending upon the spectrums or waveforms already configured. It is filtered to only
display applicable spectrums and waveforms based on the trended variable type
selected.
5. Set Properties to configure trended variables. To configure up to ten variables for each
point at one time, click and select the type of variable you want to add.
o Spectral Bands: Set the band lower and higher frequencies for the range in which
you want your measurement calculated. A default name is given based on values
entered. This name can be changed. Choose X, Hz, or cpm as the units.
o Wf Pk-Pk: Band lower and higher frequencies are not applicable for this trended
231/532
6. To calculate the selected trended variable values for the same date ranges, select
Calculate Historical Samples. It uses existing samples from the associated waveform.
7. To select the point(s) where the trended variable is added, select points in the Select Point
(s) pane. The points displayed are filtered based on the selected hierarchy. Points are
disabled if the selected waveform or spectrum is not configured for this location. For
example, if you select a machine train, then all the points that belong to individual
machines (motor, gearbox, pump …) in that train are displayed.
8. Click Add. The trended variables are displayed in the Trended Variables pane.
9. Configure newly added measurements as needed.
Property Description
Measurement For Spectral Band variables, the name is updated with respect to the
Band Lower and Upper Frequency until you change it. The O/All and Wf
pp variable names are automatically populated depending on which
spectrum or waveform sample it is associated with. At any time, if you
overwrite this name, it is not automatically populated.
Band Lower Lower end of the measured frequency band.

Frequency
Band Upper Upper end of the measured frequency band.

Frequency
Unit Associated unit for the variable.
10. Add Setpoints as required.
Trended Variables Types

The following types of trended variables are available in System 1. You must configure the
properties of each type.
232/532
Measurement Name Description
No band upper or lower frequencies can be configured. The

Accl Wf Pk-Pk Associated Wf/Spec needs to be configured. The only options
provided are waveform measurements.
If no bearings are configured, the activity is disabled and is not

selectable. If bearings are configured, the band lower and upper
BPFI frequencies are set based off of the bearing that is selected. The
Associated Wf/Spec needs to be configured. The only options
provided are spectrum measurements.
If no bearings are configured, the activity is disabled and is not

selectable. If bearings are configured, the band lower and upper
BPFO frequencies are set based off of the bearing that is selected. The
Associated Wf/Spec needs to be configured. The only options
provided are spectrum measurements.
No band upper or lower frequencies can be configured. The

Crest Factor Associated Wf/Spec needs to be configured. The only options
provided are waveform measurements.
Choose the spectrum measurement that you want associated

with this trended variable. Ensure that the band lower and upper
Spec O/All Env
frequencies are properly configured for the spectrum that is
associated with this measurement.

with this trended variable. Ensure that the band lower and upper
Spec O/All Vel
frequencies are properly configured for the spectrum that is
associated with this measurement.

with this trended variable. Configure the band lower and upper
Spectral Bands
frequencies for the range that is required for the spectral band you
are trying to setup.
Configure Sideband Energy Ratio and Bearing Bands
System 1 supports the following additional measurements for online devices:
l Sideband Energy Ratio measurements: Use these measurements to assess gear health.
l Bearing Bands measurements: Use these measurements to monitor anti-friction bearing
faults.
Sideband Energy Ratio

What Are Sideband Energy Ratio Measurements
Gear defects within complex gearboxes, such as those found on wind turbines, are difficult to
233/532
detect at an early stage. Gear damage often causes an increase in the energy level of the
sidebands with respect to the fundamental gear mesh frequency.
The Sideband Energy Ratio provides an indication of the ratio of sideband energy to the carrier
frequency that can be used to assess gear health. For Sideband Energy Ratio measurements, we
use a patented algorithm to find gear defects within epicyclic and conventional gearboxes.
To monitor a gearbox, mount one or more transducers outside the gearbox to gather
information on the condition of gears. You can also mount sensors on the gearbox to monitor
multiple stages.
When you add a Sideband Energy Ratio measurement, System 1 adds:
l A band around center Frequency (GMF) for each stage.

l The gear faults as sidebands around the center frequency. The center frequency is the
gear mesh frequency.
Add Sideband Energy Ratio Measurements

To add these measurements manually to a gearbox stage or a gearbox asset level:
1. Open Add Trended Variable dialog box. See Add Trended Variable.
2. Choose SER GMF.
3. Choose Sync or Async Spec/Wf. System 1 computes the measurement using these
selections. We recommend configuring the Spec/Wf Fmax at least four times higher than
the gear mesh frequency.
4. Choose Add. The multiple Sideband Energy Ratio measurements is added to the gearbox
stage or asset level based on:
Number
Stage Sideband Spacing of
Center Frequency
Sidebands
Planetary or Planet-Ring or Ring,

Compound Planet- Sun gear Mesh Planet or 6
Planetary Frequency Sun Gear fault
Parallel, Gear -Pinion Mesh Gear fault or 6

Bevel or Pinion Fault
Worm (each gear in
mesh)

l By default, System 1 adds the following measurements:
o Three harmonics for each gear mesh frequency
o Six sidebands on each side of the gear mesh frequency
234/532
This illustration depicts a band covering center frequency (GMF) and six sidebands on
each side of the center frequency:
l System 1 adds Order Reference-SER measurements at a stage or gearbox asset level.

l When each stage contains multiple shafts, System 1 provides the Order Reference
property. This property indicates which shaft speed is used to convert the configured GMF
in Hz to the orders value.
l For input stages, System 1 uses the input shaft.
l For intermediate stages, System 1 uses the low speed shaft.
l At the output stage, System 1 uses the high-speed shaft for the Hz or order conversion.
l Order Reference property is read-only.
l Each Sideband Energy Ratio measurement is separately trended and alarmed.
l You must configure the gearbox asset model so that correct GMF values are computed. In
absence of GMF values, System 1 adds Sideband Energy Ratio measurements with center
frequency and sideband spacing as 0.0 X.
l After you configure the correct properties, System 1 updates the center frequency and
sideband spacing appropriately.
l If the result of the following formula is greater than the Fmax of the associated Spec/Wf,
System 1 displays an error message:
The Gear Mesh Frequency + (6 x Highest Gear Fault Value)

You must increase Fmax of the associated Spec/Wf or choose a different Spec/Wf from
the configuration grid.
l System 1 computes the value for each Sideband Energy Ratio measurement using a Bently
patented algorithm.
l The Sideband Energy Ratio measurement is a unitless ratio.
Bearing Bands
Bearing Fault Bands in System 1
To monitor anti-friction bearing faults:
l Add bearing fault bands to machines with anti-friction bearings

l Monitor the bands using a device.
235/532
You cannot add any bearing fault bands for a machine with other bearing types. System 1 adds
the following bearing fault bands for each bearing location:
l Cage: This band monitors Fundamental Train Frequency (FTF) or cage frequency. Using
the configured rotating ring, System 1 chooses the correct FTF measurement for this band.
l BSF: This band monitors the Ball Spin Frequency.
l 2BSF: This band monitors the first harmonic of Ball Spin Frequency.
l BPFO: This band monitors the Ball Pass Frequency on the Outer Race fault frequency.
l BPFI: This band monitors the Ball Pass Frequency on the Inner Race fault frequency.
Add Bearing Fault Bands

To add bearing fault bands:
1. Open Add Trended Variable dialog box. See Add Trended Variable.
2. Choose Bearing Fault Bands.
3. Choose Spec/Wf.
4. Select a point.
5. Choose Add.
Bearing Bands Configuration and Considerations

l If you configure multiple options for the bearing location, System 1 calculates bearing
bands for only the first option.
l For single shaft asset, the default bearing band name includes:
o The bearing location
o The bearing fault
For example: OB. BPFI
l For multi- shaft assets such as complex gearboxes, the default naming includes:
o Shaft name
o Bearing location
o Bearing fault
For example: LSS Carrier OB BPFI

l If you map a point to gearbox stage or asset level and add bearing fault bands, System 1
adds bearing fault bands for all the bearings configured on each shaft in the stage or the
asset.
l Similar to Sideband Energy Ratio measurements, System 1 uses the same order reference
and converts the configured bearing fault frequency to the order reference shaft speed.
Example
Where
o HSIS is high speed intermediate stage.
o LSIS is low speed intermediate shaft.
Given the following:
236/532
o BPFI fault on HSIS = 4.95 orders

o HSIS = 400 rpm
o LSIS = 100 rpm
o Order reference for the stage = LSIS
System 1 converts the HSIS BPFI of 4.95 orders to 19.80 orders of LSIS speed.
l When you map a point to a shaft, System 1 uses the shaft's speed to compute the bearing
fault band. You do not have to convert the order values.
l Similar to other spectral band measurements, System 1 computes, stores, and creates
alarms for each bearing fault band.
Configure Wind Turbine Properties
You can create a wind turbine drive train configuration only if you have a GE Renewable System
1 Wind license.
Create a Wind Turbine Configuration

To create the wind turbine configuration using instrumented asset templates:

2. Choose Machines hierarchy.
3. From the Asset Library, drag and drop a wind turbine train onto the Machines hierarchy.
The Wind Turbine Configuration dialog box is displayed. The image of the wind turbine
train is displayed in the Train canvas.
4. In the Wind Turbine Configuration dialog box, select values and an instrumented asset
template for these properties:
o Turbine Type: Select a wind turbine using its power rating. System 1 uses the wind
turbine's power rating to create states and power speed information.
o Upwind Main Bearing
o Downwind Main Bearing
o Gearbox
o Generator
3. To modify the properties of:
o A single main bearing wind turbine, select the main bearing.
o A dual main bearing wind turbine, select the upwind and downwind main bearings.
5. Choose Create. The wind turbine configuration is displayed:
237/532
o Power-speed information
o Device states configuration
o Device channels mapped to asset points
6. Click Save.
3.8 Modify Instrumentation Properties

To edit grid properties:
Bold An editable property
? A non-configured property
- A non-applicable property
After you add instrumentation to assets, you can add Channels, Spectrums and Waveforms,
Trended Variables, and Setpoints.
l Modify Channel Properties

l Manually Pair Channels
l Modify Spectrums And Waveforms
l Modify Trended Variables
l Modify Setpoints
Modify Channel Properties
Manually Pair Channels
238/532
Manually Pair Channels

To pair channels:

3. Select a Device.
5. In the Paired Channel column, select the Paired Channel property you want to pair.
6. Click Add/Modify Pair. The Channel Pair dialog box is displayed.
239/532
7. Select the channel you want to pair and click Pair.
8. The properties grid displays the channel pairs:
Unpair Channel Pairs
To unpair channels:
1. Select the Paired Channel cell you want to unpair.

2. Select the Paired Channel property and choose None.
This action is required only for one of the channels. The other channel is set to None
automatically.
Modify Spectrums and Waveforms
240/532
The fields displayed vary depending on the selected device or asset.
To configure Spectrums and Waveforms:

2. Choose Measurements > Spectrums and Waveforms tab.
3. Modify the properties as needed. For details, see Spectrums and Waveforms Tab.
Modify Trended Variables
Before you can modify Trended Variables, you must configure Channels and Spectrums
& Waveforms.

2. Choose Data Collection > Trended Variables tab.
3. Modify the properties as needed. For details, see Trended Variables Tab.
Modify Setpoints
You can set alarm conditions for each channel measurement severity level.
241/532
If you are using database replication, and want to modify Setpoints on the RX server, see
Database Administration Guide (document 156M4815).
To set alarm conditions:
1. Choose Measurements > Setpoints.

2. Select a measurement whose alarm setpoint you want to modify.
3. Enable the alarm you want to modify.

4. Enter an alarm value for each setting.
Import and Export Setpoints
You can configure multiple setpoints in bulk using file-based configuration. You can only export
condition monitoring alarms.
To bulk configure setpoints:
1. Right-click on an asset or device in the Machine or Devices hierarchy other than the
database node.
2. Choose Configure Alarm Setpoint > Export Setpoints. The Windows Save As dialog box is
displayed.
3. Navigate to the directory where you want to save the exported properties.
4. Enter a file name. Click Save. The exported file contains all of the properties for the selected
asset or device. Remember the name of the file and the location in which you saved the
file.
5. Use a third-party application to open the .CSV file you exported. Modify the setpoint values
as needed and save the file.
242/532
6. In System 1, select the Machine or Devices hierarchy containing the asset or device you
previously exported.
7. Right-click on the same asset or device in the same hierarchy.
8. Choose Configure Alarm Setpoint > Import Setpoints. The Windows Open dialog box is
displayed.
9. Navigate to the location at which the .CSV file is located. Select it and click Open. The
modified setpoints are imported. To view any invalid setpoints, choose View Log.
Quick Configure Alarms
Select Asset or Device

To configure asset or device alarms:
1. Choose Configure > Standard mode.

2. Select the Machine or Devices hierarchy.
3. At the train or device level or below, select the asset or device for which you want to
configure alarms.
4. Choose Measurements > Channels. Choose a method:
o Right-click on an asset or device and choose Alarm Quick Configuration.
o Click the Alarm Quick Configuration button.
5. The Alarm Quick Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Configure Alarm Scope

To edit setpoints based on historical trend data:
243/532
1. In the Alarm Quick Configuration dialog box, select the Scope tab and the General pane.
Configure these fields as needed:

o Measurements Select the trended variables you want to configure.
o Alarm Set Select the alarm setpoints you want to configure. If you select a state-
based alarm set, only data from that state is included.
Any data that is flagged as invalid is excluded from the calculation. This
feature is only supported if the System 1 historian is PostgreSQL.
o Type Select the type of alarm setpoints you want to configure. In Band alarms are
not supported.
o Alarm Levels Select the alarm levels you want to configure.
244/532
2. Use the Data Range pane to set the range of data that is be used to statistically calculate
the new setpoint values:
o Data Range The range of data from which the setpoints are statistically calculated.
The default is Custom Data Range.
o Start Time. The start date and time for the data range.
o End Time The end data and time for the data range.
3. Click Next. The Settings tab is displayed.
Configure Alarm Settings

To configure the calculation parameters for each alarm level and alarm type:
1. In the Alarm Quick Configuration dialog box, select the Settings tab.
2. The Settings tab displays how the alarms are calculated. The Under and Over alarm levels
you selected in the Scope tab are displayed in the Parameters pane.
3. Modify these parameters:
245/532
o Percent of Mean(%) Enter an integer percentage of the calculated mean value of

the selected Data Range. For example, if the calculated mean value is 20, if you enter
a % of Mean value of 50, the calculated value of 10 is inserted into the displayed
equation.
o Multiplier of Standard Deviation (x) Enter an integer multiplier of the calculated
standard deviation of the selected Data Range.
4. Click Next. The Preview tab is displayed.
Preview Alarm Settings

The Preview tab displays your Calculated Setpoints. When satisfied with the calculations, click
Apply.
Properties
246/532
Field Description
The path of the measurement, starting from the child of the selected hierarchy
Path
entry.
Measurement The name of the measurement to which the setpoint is associated.
Unit The associated unit for the measurement entry.
The number of samples within the selected Data Range from which the new
Number of levels were calculated.
Samples This can be zero if the desired Data Range contained no samples. You are able
to manually enter setpoint values for each alarm level present in the grid.
The calculated mean of the samples within the selected Data Range from
Mean
which the new levels were calculated.
Standard The calculated standard deviation of the samples within the selected Data
Deviation Range from which the new levels were calculated.
The new recommended value for each selected alarm level. You can enter a
Alarm Levels
different value if necessary.
The percentage of the samples included in the Data Range that would have
% in Alarm
triggered an alarm based on the new recommended setpoint values.
3.9 Manage User Templates
If you create a machine train diagram that represents a common set of assets in your plant, you
can save the diagram as a User Template. You can reuse User Templates in multiple machine
train diagrams—with some limitations.
When you use a User Template to create a new instance of a machine train, all of the fields in the
new instance are linked to the template. Any change you make to the template is applied to all
instances of the template unless you first Unlink the Template Instance.
Create a User Template

To create a user template:
1. Select the Configure workspace.

2. To create a template:
In Standard Mode
a. Select Standard Mode.
247/532
b. Select the Machine hierarchy.

c. Right-click on any asset in the hierarchy and choose Create Template. The Create
Template dialog box is displayed.
In Template Mode
a. Select Template Mode.
b. Right-click on a template group in the User Templates library and choose Create
Template. The Create Template dialog box is displayed.
248/532
3. Enter a template Name.
4. In the Template Group field:

o Select an existing group name, or
o In the Template Group field, choose Add New.
a. Enter a new group name.
b. Choose Create. The new template is displayed it in the User Templates
hierarchy and in the Asset Library pane.
3. Add assets or trains from the Asset Library to the User Templates hierarchy. For details,
see Create Machine Train Diagram.
4. Edit the properties you want to include in the template. For details, see Modify Machine or
Device Properties .
Create Instrumented Custom Templates

You can create instrumented templates only if you have a GE Renewable System 1 Wind
license.
To create an instrumented custom template:
249/532
1. In the Configure workspace, choose Machines hierarchy.

2. Right-click on an instrumented asset and choose Create Template. The Create Template
3. In the Template Type drop-down list, choose Instrumented Machine.
4. Enter a Name for the template.

5. In the Template Group drop-down list box, choose Add New, or select an existing template
group:
o Choose Add New from the Template Group drop-down list.
o Enter a New Group Name.
6. Choose Create. The new instrumented template is displayed it in the User Templates
hierarchy and in the Asset Library pane.
7. Add a current asset or train from the Asset Library to the hierarchy. For details, see Create
Machine Train Diagram.
8. Edit the properties you want to include in the template. For details, see Modify Machine or
Device Properties .
Manage the User Template Library

The User Template library includes all user template and groups.
250/532
To edit and delete templates:
1. Right-click a template in the User Template library.

2. Choose Edit Template or Delete Template.
Edit a Template Instance
Edit Custom Templates
To edit a custom template instance:
1. In the Configure workspace, select the Machines hierarchy.

2. Choose an option.
Use Template Mode
a. In the Configure workspace, select the Machines hierarchy.
b. Choose Template Mode. User Templates are displayed on the right side.
Use Standard Mode

a. In the Configure workspace, select the Machines hierarchy.
b. Choose Standard Mode. The Machine and Asset hierarchies are displayed on the
left side. The Machines hierarchy includes assets defined using a template, if in use.
c. Select an asset in the hierarchy that was created from a template.
3. Either right-click on the asset and choose Edit Template or click Edit .
251/532
Template Mode is displayed. The asset template is selected in the User Template
hierarchy:
4. The template asset properties are displayed.
When you modify a custom template, the changes are propagated to all assets in
the asset hierarchy that use the custom template. The change is displayed using a
light gray background.
5. If you modify the instance, you cannot link the unlinked cell to the template again.
252/532
6. To modify the template, see Modify Machine or Device Properties .
Export and Import Templates
Use Template Mode to edit custom asset templates. Templates can contain one or more:
l Machine configurations
l Machine and measurement properties
l Plot sets
If a plot set was created in a prior version of System 1, and you upgraded the database,
you must first save the plot set before exporting the template. Right-click on the plot and
choose Save Existing Plot Set. The Defined Plot Set dialog box is displayed. Click Save.
Then export the templates.
Export Templates
To export templates:
1. Select either the Display or Configure workspace.

2. Choose Tools > Custom Components. The Custom Component Manager dialog box is
displayed.
3. In the Templates tab, all existing templates are displayed.
4. Select the check box of the templates you want to export.
5. Click the Export button. The Windows Save As dialog box is displayed.
6. Navigate to the location where you want to save the template file. Click Save. The template
file (*.S1t) is saved.
7. You can import these template files into other System 1 databases. Copy the .S1t File to the
System 1 Server where you want to import the templates.
Import Templates
If you import a template that uses the name of an existing template, the existing template
is overwritten. All changes are propagated to all linked instances. For example, if you
modify a plot set after importing the template, and you then re-import the template, the
changes you made to the plot set are overwritten.
To import templates:
1. On the System 1 Server where you want to import the templates, select the Configure
workspace.
253/532
displayed.
3. In the Templates tab, all existing templates are displayed.
4. Click the Import button. The Windows Open dialog box is displayed.
5. Navigate to the location where the template (*.S1t) file is located. Click Open.
6. If you attempt to import a template file created in an earlier version of System 1, you are
prompted to upgrade the template. Click OK.
a. The Database Manager is displayed.
b. Choose Upgrade > Templates. The Template pane is displayed.
c. Click Browse. The Windows Open dialog box is displayed.
d. Navigate to the directory where the template file is located. Click Open.
e. Database Manager displays the old and new versions of the template. Click
Upgrade. The upgrade process is displayed.
f. When complete, in System 1, re-open Custom Component Manager and restart the
import process.
7. The Import Template dialog box displays the imported templates.
8. Choose Import. The Custom Component Manager dialog box displays the imported
templates.
9. Click OK. All linked instances of the templates are updated. Depending on the active
workspace and mode, the templates are displayed in different ways:
o Configure workspace, Template mode. The imported templates are displayed in the
list of User Templates.
o Configure workspace, Standard Mode. The templates are displayed in the Asset
Library.
o Display workspace.
n If you select a device asset linked to the imported template, any plot sets
included with the template are displayed.
n If you use the imported template to create a new machine, the imported plots
sets are displayed.
10. When you import a template, any associated plot sets are set as Available. You must
manually select the plot set.
Unlink a Template Instance
When you create an instance of a machine or train from a template, all of the fields in the new
instance are linked to the template. Unless you manually modify a value of an instance of a
template, changes made to the template are applied to all instances of the template.
254/532
To break the connection between the instance and the template, unlink an instance of a
template. This prevents changes made to the template from affecting the instance. When you
unlink a template instances, System 1 retains all current instance values.
After you unlink an instance of a template, you cannot link the instance to the template
again.
Unlink Template Instance

To unlink an instance of a template:
1. Navigate to the Assets hierarchy of the Configure workspace's Standard Mode.

2. Right-click the asset or train you wish to unlink from a template.
3. From the displayed menu, click Unlink From Template.
4. From the Confirm Unlink dialog box, click Unlink button to unlink from the template.
Delete a Template
To delete a template:
1. Select the Configure Workspace and Template Mode.

2. In the User Templates hierarchy, or in the General Tab, right-click on a template,
3. Choose Delete. The Template Delete dialog box is displayed.
4. To delete:
o Only this instance of the user template, but retain copies of the template, click
Retain.
o All instances of the template, click Delete.
5. Confirm that you want to delete the selected template(s). The template(s) are deleted.
3.10 Map Points
To set up custom state trigger logic, map Available Machine Points to Available Device Points.
255/532
Map Assets to Device Points

To map assets to device points:

2. In the Machines hierarchy on the left, select a train, asset, shaft, or bearing. The asset's
points are displayed in the Available Machine Points pane.
3. In the Available Machine Points pane, select a point to map.
4. In the Devices hierarchy on the right, select a device, card, upper/lower slot, or channel.
The device's points are displayed in the Available Device Points pane.
5. If the Type of the machine selected in the Available Machine Points pane is compatible
with any entry in the Available Device Points pane, the mapping button is displayed in
blue:
Compatible Points Incompatible Points
6. Select the point(s) in the left pane you want to map, and the compatible device points in
the right pane. Click Map.

7. The mapped instrument point is displayed in the Assets hierarchy:
Pair Channels
Traditionally paired asset points, such as horizontal and vertical, are only considered as paired
when these mapping criteria are met:
l Each asset point must be mapped to two points from the same device.
l Both points must be configured for the same unit and subunit.
l The Transducer Orientation and Transducer Orientation Angle of both points must be
orthogonal to each other.
You can configure these parameters in the Measurements tab.
256/532
Points that do not meet these criteria can still be mapped; however, plot types that require
paired measurements are not supported for the mapped points.
Map Device Channel to Multiple Assetpoints

You can map a device channel to multiple, compatible asset points. For instance, you can
monitor multiple stages of a gearbox mapped to a casing vibration channel.
Multi-mapping is available for these location types and scope:
Location Type Scope
Casing vibration such as acceleration and velocity Within machine case (asset)
Process measurements such as temperature, pressure and Across machines and machine
flow train
Speed measurements Across machines
For multi-shaft assets such as gearboxes, when a device channel is mapped to multiple
locations or stages, System 1 calculates the measurements for the mapped locations using a
default reference shaft speed called Orders X reference.
Order reference shaft property becomes available only when you map a channel to an asset
point. This property is not available for custom points.
To change the default order reference shaft:

2. Select Measurements > Points.
3. Select an order reference shaft from the drop-down list box of Orders X Reference
column.
System 1 uses the Orders X reference to re-calculate the properties for all the measurements
and adds them to the channel using the speed for the selected reference shaft.
Device-Specific Notes
3500 Devices
To fully configure states, use the Management Keyphasor point. Mapping tachometer points
from the 3500/50 does not enable the full capabilities of state configuration.
When you map the points of the following monitors to locations on a recip asset, System 1 links
the common properties of the monitor to those of the asset:
l 3500/70M Recip Impulse/Velocity Monitor

l 3500/72M Recip Rod Position Monitor
l 3500/77M Recip Cylinder Pressure Monitor
2300 Devices
257/532
You cannot map 2300 device analog and relay points to asset points.
Filter Asset Points

You can filter Available Machine Points using these options:
l Basic: The default.

l Show Advanced Asset Points
l Performance: This filter displays mappable Bently Performance points available for an
asset. You can also select a group to filter the points in an Asset hierarchy.
To filter points, click and select an option.
Filter Columns
You can filter each column for all current entries:
For more information, see Mappable Bearing Points.
Unmap a Point
To unmap an asset point, right-click the point and click Unmap.
Create a Custom Mapping Point
258/532
To customize your instrument to asset mapping:

2. In the Machines hierarchy, select a train or asset.
3. Click .
The Add Custom Points dialog box is displayed.
259/532
4. Select the specific locations you want to use as points, or choose All.
5. Click Add Selected.
System 1 adds the points to the selected locations. The Type and Unit Group properties are
Custom.
All instrument point types can be mapped to any custom asset point.
3.11 Create Diagnostic Reports

You can produce diagnostic reports are available in System 1. The reports are created in
Microsoft Word and Excel format, allowing you to save, customize, and edit the results. The
reports are saved by default in:
My Documents\Bently Nevada\System 1\Reports
Route Report
260/532
For routes:
1. Select the Configure Workspace and Route Mode.

2. In the Routes hierarchy, select a database, route folder, or a route.
3. Click the route report button .
For more information, see Create Route Reports.
Machine and Device Percent Change Report

For machines and devices:
1. Select the Display workspace.

2. Select Status > Overview.
3. Click Quick Reports and select a Percentage Change Report.
For more information, see Create Percent Change Report.
Plot Diagnostic Report

For plots:

2. Select Plots.
3. Open a plot.
4. At the bottom of the plot toolbar, click Generate Diagnostic Report.
For details, see Plot Diagnostic Report.
Troubleshoot Reports
261/532
Report Header Absent

If the report is emailed and previewed in Outlook, the header is absent.
Incorrect Page Numbers

If page numbering is not correct, it can be updated by clicking in the footer area.
Missing Report
If your report doesn’t display after clicking the QuickReports icon, check that Microsoft Word and
Excel are installed on your computer. If they are installed, check the icon tray to open the report.
If these applications are not installed or you can’t find the report, the report is saved in My
Documents\Bently Nevada\System 1\Reports.
Create Route Reports
To create a route report, first choose the type of route report you want to create.
Create a Point Details Route Report

To create a Point Details Route Report:
1. Select the Configure workspace and Route Mode. The Routes pane and the Route
Management tab are displayed.
262/532
2. In the Routes hierarchy pane, select a route in a route folder.
3. To schedule when route reports are collected, select the Route Management > General tab.
Configure the schedule as needed. The route schedule is cascaded to all of parts of the
hierarchy
4. Click Route Report - Point Details . The Windows File Manager is displayed.
5. Navigate to the location where you want to save the report. Click Save.
6. The Route Report - Point Details report displays Route Status and Missed Points.
The report also shows you the date when the data was last collected for the route and
when it is next due. When the route is created, the default next collection date is set as
today's date.
263/532
Tolerance is used to allow data to be collected and uploaded before or after the
next collection date and to avoid affecting route status.
Route Status Point Details Report Fields
Report Field Description
Folder Name of the Folder containing the route selected in the Route hierarchy pane.
Route Name Name of the selected Route.
Interval How often the data is collected, in days.
Assets Number of assets on the route.
Status Overdue The route is past due and has exceeded the number of
days tolerance defined for the route.
Due The route is due to be read, but has not exceeded the
tolerance for that route.
Scheduled The route has been read as scheduled and no action is

required until the next scheduled collection date.
Last Collection Date data was last collected.
Next Due Next collection date.

Route Status Point Details Status
Status If the report is generated...
Scheduled before Next Collection Date (As Is today, no change), the status of all
routes is Scheduled.
Due anytime between the Next Collection Date and the Next Collection Date
+ Tolerance, the status of all the routes is Due.
Overdue after the Next Collection Date + Tolerance, the status of all the routes is
Overdue.
Missed Points
264/532
Use this report to identify which points are missing data and to verify that the condition
monitoring program is displaying data as expected. The report contains a section for each route
that had any missed points.
Report
Description
Field
Asset Name of the asset.
Missed Name of the point that was missed. A point is considered missed if no data was
Points collected and reported within the interval specified in the Route Management
> General tab.
Last Date data was last collected.

Collection
Days since
last Number of days since the last data was collected.
collection
Remarks Custom comments describing the missed point, such as blocked from collecting,
bad sensor, or under repair.
Missed Points Example
If you collected and uploaded data for all the points under all the machines on the Missed Points
report displayed above, and Tolerance was 0, when you generate the Missed Point report
anytime until next due date, no points are reported to be missed for this route. The Next Due date
is 29 May 2019. If you do not collect and upload data for all the machines and points under that
265/532
route on this date, then you generate the Missed Point route report on 12 Feb 2013, then all the
points are missed.
Create a Machine Summary Route Report

To create a Machine Summary route report:
1. In the Routes hierarchy, select a database or a route folder.
2. Click Route Report - Machine Summary . The Windows File Manager is displayed.
3. Navigate to the location where you want to save the report. Click Save.
4. The report displays the status of all machines contained in the selected database or route
folder.
266/532
267/532
Report Field Description
Machine Name Name of the Machine selected in the Route hierarchy pane.
Tag Name Name of the point that was missed. A point is "missed" if no
data was collected and reported within the interval specified
in the Route Management > General tab.
Collection Status Overdue The route is past due and has exceeded
the number of days tolerance defined for
the route.
Due The route is due to be read, but has not

exceeded the tolerance for that route.
Scheduled The route has been read as scheduled and

no action is required until the next
scheduled collection date.
Last Collection Date data was last collected.
Next Due Next collection date.
Alarm Status Current alarm status, if any.
Route Report Machine Summary Status

Days Since Last
Status Description
Collection
Scheduled Less than or equal to Data has been recorded on this machine. It is
(Interval - Tolerance) not yet due to be collected again.
Due Between Interval and This machine is due to be recorded.

(Interval + Tolerance)
Overdue Greater than or equal to This machine is overdue to be recorded.

(Interval + Tolerance)
Blank - No data has been -

recorded
Create Percent Change Report
268/532
The Percent Change Report compares the most recent samples with the previous samples. It
displays amplitudes of recent and previous samples, as well as a percent change between the
two most recent samples. The report can help drive work flows by indicating significant changes.
Create a Percent Change Report

To create a Percent Change Report:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Full or Split mode.

2. Select the List tab.
3. Select any Machine or Devices node, asset, or measurement.
4. Click Generate Percent Change Report .
5. The Percent Change dialog box is displayed:
6. Click Create. The Percentage Change Report is created.
7.
269/532
Option Description
Enter a positive numerical threshold value, between 0.1 and 999.99, for
Percent Change + or - percent change. If the absolute value of the percent change is
greater than this threshold, then it is included in the report.
When enabled, enter a threshold for spectral band variables that you
want to include. This option modifies threshold values for spectral
Lower Threshold band variables. It uses the threshold value multiplied by the
percentage value you enter to set lower thresholds for the spectral
band variables. Valid values are from 0.1 and 99.99.
When checked, the variable is included only if the recent absolute

Absolute Values value is greater than the threshold value you enter. Valid values are
from 0.1 and 999.99.
The units displayed in the percent change report are set in Tools > Preferences > Units.
These report selections are maintained until the application closes, or you change the selection.
Report Headers
Database The name of the database under which the event is generated.
The name of the highest group below the database level that the asset
Group Name is under; if no groups are created under a database, then Database
name is displayed.
Asset The asset name under which the event is generated.
Point The point name under which the event is generated.
Measurement The variable or measurement under which the event is generated.
Units The unit for the measurement.
% Change (Previous) The % change from the previous value as positive or negative change.
Latest Sample
The date of the most recent sample for that variable.
Date/Time
Latest Sample The recent value and a colored line indicating severity.
The last four previous values for the measurement, where Prev 4 is the
Previous Values
oldest and Prev 1 is the newest.
3.12 Configure Data Collection States and Points
Configure Software or Device State Events
270/532
To add a new state event:

2. In the Machine hierarchy, select an asset.
3. Select Data Collection > States. The States tab is displayed. The fields and buttons
displayed depend on the asset or device you selected.
4. If you do not want a specific State Type to trigger, clear the Enable State checkbox.
5. To disable data collection, clear the Enable Storage checkbox.
If the selected node is a Commtest VbOnline or Ranger Pro device, data is still
collected even if you clear Enable Storage.
Depending on whether you selected a device or an asset, in the States pane, you can:
l Configure current states. See Configure Current States.

l Add a custom machine state. See Configure Current States.
l Add a new device state. See Add Device State .
l Configure Triggers. See Configure State Triggers.
l Customize Storage Rates. See Configure Transient Storage Rate.
271/532
l Configure alarming. See Add Device State .

l Configure Points. See Configure State Points.
Configure Current States

In the Machines hierarchy, you can add new and configure current states.
To configure current states:
1. In the Configure workspace Standard Mode, choose Data Collection > States. The States
tab is displayed.
2. Click State Quick Configuration . The State Configuration dialog box is displayed.
State Quick Configuration is not available in the Device hierarchy.
3. Configure Properties. Modify Machine or Device Properties .

4. Configure Triggers. Configure State Triggers.
5. Customize Storage Rates. Configure Transient Storage Rate.
Add Custom Machine State

To add a custom machine state:
1. In the Configure workspace Standard Mode, choose Data Collection > States. The States
tab is displayed.
3. Click Add State . The Add State dialog box is displayed. Select an Operating State and
rename it:
272/532
4. Click Add. The State Configuration dialog box is displayed. The asset selected in the
Machines hierarchy is displayed in the dialog box header.
5. Click OK. The Data Collection States tab is displayed.

6. Define a trigger for the new custom machine state. Configure State Triggers.
7. Customize data collection rates. Configure Transient Storage Rate.
Add Device State

In the Devices hierarchy, you can add new and configure current device states.
To configure a device state:
273/532

2. Choose Data Collection > States. The States tab is displayed.
4. Click Add State . The Add Device State dialog box is displayed.
5. In the State Group field, select an existing state or choose Add New. A maximum of six
state groups are supported.
6. To add a new state group, enter the State Group Name and Device State Name. ]
7. Click Add. The State Configuration dialog box is displayed. The device selected in the
Machines hierarchy is displayed in the top of the dialog box.
274/532
8. Configure the new state. System 1 supports 12 states for devices. When you complete the
configuration, the new state is displayed in the States tab.
9. Configure Triggers. Configure State Triggers.

10. Customize Storage Rates. Configure Transient Storage Rate.
Configure Devices State Alarms

You can configure alarm delay or suppress alarms on state transition.
To configure state alarms:
1. Select what you want to monitor:

o In the Devices hierarchy, select an offline device.
o In the Machines hierarchy, select an asset in the hierarchy.
2. In the Configure workspace, choose Standard Mode, choose Data Collection > States. The
States tab is displayed.
3. In the Alarming pane, configure the required alarm values.
Configure State Points

After you associate Machine Points or channels with Asset Points in Create a Custom Mapping
Point , you can configure which points are included in the states. The Points tab displays all
points in the collection group and their mapped device channels for the selected train or asset
275/532
not associated with a train.
OPC points that are configured under an OPC server that is configured to collect data on
a replicated network cannot be used in the state trigger definition.
To configure which points are included in the states:
1. Select a hierarchy:
o Select an asset in the Machines hierarchy. Available collections are displayed in the
Points pane.
o Select a device in the Devices hierarchy. Available points are displayed in the Points
pane.
3. Choose Data Collection > States. The States tab is displayed.
4. In the Devices hierarchy, you can edit the device property to modify the Collection Group
for a given point as needed.
5. In the Machines hierarchy, enable or disable the Include in Collection check box as
needed.
Configure State Triggers

Use state triggers to define when a machine state initiates data collection. You must first map
points to the asset from a device.
Triggers don't apply to a state if it is disabled. To enable a state trigger, choose Machine
hierarchy > Data Collection > States, and choose Enabled State.
276/532
To configure State Triggers:
1. Select a hierarchy:
o Select an asset in the Machines hierarchy. Available collections are displayed in the
Points pane.
o Select a device in the Devices hierarchy. Available points are displayed in the Points
pane.
3. Select an asset in the hierarchy. In the Data Collection > States tab, click
Customize Trigger Logic

You can customize the trigger logic for each state based on the configuration of your
monitoring system and assets.
When adding new device state rules for vbOnline Pro, you can configure a maximum of six
triggers per device state. Only device measurements — not software measurements — can be
used as triggers for device states.
277/532
Action Description
Add A New Rule Choose Click here to add a rule.
Delete a Rule Right-click the rule and choose Delete.
Select And/Or Click the rule and choose AND or OR.
Modify a Point Click the rule and select a Point or a State Channel .
Choose a Field Click the Field and select a value.
Choose an
Click the Operator and select an operand
Operator
Click the field and enter a new value. You can only modify Value 2 if the
Modify Values
Operator value is Between.
Default Value Calculations

For the four default states, default values are calculated as follows:
l Calculations use the Rated rpm, Speed Control, Upper Speed Limit, and Lower Speed
Limit rotor properties. To modify these, Modify Machine or Device Properties .
l Upper Speed Limit and Lower Speed Limit are required if the Speed Control is configured
as Variable.
Default Trigger Software States

For software states, there are four default states you can configure:
Default
Description
States
The machine is either powering up or powering down, typically defined with logic
Start up/ that monitors a changing speed between two distinct values.
Shutdown
Use this state to monitor Overspeed.
The machine is in constant operation, typically defined with logic that monitors a
Running
fairly constant speed.
The turning gear is engaged and slowly rotating the asset, typically defined with
Slow Roll
logic that monitors a low RPM speed range
Machine The machine is shut down, typically defined with logic that monitors a nonexistent
Off speed.
When configuring vbOnline Pro devices, states can not be displayed by default. To add vbOnline
Pro device states, see Add Device States.
Configure Transient Storage Rate
278/532
Storage rates are not applied to a state if it is disabled. To enable a storage rate, choose
Machine hierarchy > Data Collection > States, and choose Enable Storage.
To configure storage rates for start up and shutdown:
1. In the Configure workspace, choose Data Collection > States.

2. In the Storage Rate field, click Edit. The Transient Storage Rate dialog box is displayed.
3. Modify these properties as needed.
279/532
Property Default Description
Enables transient data

Collect Transient Data Checked
collection.
Enabling Decreasing RPM

Checked Enables the collection field.
Change
Decreasing RPM Change 10 rpm Modify the RPM change value.
Enable Increasing RPM Change Checked Enables this collection field.
Increasing RPM Change 10 rpm Modify the RPM change value.
Enable Delta Time Checked Enables this collection field.
Delta Time 10 seconds Modify the change in time.
Modify the collection stop time.

Transient Data Collection Stop 1 hour Choose seconds (s), minutes
(min), or hours (hr) for units.
Storage Rates Software States
You cannot configure storage rates for vbOnlinePro devices.
Every state is available for configuration.
Property Default Value Description
High-Res Trend 1 seconds Modify how often you want to collect high-
Storage Rate resolution trend data. Choose seconds (s),
minutes (min), or hours (hr) for units.
High-Res Waveform 10 minutes Modify how often you want to collect high-
Storage Rate resolution waveform data. Choose minutes (min)
or hours (hr) for units.
Modify Properties (software states only)

The Properties tab is only displayed when you click State Quick Configuration . To begin
configuring both software states and vbOnline Pro device states, modify the Properties speed
values. If the necessary properties have not been configured in the General tab, you can
configure them directly in this State Configuration tab.
To automatically calculate trigger definitions, click Next. The Triggers panel is displayed.
Delete Software Event States

You cannot delete a vbOnline Pro device state.
280/532
To delete a software state:

2. Select Data Collection > States. The States tabl is displayed.
3. Right-click on the name of the state in the Property header and click Delete. The state is
deleted.
3.13 Add Alarm Summary
Create an Alarm Summary

Use Alarm Summary to monitor the count of unacknowledged alarms along with alarm level
status. You can add multiple Alarm Summary Channels in the Machine hierarchy on a
database, group or train. All of them use the same Alarm Summary Group properties set in the
Device hierarchy, including calculation rate, suppression, and so forth. You can export the alarm
variable count of unacknowledged alarm suppressed counts and status for each level using
OPC.
Alarm summary is only available when you use a PostgreSQL database.
To add an alarm summary:

2. In the Machine hierarchy, right-click on a database , group , or train .
281/532
3. Choose Add Alarm Summary.

o In the Machine hierarchy:
n An Alarm Summary channel is added as a child node in the hierarchy. It
displays 13 alarm summary measurements. Level 3 and 4 alarm counts,
suppression level 3 and 4 counts, and have new level 3 and 4 status, are
enabled by default. You can enable Levels 1 and 2 if needed.
n The alarm summary measurements are displayed in the Trended Variables
tab.
n No Spectrums and Waveforms measurements are available. The

measurements are:
n Unacknowledged Level X Count (Level 1-4). Displays a count of
unacknowledged alarms, excluding any alarms counted during the
suppression interval, for the selected hierarchy or below.
n Excluded Level X Count (Level 1-4). Displays a count of new
unacknowledged alarms, excluded from the Unacknowledged Level X
Count within the suppression interval, for the selected hierarchy or
below.
n Have New Level X Alarms (Level 1-4). The value is True if there are any
unacknowledged alarms for the current alarm level on the selected
node or below in the hierarchy.
n Have New Alarms. Overall "Status of Alarms". The value is True if there
are any unacknowledged alarms for alarm Levels 1-4 on the selected
node or below in the hierarchy.
n Exclusion of unacknowledged alarm counts. When you acknowledge an
alarm, the suppression interval begins for the measurement and the alarm
level. During the time suppression interval, any new unacknowledged alarms
for the same measurement and same alarm level are not counted in the
282/532
Unacknowledged Level X Count. They are counted in the Excluded Level

X Counts for that measurement and alarm level.
n You can set alarms on the count and status measurements. To set an alarm
for a status measurement, set the alarm point to 1.
o In the Devices hierarchy:
n An Alarm Summary Group is displayed.
n The properties are common to all Alarm Summary channels in the Machine
hierarchy. You can modify:
n Calculation Rate. The default is 30 seconds. Data is calculated and
stored for the alarm summary measurements based on the rate set
here.
n Re-flashing Delay. When the value is not 0, and a new unacknowledged
alarm is detected in addition to an existing unacknowledged alarm,
System 1 flashes the output to false momentarily and back to true after
the re-flashing delay period. This prevents masking the new,
unacknowledged alarm. The default value of 0 prevents re-flashing.
n Level X Exclusion. The time interval during which any new
unacknowledged alarms for that level are not counted in the
unacknowledged alarms. If you set the suppression Level X value as 0,
unacknowledged alarms are not suppressed. Excluded Level X Count is
incremented by the same amount.
283/532
n Level 4: 15 minutes

n Level 3: 300 minutes
n Levels 1 and 2: 0 by default; configurable by user
n You can view the Alarm Summary trended measurements in Status > List, Bar
Graph, and in Plots.
Export Alarm Summary

To export alarm summary measurements using one or more methods:
l As data, see Use OPC DA Client to Access Data or Configure OPC UA Server for Export.
l As a .CSV file, see Export Data as OPC Items.
Delete an Alarm Summary
To delete an Alarm Summary, in the Machine hierarchy, right-click on the Alarm Summary and
choose Delete.
284/532
3.14 Cascade Speed Across Trains

You can use external data or manually enter ratios to configure machine trains and cascade
speed across trains.
Use External Data to Configure Speed

l Using vbOnline Pro. Use vbOnline Pro to cascade speed at the device level for every
channel and use the cascaded speed to compute synchronous measurements. See
Configure vbOnline Pro Devices .
l Using OPC Server. Use an OPC Server to cascade an external speed and shaft ratios. See
Configure OPC DCOM Settings.
After you map the points, System 1 uses the speed mapping location and the shaft ratios for all
assets in the machine train to calculate the speed for each shaft using the cascading speed
source.
The application also tags the asynchronous waveform or spectrum of the points mapped to the
machine train. The speed and asynchronous waveform or spectrum data storage may occur at
different rates. Additionally, due to network latency, the time stamp of the waveform and that of
the incoming speed may be out of sync. The nearest speed sample for asynchronous waveform
or spectrum is used.
Enter Ratios to Configure Speed

To configure a machine train to cascade speed across trains:
1. Verify that all machine trains have been fully configured, including defining any speed
propagation ratios.
2. Enter ratios for each asset in the train or enter speeds and have System 1 calculate the
ratios.
Associate Speed to Device Points

To associate all points with their appropriate speed channel for all devices associated with asset
points:

3. Select a device.
4. Select Measurements > Points.
5. For each channel entry, select the Associated Speed field and select a speed channel
285/532
associated with the measurement channel:
Ensure speed sensors are connected to the appropriate speed points. The vbOnline Pro
accelerometer points must be assigned to the appropriate vbOnline Pro speed points.
Cascading speed works only for vbOnline Pro devices that are measuring speed using
tachometers or keyphasors.
To cascade speed with other devices:
1. Add Instrumentation to Assets using Quick Configure Measurements .

2. Set the configured speed to the speed measure.
Map All Online Device Points to Asset Points

After configuring your machine train assets, map all Machine Points to their associated asset
point.
l Ensure the assigned speed points are mapped to their appropriate asset point locations.
l System 1 calculates the speed across the train using the configured speed ratios.
l For Roll Section, if the ratios are not configured, but if you have manually entered the rated
RPM of the shafts, the speed across the roll section is calculated. The speed value is
displayed in the plot header.
l For all other assets, if the ratios are not configured, System 1 cannot cascade the speed
across the train. The speed value in the plot header is displayed as N/A.
3.15 Configuration Examples

Use these examples of how to complex configure assets to help you configure your own devices.
Example: Create and Build a Database

Step 1: Create a Database
1. Launch System 1 application.
286/532
2. Choose File from the main menu.

3. Choose New. For details, see Connect to a Database.
Step 2: Identify Collection Method

There are three ways to collect information into your database, and knowing which strategy you
want to used is vital to building your database.
l You can collect data with a portable device

l Connect System 1 to online devices.
l Add data manually.
Whichever method you choose, verify that you are licensed with the appropriate package:
License Packages
l Portable data collection requires the Fundamental License Package,

l Online data collection requires the Advanced or Premium License Packages, or
l Performing both collection methods requires both the Fundamental License Package and
either the Advanced or Premium License Package: this is known as an Advanced Plus or
Premium Plus License Package.
For more information on licensing, see License Manager.
Step 3: Add Assets to the Database

System 1 provides tools that enable you to build virtual representations of your assets and
organize your data.
Before you add assets, select the Configure workspace.
There are three primary steps to building your database:
1. Add Groups and Assets.
Groups are not required. Use them to organize your assets.
2. Set Asset Properties.

3. Instrument Assets.
4. Optionally, Add Additional Points Measurements to Assets.
Step 4: Connect to Online Devices

3. Connect to online devices. For details, see Add Devices.
Example: Gather and Import Portable Data

Step 1: Add Route Folders
287/532
When your database is first created, the default Route Folder is created. You can select it and
then rename it. Route folders always exist under the database level. You cannot create route
folders within other folders. Begin by adding routes or creating more route folders.
1. Select the database node in the Routes hierarchy.

2. To add a route folder to the database, choose a method:
o Click Add Folder
o Right-click on the database node and choose Add Route Folder.

3. To edit the folder name, choose a method:
o Select the folder, select the General tab, and select the Name field. Type a name.
o Right-click the folder in the Routes hierarchy and choose Rename.

4. Repeat this process to create additional route folders.
Step 2: Add Routes to Folders

1. Select a route folder.
2. There are two ways to add routes to a route folder:
o Click icon to add routes to your folder, or
o Right-click the folder node and choose Add Route.

3. To change the name of the route, select the route, click in the Name property, and enter a
description in place of the default.
288/532
You can also right-click the route in the Routes hierarchy to find a Rename option in the
menu.
4. Repeat this process to add additional routes to your folders.
Step 3: Gather Data Using a Portable Device

Use the portable device to collect data and measurements using the routes you created.
Step 4: Add Assets to Routes

You can add assets to routes individually or as an asset group. However, you cannot add assets
by dragging the entire database over. When you add an asset, all the points and measurements
get included.
1. Select an asset or asset group from the Assets hierarchy on the right side of the
workspace.
2. Click and drag your selection to the route you are configuring in the Routes hierarchy.
The asset you drag displays a green check mark when it is okay to drop.
3. Drop the asset or asset group into the route.

4. When you are finished building your routes, click File on the top menu bar and then Save
to store your configured route.
You can add all assets from a group by drag-and-drop; however, the group folder does not exist
in the route hierarchy - just the assets are added. Reordering the assets in the Machines
hierarchy does not affect their order in the Routes hierarchy. Reordering assets within routes can
be done independent of the Machines hierarchy order.
Build Routes
289/532
After you add, configure, and instrument assets, you need to build and manage routes for
portable data collection. Drag and drop your completed assets into route folders. Organize them
in the correct order to optimize collection for your walk around data collection.
Configure and instrument all assets before building routes. See Add Instrumentation to
Assets .
Step 1: Add Route Folders

When your database is first created, the default Route Folder is created. You can select it and
then rename it. Route folders always exist under the database level. You cannot create route
folders within other folders. Begin by adding routes or creating more route folders.
1. Select the database node in the Routes hierarchy.

2. To add a route folder to the database, choose a method:
o Click Add Folder
o Right-click on the database node and choose Add Route Folder.
290/532
3. To edit the folder name, choose a method:

o Select the folder, select the General tab, and select the Name field. Type a name.
o Right-click the folder in the Routes hierarchy and choose Rename.

4. Repeat this process to create additional route folders.
Step 2: Add Routes to Folders

1. Select a route folder.
2. There are two ways to add routes to a route folder:
o Click icon to add routes to your folder, or
o Right-click the folder node and choose Add Route.

3. To change the name of the route, select the route, click in the Name property, and enter a
description in place of the default.
You can also right-click the route in the Routes hierarchy to find a Rename option in the
menu.
291/532
4. Repeat this process to add additional routes to your folders.
Step 3: Gather Data Using a Portable Device

Use the portable device to collect data and measurements using the routes you created.
Step 4: Add Assets to Routes

You can add assets to routes individually or as an asset group. However, you cannot add assets
by dragging the entire database over. When you add an asset, all the points and measurements
get included.
1. Select an asset or asset group from the Assets hierarchy on the right side of the
workspace.
2. Click and drag your selection to the route you are configuring in the Routes hierarchy.
The asset you drag displays a green check mark when it is okay to drop.
3. Drop the asset or asset group into the route.

4. When you are finished building your routes, click File on the top menu bar and then Save
to store your configured route.
You can add all assets from a group by drag-and-drop; however, the group folder does not exist
in the route hierarchy - just the assets are added. Reordering the assets in the Machines
hierarchy does not affect their order in the Routes hierarchy. Reordering assets within routes can
be done independent of the Machines hierarchy order.
Manage Routes
To manage routes, you can deactivate points, move assets, delete routes, rename routes,
remove points, and sort your routes.
Manage Points
1. In the Routes hierarchy pane, select the route or route folder you want to change.
2. In the central pane, select the Points tab.
3. To activate or deactivate the entire channel on the route, check Route, or to activate or
deactivate specific spectrum and waveform measurements from the route, select the
Spectrums and Waveforms tab.
292/532
o When you reactivate a point, check the route hierarchy to verify that you did not add
Points to the route in an inaccurate order. You should reorder them in the route
hierarchy to meet requirements.
o After you add assets or asset groups to the route folder, you can exclude points and
variables from the route. Clear the check box. When you remove points in the
property pane, they are also removed from the Routes hierarchy.
o Off-route points and measurements copied to assets are by default inactive.
Move in Route Hierarchy

You should organize the Routes hierarchy according to how data is collected in the field. As you
are collecting data, this is the order that the portable device will follow. You can rearrange the
order of route folders under the database, routes within folders, assets within routes, and points
within assets.
293/532
Delete Route or Route Folder

To delete a route or route folder:
1. Select the route or route folder.

2. There are two ways to delete a route or route folder:
o Press the Del key, or
o Right-click and then choose Delete.
3. The route or route folder are removed from the hierarchy. You are prompted to Save
before leaving configuration.
Rename Route or Route Folder

To rename a route or route folder:
1. Select the route or route folder and choose a method:

o Press F2
o Right-click, then choose Rename.
o Modify the Name property in the General tab.
2. The new name is displayed. Save the configuration.
Remove Point from Route

To remove a point from a route:
1. Select the point to be removed.

2. Right-click and then choose Remove.
294/532
Sort Routes
You can sort Route Management columns in configured, ascending, and descending order.
Click the column header and select the order desired.
You can also sort on multiple columns. To sort on an additional column after selecting your first
sort, press and click the next column.
Carets are not displayed in the header until you sort the column contents.
Example: Configure Assets

System 1 provides you with the flexibility to configure your assets and devices to fit your local
needs. The following example workflow creates a machine train comprising an export gas
compressor that is monitored by a 3500 device as well as OPC process points.
Step 1: Build an Asset

1. After creating or opening your database, select the Configure workspace and Standard
Mode.
2. Choose Machines > General tab. In the Library pane, expand the Trains library.
295/532
3. Select and drag the Mtr-Gbx (1 Stg Parallel)-Centrf Cmp (OH) train to the General pane.
4. To make your job easier, in the Properties pane under the train, rename each asset in the
train:
Mtr-Gbx (1 Stg
Parallel)-Centrf Cmp EGC A
(OH)
AC Mtr (AF Brg, H) Motor
Gbx (1 Stg Parallel) Gearbox
Centrf Cmp (OH)E Centrifugal

Compressor
5. Edit the properties for each asset as necessary. All editable properties are displayed in
bold. You can edit properties at any time.
296/532
Step 2: Connect a Device

The next step is to import the 3500 device and OPC tags to the database. Verify that you have
network access to a 3500 device and an OPC server.

2. To add a 3500 device:
a. Right-click Devices node and choose Connect to Device > 3500. The Add 3500
Device dialog box is displayed.

b. In the General pane, select the device Type you want to add.
297/532
c. In the Credentials pane, entering the user credentials. (If connecting to an in-
process OPC server, leave these fields blank.)
3. To connect to an OPC server:
a. Right-Click Devices and choose Connect to Device > OPC. The Add OPC Server
b. Click Browse. Select an available Program ID in the Program ID pane.
c. In the Credentials pane, enter the OPC server connection Domain, User Name, and
Password
d. Click Test.
4. Click Add.
5. Add a group to the OPC server in the hierarchy and proceed to import OPC items to
complete the process.
Step 3: Map Device Points to Asset Points

1. While in the Configure workspace, switch to Mapping Mode.
2. For each bearing on the EGC A train, map the appropriate channels from the 3500 device
to each casing vibration (Casing Vib) point on the train.
3. In addition, map the appropriate channels from the 3500 device to each radial vibration
(Radial Vib) and Thrust Position points on the train.
4. Map each Management Keyphasor from the 3500 device to the Speed points on the
bearings.
5. In the example below, we also mapped the temperature OPC tags to the bearing
temperature (Bearing Temp) points on the train.
298/532
6. After mapping all of the channels to the asset points, Choose File > Save.
7. We recommend navigating to the Measurements tab for the EGC A train in the Configure
workspace's Standard Mode to confirm the new channels are properly configured for the
mapped asset point.
Step 4: Configure Data Collection

1. From the Standard Mode of the Configure workspace, navigate to the Data Collection tab
for the EGC A train.
2. Click State Quick Configuration button to launch the State Configuration dialog box.
3. From the Properties tab, configure each speed point appropriately.
299/532
4. For this example, our Speed Control is Variable for each point, enabling the Upper and
Lower Speed Limits, and we have configured the following RPM limits:
5. After configuring each speed point, click Next.

6. The Triggers tab is populated with recommended trigger definitions based on system
calculations. You can choose to add more triggers or edit the existing ones, but for this
example, we use the recommended defaults.
7. click Next.
8. The Storage Rates tab displays the default storage rates for both the 3500 device and the
OPC server. The Transient Storage Rate is available only for the Start up/Shutdown state
and is editable by clicking the Edit. link in the column. For this example, we use the defaults.
9. Click OK to complete state configuration, and choose File > Save.
You are now ready to complete basic condition monitoring on the EGC A train.
Summary
These features were used in this example:
l Configure Assets
l Add 3500 Device
l Add OPC Server
l State Configuration
Example: Configure vbOnline Pro Devices

Use System 1 to configure vbOnline Pro devices and, states.
This is an example is a general workflow of how to configure vbOnline Pro device states..
Example Scenario
The fluid level of two reservoir tanks is maintained by two separate pump systems:
l Reservoir A is maintained by Res A Pump

l Reservoir B is maintained by Res B Pump
300/532
Each pump is operated by an AC motor, and the pumps only run when the fluid level falls below
a set minimum level. The pumps shut off when the maximum fluid level is reached. Each train
also has a speed sensor available.
These pumps are located in a section of the plant where network access is not available, so a
single vbOnline Pro device is used to monitor the condition of each pump system utilizing the
offline data storage system.
Step 1: Build Assets

After creating or opening the database in which you want to configure your assets, navigate to
the Configure workspace, and ensure that you are in Standard Mode.
1. To begin creating assets, drag two predefined Mtr-Pmp (OH1/OH2) trains to the Assets
hierarchy.
2. For better organization, rename the trains and assets as follows:
o For each Mtr-Pmp (OH1/OH2) train, rename them to Res A Pump, and Res B Pump.
o For each AC Mtr (AF Brg, H) asset in the three trains, rename them to Motor.
o For each Pmp (OH1/OH2) asset in the three trains, rename them to Pump.
3. Edit the properties for each asset as necessary. Properties are available to edit at all times
after creation.
Step 2: Import a Device

The next step is to import the vbOnline Pro to the database.
You must have network access to a vbOnline Pro device before continuing.
1. Switch to the Devices hierarchy.

2. Right-click the Devices node and choose Import Device > vbOnline Pro.
3. Select the vbOnline Pro device you want to add.
4. Enter the appropriate user credentials and click Add.
Step 3: Configure Device States

We now need to define the device states the vbOnline Pro uses to collect and categorize data
during offline operation.
Create States and State Groups

1. Select the vbOnline Pro device you just added in the Devices hierarchy, and select the
Data Collection tab.
301/532
2. Click the Add States button on the right side of the pane. The Add Device State dialog
box is displayed.
3. Since we have two machine trains that we are monitoring with this same device, we want
to ensure that each state is categorized appropriately. Create two State Groups, one for
each train, and create states in each group that are only used for the train to which they
belong. Create these in the order given:
o State Group: Res A Pump States
n State: A - Running
n State: A - Off
o State Group: Res B Pump States
n State: B - Running
n State: B - Off
You can configure the state triggers and storage rates after adding each state
using the State Configuration dialog box, but for this example, we will Click OK
button after creating each state so we can configure all of the triggers and storage
rates at once.
4. Since speed sensors are available, we configures our trigger definitions to use the speed
channel measurements as illustrated:
302/532
5. Click Next. The Storage Rates tab is displayed.

6. To minimize extraneous data, and keep the rest of the default settings, clear Data Storage
for the A - Off and B - Off states:
303/532
7. Click OK.
Designate Points for State Groups

We don't want all channels collecting data for every state, so we need to designate which
channels need to collect data when each state is triggered.
1. Navigate to the Points subtab.

2. Later in Step 5, we will map our channels to the appropriate trains, but we can categorize
them ahead of time. For this example, Acceleration Channels 1 to 6 and Speed Channel 1
are mapped to the Res A Pump train while Acceleration Channels 7 to 12 and Speed
Channel 2 are mapped to the Res B Pump train.
304/532
3. Assign the following points for each state group:
Configure State-Based Setpoints

Configure setpoints for each state we are collecting.
1. Navigate to the States subtab. For each state, change the Alarming method
from Standard to State-Based.
3. Navigate to the Setpoints subtab of the Measurements tab to configure the state-based
setpoints.
4. You can configure your setpoints for each state from this tab. For this example, enable
Level 4 setpoints for all channels in the A - Running and B - Running states as well as the
Speed Channel for the A - Off and B - Off states. Keep the default settings.
Step 4: Send Configuration to Device

Send the configuration to the vbOnline Pro device. Navigate to the General tab and select the
vbOnline Pro device from the displayed list. Right-click on the device and choose Synchronize
305/532
the Device.
Step 5: Map Device Points to Asset Points

1. Navigate to Mapping Mode, and select the vbOnline Pro device in the Devices hierarchy.
2. In the Assets hierarchy, select the Pump asset for the Res A Pump train.
3. Map the following instrument channels to the designated asset points:
4. To map the Res A Pump States instrument channel, create a custom point first. In this
example, we placed the point at the pump level.
5. Now, select the Pump asset for the Res B Pump train.
306/532
6. Map the following instrument channels to the designated asset points:
7. Also create a custom point on this pump to map the Res B Pump States instrument
channel.
Summary
The vbOnline Pro device is now fully configured to monitor both pumps in offline mode. When the
device is connected to System 1, the data are imported to the mapped points on the asset to
enable ease of viewing.
l Configure Assets
l Add vbOnline Pro Device
l Add Device State
l State Configuration
l Synchronize Device
Example: Set up Condition Monitoring

The following scenario details the recommended condition monitoring workflow through
System 1 to review machines.
Step 1: View Machine in Status List View

After connecting to your database and importing the latest data samples, select the Display
307/532
workspace.
Choose Status > List:
Step 2: Prioritize Machine for Review

Now that we have all of our machines displaying in the List subtab, we want to filter the
machines we care most about and prioritize our work.
At a glance, our hierarchy is indicating that the Downstairs Manual Group has all of our issues,
so we will select and expand this group in the Assets hierarchy:
308/532
Next, we want to filter the machines in this list by alarm level and criticality. This is achieved by
first clicking on the Level column and then ctrl-clicking the Criticality column:
Quick Tip
To view a tooltip with the previous equipment reviews, hover the mouse over any entry in the
Priority or Fault Conditions column:
In addition, to view the status of the latest review, hover the mouse over the Last Reviewed Date
column. Any equipment reviews that are due are indicated by a icon next to the date and
time.
Step 3: Transition into Machine Review

After sorting the list to the highest priority items, we can now begin to review the data in the Plots
tab.
In this example, we are going to start with the Vacuum Blower (Man) machine, as it has been
identified as the highest priority machine to resolve.
To view the measurement status, double-click on the machine. It is selected in the hierarchy and
the List subtab displays the status of all machine measurements on:
309/532
The Vel Spec O/All(50 X/800 lines) measurement looks interesting, so double-click this
measurement to launch the Quick Views view in Split Mode.
From here you can use a variety of plot tools to identify the issue.
Step 5: Mark Machine as Reviewed

After we have identified what the issue is, we can create a detailed equipment review.
We will perform the following steps to achieve this:
1. Navigate back to the List subtab of the Status tab, and select the Downstairs Manual
Group in the Assets hierarchy.
2. Right-Click Vacuum Blower (Man) entry in the List subtab, and choose Review Machine >
Detailed Review.
3. In the Detailed Machine Review dialog box, add:
o Condition: Cavitation
o Priority: Unsatisfactory
o Comments: A possible cavitation defect was identified. Maintenance scheduled.
o Flag for Next Review: After Set Time
o Time: 2 Days
After saving, we now see our review information populated into the Priority, Fault Conditions,
and Last Reviewed Date columns of the Vacuum Blower (Man) entry in the List subtab:
310/532
Step 6: Transition to Next Machine Review

The next step is to repeat the same process for the rest of your machines.
Summary
You have now completed a general condition monitoring review of your machines.
l Plot Toolbar
l Detailed Machine Review
Example: Statistically Configure Alarms

System 1 offers the ability to statistically configure alarm setpoints using historical data.
This is a general workflow you can use to quickly configure alarm setpoints for assets with
historical data.
Step 1: Identify the Needed Setpoints

To identify which measurements lack configured setpoints, Choose Display workspace, then
Status > List.
A light green status identifies measurements that are receiving data but do not have
setpoints configured.
For this scenario, identify and select a turbine asset that has no setpoints:
311/532
To confirm the measurements that you want to configure setpoints, select the Plots tab and
launch a trend plot to analyze the collected data. For this asset, view Direct, 1X, and 2X variables:
Step 2: Launch the Alarm Quick Configuration

Choose Standard Mode > Configure workspace.
Select the appropriate train in the Assets hierarchy, then select the Measurements tab.
312/532
Click Alarm Quick Configuration .
Step 3: Define the Alarm Scope

Based on the trend plots you observed earlier, create alarm setpoints for the Direct, 1X Amp, and
2X Amp measurements.
Configure setpoints for these measurements:
l Ensure that Standard is the selected Alarm Set.

l Choose Out of Band as the Type.
l For Alarm Levels, choose Level 1.
Since this asset has only been online for less than a week, you are setting the data time range to
a one week span.
Step 4: Configure Statistics

In the Settings tab, both Under and Over setpoints are available to configure because you have
selected an Out of Band alarm type.
313/532
For this example, set the Percent of Mean values to zero and the Multiplier of Standard
Deviation values to 3.
Step 5: Verify Calculations

In the Preview tab, the results of the calculations are displayed, enabling you to modify the final
values as needed.
314/532
Click Apply to create the setpoints.
Choose File > Save.
Step 6: Confirm New Setpoints

To confirm the settings of the new setpoints, Choose Display workspace, then Plots.
Select the asset in the Assets hierarchy, and launch trend plots for each of the measurements.
315/532
The trend plots display Level 1 setpoints for each of the measurements. In addition, the status
color for the asset has changed to indicate that no alarms are occurring.
Summary
In only a few short steps, you have statistically configured new setpoints for measurements
using historical data. You can apply this same procedure for any new assets in the future as well
as for fine-tuning existing setpoints.
l Alarm Quick Configuration
Example: Configure Complex Gearbox

About Complex Gearboxes
Number of Stages
l A stage refers to a combination of gears that represent a single speed-increasing or
speed-decreasing ratio.
l Multiple stages can be configured for a configurable gearbox that make up the nameplate
overall ratio.
l When multiple pinions engage with the same larger gear, these should be configured as
separate gear stages.
The following examples of gear stages illustrate a simple mesh of two gears: parallel, bevel, and
worm gear.
316/532
Complicated gear stages that include rotating or stationary carriers should be configured as
Epicyclic. When you select the gear stage Type as Epicyclic, System 1 adds the carrier, ring, and
planet shafts as children to the stage in the hierarchy.
Number of Shafts
The number of shafts is defined as all of the rotating members within the gearbox, excluding the
carriers, rings, and planet shafts. Those are considered as components of epicyclic gear stages.
For typical parallel stages, the number of shafts are one more than the number of stages.
Configuration Tips
l Because of the large number of configurable properties that comprise a configurable
gearbox, we recommend that you select individual shafts and stages in the hierarchy,
thereby filtering the properties to a manageable level.
l Carriers, rings, and planet shafts are considered components of gear stages and
displayed as children of the gear stage in the hierarchy.
l Sun shafts, which are typically considered the input or output shafts of epicylic stages, are
considered geared shafts within the configurable gearboxes. Ensure that when
configuring the number of geared shafts within the gearbox, you include the number of
sun shafts as well.
l If you are configuring a highly complex gearbox, consider dividing the gearbox into
multiple gearboxes to simplify configuration.
Example Scenario
To configure custom gearboxes, modify properties in the gearbox asset in the
l Type
l Number of Geared Shafts
l Number of Stages
The default number of available gear meshes depends on the type of Gear Stage you configure.
At initial creation of the stage, the default Type is ?, which generates a single gear mesh. The
following non-custom types create a single gear mesh:
l Parallel
l Bevel
l Worm
If you change your gear stage Type to Epicyclic, the default value of Number of Gear Meshes is
2. To generate additional gear meshes, change the Number of Gear Meshes property.
Example 1: Three-section (Stage) Integrally Geared Compressor

The following Example details how you can use the Gbx (Configurable) gearbox to create a
custom 3-section integrally geared compressor.
Train Overview
317/532
This custom train illustrated here uses these assets:
Four Direct Coupling couplings.
One Gbx (Configurable) gearbox.
Three Centrf Cmp (OH) compressors.
One AC Mtr (HD Brg, H) motor.
Before you begin:
l Do not add these assets until instructed. You must add these assets in a particular order to
enable simpler configuration.
l The first few steps of this example details configuring the assets used in order to
demonstrate best practices.
l The association of shafts, stages, and sections between assets can quickly become
unwieldy if this order is not followed.
l Before you begin configuring the train, it is best to understand what shafts, stages, and
sections exist within the assets.
The diagram below illustrates the basic internals of the gearbox and the shafts of the assets it
connects to:
318/532
The blue boxes highlight the locations of the three (3) internal shafts of the gearbox while the red
boxes highlight the two (2) gear stages. As illustrated, each gear stage contains a single mesh
between input shaft gear and their respective pinion shaft gears.
Remember the names used for each shaft and stage. We will use these same names during our
configuration.
Step 1: Configure the Motor
319/532
1. Before we add the motor, drag the Train asset found Trains section of the asset Library to
your Assets hierarchy.
2. To the train, add one AC Mtr (HD Brg, H) motor, and ensure that the motor is selected in
the hierarchy.
3. Filter the property grid.
4. For this Example, configure these properties:
o Rated rpm: 2950
o Rated Power: 967.0 kW
o Line Frequency: 50 Hz
o Rotor Name: Driver Rotor
o Rotation Direction: Counterclockwise
o Speed Control: Constant
Configure the bearings as applicable. For the purpose of this example, we do not go into details
about bearing configuration.
Step 2: Configure the Gearbox

Now that we have the motor configured, we need to setup a configurable gearbox.
1. Add one Gbx (Configurable) gearbox to the train.

2. Verify that the gearbox is selected in the hierarchy for both actions, then configure these
properties:
o Number of Geared Shafts: 3
o Number of Stages: 2
3. Select the gearbox shaft named Shaft in the hierarchy.
4. In the section named Shaft, configure these properties:
o Name: LS Input Shaft
5. In the section named Gear, configure these properties:
o Name: Low Speed Gear
o Type: Spur
o Number of Teeth: 127
6. Select the gearbox shaft named Shaft 2 in the hierarchy.
7. In the section named Shaft 2, configure these properties:
o Name: Pinion 1 Shaft
320/532

o Name: Pinion 1 Gear
o Type: Spur
o Name: Pinion 2 Shaft
o Name: Pinion 2 Gear
o Type: Spur
12. Select the gearbox stage named Gear Stage in the hierarchy.
13. In the section named Gear Stage, configure these properties:
o Name: Pinion 1 Gear Stage
o Type: Parallel
o Input Shaft: LS Input Shaft
o Output Shaft: Pinion 1 Shaft
o Number of Gear Meshes: 1
14. In the section named Mesh, configure these properties:
o Name: Pinion 1 Gear Mesh
o Gear 1: Low Speed Gear
o Gear 2: Pinion 1 Gear
15. Select the gearbox stage named Gear Stage 2 in the hierarchy.
16. In the section named Gear Stage 2, configure these properties:
o Name: Pinion 2 Gear Stage
o Type: Parallel
o Input Shaft: LS Input Shaft
o Output Shaft: Pinion 2 Shaft
o Number of Gear Meshes: 1
17. In the section named Mesh, configure these properties:
o Name: Pinion 2 Gear Mesh
o Gear 1: Low Speed Gear
o Gear 2: Pinion 2 Gear
Configure the gearbox bearings as applicable. For the purpose of this example, we will not go
into details about bearing configuration.
Step 3: Configure the Compressors
321/532
1. To the train, add three Centrf Cmp (OH) compressors.

2. Select the first compressor in the hierarchy.
3. In the section named Asset ID, change the Name property to Section 1 Compressor (OH).
4. In the section named Rotors, configure these properties:
o Name: Section 1 Shaft
o Number of Thrust IB/DE Bearings: 0
o Number of IB/DE Bearings: 0
o Number of OB/NDE Bearings: 0
5. Select the second compressor in the hierarchy.
6. Right-click the image of the second compressor, and choose Flip Horizontal.
9. Select the third compressor in the hierarchy.
Step 4: Connect the Assets

1. Select the train in the hierarchy.
2. Add a Direct Coupling coupling to the train.
3. Select the newly added coupling in the diagram to ensure that the property grid displays
the associated coupling properties.
4. configure these properties:
a. Name: Driver GB Coupling
b. Tag Name: Driver GB Coupling
c. Connection 1: Driver Rotor
d. Connection 2: LS Input Shaft
322/532
5. Drag this configured coupling to fit between the motor asset and the gearbox.
Since the Gbx (Configurable) gearbox is a non-snapping asset, manually place

the coupling to ensure your diagram more accurately reflects your machine train.
6. Add a second Direct Coupling coupling to the train.

7. Select the Direct Coupling in the diagram and verify that the property grid displays its
properties.
8. In the Properties pane, configure these properties:
a. Name: Section 1 Coupling
b. Tag Name: Section 1 Coupling
c. Connection 1: Pinion 1 Shaft
d. Connection 2: Section 1 Shaft
9. Drag this configured coupling to fit between the Section 1 Compressor (OH) asset and the
gearbox.
10. Add a third Direct Coupling coupling to the train.
11. Select the newly added Direct Coupling in the diagram and verify that the property grid
displays its properties.
12. In the Properties pane, configure these properties:
gearbox.
14. Add a Direct Coupling coupling to the train.
15. Select the newly added Direct Coupling in the diagram and verify that the property grid
displays its properties.
16. Configure these properties:
gearbox.
Summary
You have now completed a basic configuration of a three-section integrally geared compressor
using the Gbx (Configurable) gearbox asset.
323/532
This example illustrates the importance of the association of shafts, stages, and sections
between assets as well as shaft and gear associations within the gearbox itself.
The first step is to rename the default shaft and gear names to eliminate confusion when
connecting assets, as illustrated in the example hierarchy below:
For the gearbox, we internally set which shafts contain which gears and which gears mesh with
each other. This defines the internal connections between the shafts to properly set internal
shaft rotation directions as well as calculate the ratios between stages to propagate speed
correctly.
In addition, for the Gbx (Configurable) gearbox asset, the Direct Coupling coupling requires you
to define which shafts are associated with its two connection points. Renaming the shafts in all
of the assets before configuring these couplings eliminates potential confusion.
Example 2: Three-stage Planetary Speed Reducer Using Existing

Templates
324/532
The following Example details how you can create a 3-stage planetary reducer utilizing existing
asset templates.
Step 1: Create the gearbox as a train

For this gearbox, we will create a custom train using the following assets:
l One AC Mtr (AF Brg, H) motor,

l Two Gbx (1 Stg Fixed Ring Planetary) gearboxes,
l One Gbx (1 Stg Parallel) gearbox,
l One Rotating Machine (H) generic machine,
l Two Direct Coupling couplings,
l Two Connector couplings.
Assemble the train as illustrated in the image above.
Ensure the Gbx (1 Stg Fixed Ring Planetary) gearboxes are in the same order in the
hierarchy as they appear in the train. This will simplify configuration.
Step 2: Configure the motor

1. Select the AC Mtr (AF Brg, H) in the hierarchy.
2. In the section named Nameplate Information, configure these properties:
o Rated rpm: 7200
o Rated Power: 80.0 HP
o Line Frequency: 60 Hz
o Rotation Direction: Clockwise
Step 3: Configure the Gearboxes

Since this gearbox is actually comprised of three gearbox asset templates, we will rename each
gearbox asset and consider them a gearbox section.
Configure the Parallel Gearbox Section
1. Select the Gbx (1 Stg Parallel) gearbox in the hierarchy.

2. In the section named Asset ID, configure these properties:
o Name: Gbx Section 1
o Tag Name: Gbx Section 1
o Name: HS Input Pinion
o Rotation Direction: Clockwise
325/532

o Name: Section 1 Output Shaft
5. In the section named Stage 1, configure these properties:
o Number of Input Gear Teeth: 27
o Number of Output Gear Teeth: 83
Configure the Fixed Ring Planetary Gearbox Sections
1. Select the first Gbx (1 Stg Fixed Ring Planetary) gearbox in the hierarchy.
3. In the section named High Speed Sun, configure these properties:
o Name: Section 2 Sun Shaft
4. In the section named Stage 1 Sun Gear, configure these properties:
o Name: Section 1 Sun Gear
5. In the section named Stage 1, change the Name property to Section 2 Epicyclic Stage.
6. In the section named Stage 1 Carrier, configure these properties:
o Name: Section 2 Carrier
7. In the section named Stage 1 Planets, configure these properties:
o Name: Section 2 Planets
o Quantity of Planets: 1
8. In the section named Planet Gear, configure the Number of Teeth property to 44.
9. In the section named Ring, configure the Number of Teeth property to 118.
10. Select the second Gbx (1 Stg Fixed Ring Planetary) gearbox in the hierarchy.
12. In the section named High Speed Sun, configure these properties:
326/532
o Name: Section 3 Sun Shaft

13. In the section named Stage 1 Sun Gear, configure these properties:
o Name: Section 3 Sun Gear
14. In the section named Stage 1, change the Name property to Section 3 Epicyclic Stage.
15. In the section named Stage 1 Carrier, configure these properties:
o Name: Section 3 Carrier
16. In the section named Stage 1 Planets, configure these properties:
o Name: Section 3 Planets
o Quantity of Planets: 1
17. In the section named Planet Gear, configure the Number of Teeth property to 36.
18. In the section named Ring, configure the Number of Teeth property to 93.
Summary
If you select the Rotating Machine (H) asset in the hierarchy, you will notice the Rated RPM
property propagated to it has been greatly reduced by the gearbox.
While you can not view the overall status of the gearbox using this method, you can see
individual section status.
Example 3: Three-stage Gearbox with Additional Connection

Between Stage 1 and Stage 2
The following gearboxes are considered configurable and enable internal shaft-to-shaft
connections:
l Gbx (1 Stg Fixed Ring Planetary)

l Gbx (2 Stg WTG Cmpd Plt Planetary)
l Gbx (3 Stg WTG Planetary)
l Gbx (Configurable)
Additional Shaft-to-shaft Connection Example
327/532
Figure 3 - 11: A three-stage gearbox containing three geared shafts, three epicyclic stages,
and an additional connection between stages 1 and 2. Stage 1 left (red). Stage 2 middle
(blue). Stage 3 right (green).
The input shaft is the stage 1 sun shaft (on the left of the image). The ring of stage 1 is the primary
connection between stage 1 and stage 2, connecting to the stage 2 carrier. The carrier of stage 1
contains an additional connection to stage 2 by driving the stage 2 sun gear. Finally, the stage 2
sun shaft drives the stage 3 carrier, which in turn drives its own sun shaft, also known as the
output of the gearbox.
Configuration Procedure
This configuration procedure includes only the essential steps to demonstrate how to assign
internal shaft and stage relationships in the gearbox.
1. Add a Gbx (Configurable) gearbox to the asset hierarchy.

2. In the section named General, configured these properties as illustrated:
o Number of Geared Shafts: 3
o Number of Stages: 3
328/532
3. Select the gearbox shaft named Shaft in the hierarchy.

4. In the section named Shaft, change the Name property to Stage 1 Sun Shaft.
5. In the section named Gear, change the Name Property to Stage 1 Sun Gear.
12. Select the gearbox stage named Gear Stage in the hierarchy.
13. In the section named Carrier, change the Name property to Stage 1 Carrier.
14. In the section named Ring, configure these properties:
o Name: Stage 1 Ring
o Rotating/Stationary: Rotating
15. In the section named Gear Stage, configure these properties:
o Name: Stage 1
o Input Shaft: Stage 1 Sun Shaft
o Output Shaft: Stage 1 Ring
o Name: Stage 2
o Input Shaft: Stage 2 Carrier
o Output Shaft: Stage 2 Sun Shaft
19. In the section named Ring, change the Name property to Stage 2 Ring.
o Name: Stage 3
o Input Shaft: Stage 3 Carrier
o Output Shaft: Stage 3 Sun Shaft
23. In the section named Ring, change the Name property to Stage 3 Ring.
24. Since we now have the primary connections configured between the gear stages, we now
need to configure the additional connection between stage 1 and stage 2. To do this,
choose Stage 1 in the hierarchy.
25. As noted, the carrier of stage 1 has an additional connection to the stage 2 sun shaft. In the
329/532
Stage 1 Carrier section, change the Shaft to Shaft Connection 1 property to Stage 2 Sun
Shaft.
When you choose Stage 2 Sun Shaft in the hierarchy, the Shaft to Shaft
Connection 1 property is Stage 1 Carrier.
Summary
You have successfully configured an additional connection between gear stages in a
configurable gearbox.
l Configure Assets
Example: Roll Section
Click on the Rolls Asset type for details.
About Roll Section

Configuration Tips
l To enable speed propagation in the configuration, we recommend that you configure all
required properties and then enter the Rated RPM or Linear Speed property.
l The speed ratios are used for configured speed calculation across the Roll Section and the
train.
l To calculate the speed for each shaft using the cascading speed source, System 1 uses the
speed mapping location and the shaft ratios for all assets in the machine train.
330/532
l If the speed ratios are not calculated because of the missing properties, but you set the
rated RPM properties on each rolls, System 1 uses the configured speed values to calculate
the speed of each shaft using the cascading speed source.
Linear Speed, Rated RPM, and Diameter

l Set the Linear Speed property on the Roll Section. This is the linear speed of the felt or belt
that passes through the roll section.
l The Diameter property on individual combination and serpentine rolls is the roll diameter.
l To enable System 1 to calculate the Rated RPM of the serpentine and combination rolls,
enter the Linear Speed and Diameter properties.
l Alternatively, to enable System 1 to calculate Linear Speed, enter the Rated RPM and
Diameter properties.
Rated RPM, Number of Teeth, Input Shaft, and Output Shaft

l Set the Number of Teeth property on the Gears section of combination rolls, geared rolls,
and geared pinion coupling.
l The Input Shaft and Output Shaft properties are configured on the Gear Stage section.
l Corresponding Gear 1 and Gear 2 property is automatically updated on the Gear Mesh
section.
l The Number of Teeth, Input Shaft and Output Shafts properties are required to calculate
Rated RPM on the rolls and couplings.
Step 1: Roll Section

In the Configure workspace, create a complex Roll Section. Add multiple rolls of different
combination based on your requirements.
To configure a Roll Section asset, modify the Rolls asset properties in the Asset Library.
l Number of Combination Rolls

l Number of Serpentine Rolls
l Number of Geared Rolls
l Number of Geared Pinion Coupling
l Number of Gear Stages
The default value of the properties is zero (0).
You can add up to 300 rolls of one type, and a maximum of 300 rolls of all roll types
combined.
Step 2: Combination Rolls | Serpentine Rolls | Geared Rolls | Geared

Pinion Coupling
l Configure the properties of each roll within a Roll Section.
l Configure the bearings of each roll. See Rolls.
Step 3: Stages
331/532
l The stage refers to a combination of gears that represent a single speed increasing or
speed decreasing ratio.
l You must configure multiple stages depending on the number of combination rolls,
geared rolls and geared pinion coupling.
l As each combination roll, geared roll and geared pinion coupling has a single gear, the
number of stages property would typically be set to n-1 [where n = Number of
Combination Rolls + Number of Geared Rolls + Number of Geared Pinion Coupling].
Step 4: Map Assets to Device

In the Configure workspace, map assets to devices. See Map Points.
Step 5: Create HMI Diagrams

In the Display workspace, Use the Shapes Library to add the HMI illustration of your Rolls Section.
See Create a HMI View.
332/532
4. Display HMI Views and Asset Status

Use the Display workspace to define HMI views and monitor asset status.
4.1 Build HMI View

Create a HMI View
Use HMI Views to extend and customize a machine train diagram. The HMI View enables you to
annotate the machine train diagram with additional detail. For example, if a motor contains a
valve, you can add the valve to the HMI view, associate it with a specific asset, and attach the
asset alarm status to it.
Edit a HMI view
To edit a HMI view:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Standard Mode.

2. Select a train in the Machines hierarchy.
3. Select Status > Overview. The HMI view of the machine train diagram you created in the
Configuration Workspace is displayed.
4. Enable Edit Mode .
5. Customize the displayed data as needed. Modify the colors associated with alarms, and
access different HMI views. For details, see Customize the HMI View.
6. To associate a HMI shape to a specific alarm status, see Link HMI Shape to Alarm Status.
7. To replace the default image of a machine train diagram with an actual image, see Edit a
HMI view.
8. While modifying the HMI view, you can use typical Windows shortcut keys to undo and
redo changes:‡
Undo
Redo
333/532
To view other short-cut keys, see HMI View Short-cut Keys.

‡ Only available in System 1 20.2 and later.
Create a New HMI View

To create a new HMI View:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Standard Mode.

2. Select a train in the Machine hierarchy.
4. Add a new tab. In the tab header, right-click and choose Add New Tab. ( You can create a
maximum of 50 instances of a HMI View.)
The Add New Tab dialog box is displayed.
334/532
5. In the Enabled Views pane, select from the available HMI views you want to add to the new
tab. Move them to the Selected column on the right.
6. In the General pane, enter a Name.
a. In the Type field, select:
o A blank diagram does not contain an image of the HMI View or any data.
o A vibration diagram contains an image of the HMI View and the vibration data.
o (Optional) If Bently Performance is integrated, choose a performance
diagram.
b. In the Apply To field, select:
o Machine Instance: to add a diagram tab to the selected train.
o Template Instance: to add a diagram tab to all trains made from the same
custom template. If the selected train was not created from a custom
template, this option is not available.
7. Click Save. A new Diagnostic HMI tab is displayed in Edit Mode.
Add Machine Train Measurements

Add Measurement Groups in a Machine Train Diagram
To add a single or to multiple measurements to a diagram:

3. Select the General tab. The machine train diagram canvas is displayed.
4. Drag a measurement from the Trended Variables tab and drop it on the diagram.
5. Drag the machine train from the hierarchy and drop it on the diagram.
The measurements are added to the corresponding points in the diagram.
If you modify measurement groups on Machine Train Diagram in the Display workspace,
and you want to add new points in the Configure workspace, the new points are not
displayed. To update measurement groups, drag the missing points from the Trended
Variables pane and drop them onto the diagram.
To remove a measurement from the diagram:

2. Right-click on a measurement and choose Remove Measurement. The measurement is
removed from its corresponding point on the diagram.
o The measurement is not deleted from the configuration.
o You can add the measurement to the diagram again.
To modify measurement groups:
335/532

2. When you add or map new points to an asset in the Display workspace, the measurement
groups in the diagram are not updated when you Choose File > Save. To update
measurement groups, drag the missing points from the Trended Variables panel and
drop them onto the diagram.
3. When you remove or unmap points from an asset, the measurement groups are updated
when you Choose File > Save.
If you modify a measurement group in a diagram in the Display workspace, and you
want to add remove or unmap existing points in the Configure workspace, the
unmapped points are automatically removed from the measurement group.
Modify Measurements
By default, points are grouped by throws for recip assets. For all other assets, points are grouped
by bearings.
By default, groups of points that are on bearings or throws appear below the Machine Train
Diagram. Otherwise, measurement groups are placed above the diagram.
To view the diagnostic Machine Train Diagram and the measurement groups:

2. Select the database node or a group node in the Machine hierarchy.
3. Choose Status > Overview. The Machine Train Diagram status tiles are displayed.
4. Double-click on a status tile. System 1 displays an image of the machine train and groups
of points with their measurements. Each measurement displays the measurement name
and its value. Points without measurements are not displayed on the Machine Train
Diagram.
336/532
o To rotate a component, select the group and then the rotation point to the right of
the component. Drag the object to the orientation desired.
o To move a group, select the group and drag it to a new location.
o To edit a group, see Add Machine Train Measurements.
5. Select a measurement from one of the groups. System 1 highlights the corresponding
point in the Machine hierarchy.
337/532
6. Double-click a measurement in one of the groups. System 1 changes the workspace view
into the split mode. The corresponding plots for the selected point appear in the
workspace in addition to the Machine Train Diagram.
Copy Machine Train Diagram Measurement Tables

You can copy Machine Train Diagram measurement tables from one diagram to
another. You cannot copy measurement groups onto templates.
To copy measurement tables:
1. Select the Display workspace. Choose Status > Overview.

2. Open the diagnostic Machine Train Diagram containing the measurement groups you
want to copy.
3. Select the measurement groups.
4. Right-click and click Copy.
5. Open another diagnostic Machine Train Diagram using the same assets. Right-click and
click Paste.
6. If a measurement group is not automatically mapped to an existing point, right-click on
the point and click Replace Point. For more details, see Modify Points .
Modify Points
To modify points in the diagnostic Machine Train Diagram grid:
1. Right-click on a point or measurement.

2. Choose Replace Point. (If you don't click on the point or measurement, Replace Point is
disabled.) The Replace Point dialog box is displayed. The path to the current selected point
is displayed at the top. Only points within the selected hierarchy are displayed.
3. Select a replacement point and click Save. The point you changed is displayed in the grid.
To modify how points are displayed in a Machine Train Diagram:
1. Right-click on the Machine Train Diagram.

2. Choose Measurement View and one of these options:
o Point Name with Status (default). The Point Name and status are displayed.
o Tag Name with Status. The Tag Name is displayed instead of the Point Name.
o Measurement Name with Status. Only the Measurement Name and status are
displayed.
o Value Only. Only the measurement value is displayed.
3. To un-group points, right-click on a group of points in the diagram and choose Ungroup.
The points are un-grouped.
Customize the HMI View
338/532
Use the Display workspace and the HMI interface to customize the machine train diagram you
created in the Configure workspace.
Customize the Diagram

You can use the human-machine interface (HMI) editor to customize geometric shapes, lines,
arrows, text boxes, and image placeholders in the diagram.
To customize diagrams:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Full Mode.

2. Select a train in the Machine hierarchy.
4. To enable changes, enable Edit Mode .
5. Open the Shapes Library. Drag the library drawer handle open.
6. Drag and drop an asset or shape in the Shapes Library onto the HMI view.
7. Customize the appearance and function of shapes. Right-click on the shape and select an
option.
o To resize and rotate it, select a handle and modify the shape. To retain the image
aspect ratio, first select .
o To customize the color, height, and width of a shape and its borders, or the content
of a text box, right-click the shape or text box.
o To edit multiple shapes or text boxes at once, press +left-click.
o To organize the layers on which shapes, assets, or text boxes are displayed, select
the items you want to organize. Right-click and choose Order. Select the order you
prefer.
o To group assets and shapes, see Manage Diagram Component Groups.
339/532
o To flip assets (not trains) horizontally and vertically, right-click on the asset and
select either Flip Horizontal or Flip Vertical. Flipping an asset also repositions the
components and shafts within the asset.
You can only flip the asset if it is not coupled to another asset. This feature is
available for version 17.1 databases or later. Connecting to an older database
disables this function.
8. Link the asset or shape to an asset.

a. Right-click on the asset or shape and choose Set Navigation. The Navigate dialog
box is displayed.
b. In the Hierarchy Selection pane, expand the hierarchy and select the asset you
want to associate with the shape.
c. In the Tab Selection pane, select the Primary Tab and Secondary Tab (if any) you
want to display when you view the shape.
9. To save your changes, disable Edit Mode .
Copy Diagram to Clipboard

To copy an HMI view to the clipboard, right-click on the diagram and select Copy.
Manage Diagram Component Groups

You can edit how components are grouped on a HMI view and modify the group properties.‡
To group and ungroup components:
1. In the Display workspace, open the HMI view in which you want to create or modify groups.
2. Use your cursor to select the components you want to group.
3. Right-click on the diagram and choose Grouping > Group. The components are wrapped
in a border.
4. Measurements are grouped by default. To move children within a group, drag and drop
the child measurement.
5. To remove a child component, right-click on the child component and choose Grouping
> Ungroup.
6. To modify the group properties, right-click on the group border and choose Edit. The Edit
7. Modify the group properties as desired and click Save. The display is refreshed.
Modify the Machine Train Diagram Image

You can replace the default image of a machine train diagram with an actual picture of the
340/532
train.
The new image must be a JPG or PNG file and less than 5 MB. We recommend a maximum
resolution of 1080p.
To replace the machine train diagram image:
1. Right-click inside the grid surrounding the machine train image and choose Modify Image
> Replace. The Windows Open dialog box is displayed.
2. Navigate to the directory containing the image you want to use. Only .JPG or .PNG file types
are supported.
3. Select the image you want to use and click Open. The machine train image is replaced by
the one you selected.
4. To resize the new image, select it and drag one of the resize handles that are displayed
around the edge of the image.
To revert to the default image:
a. Right-click inside the grid surrounding the machine train image.

b. Choose Modify Image > Reset to Default. The default image is displayed.
Link HMI Shape to Alarm Status

Customize HMI Shape with Alarm Status Colors
You can customize human-machine interface (HMI) shapes with status colors for level 1-4
severity alarms.
To modify the color for an alarm associated with an HMI shape:
1. Open a diagram tab.

2. Right-click on an HMI shape and choose Associate with Alarm Status. The Associate with
Alarm Status dialog box is displayed.
3. Disable Use Default Colors.
4. Choose the custom colors you want to use for level 1-4 severity alarms.
5. Click Save.
HMI Diagram Asset Alarms

The color of status tiles and machines depict the current alarm status of assets. For example,
when the machine is in a severe alarm state (alarm level four), the machine image and its status
tile may be displayed in red. Alarms like these requires immediate attention because failure may
be imminent.
341/532
System Communication Icon in Status Tiles

If the machine is mapped to a device, a status tile displays a communication icon. To view
relevant system communication issues, hover the mouse over the icon.
System Communication Errors
Communication
Description
Error
Not All devices mapped to a machine are experiencing a communication

Communicating failure.
Partially Some but not all devices mapped to a machine are experiencing a
Communicating communication failure.
Firmware Out of
The firmware version of the device is out of date with System 1.
Date
The login credentials for a device has changed after it was imported into
Authentication System 1.
Failure
To resolve this error, re-enter your credentials.
Device A device has been updated using Bently Nevada Monitor Configuration or
Configuration 3500 Rack Configuration Software but is not synched to System 1.
Out of Date
To resolve this error, resynchronize your monitor.
Manage HMI Templates

Save HMI Diagram as a Template
You can save a HMI view as a template.‡
342/532
To save the diagram as a template:
1. In the Display workspace, open the HMI view you want to use as a template.
2. Right-click on the tab name and choose Save as Template View. The Template View
3. Enter a Template Name and optionally a Description.
4. Click Save.
Export HMI Templates
After you save a HMI view as an HMI View, you can export it as a template.‡
To export a HMI view as a template:
1. Select either the Display or Configure workspace.

displayed.
3. In the HMI Views tab, all existing HMI templates are displayed.
4. Select the check box of the HMI templates you want to export.
5. Click Export . The Windows Save As dialog box is displayed.
6. Navigate to the location where you want to save the template file.
7. Enter a meaningful name describing the template. Click Save. The template file
(*.S1Diagram) is saved.
You can now import these template files into other System 1 databases. Simply copy the
*.S1Diagram file to the System 1 Server where you want to import the templates.
Import HMI Templates
If you exported HMI template files on another System 1 server, copy the *.S1Diagram file to local
System 1 server where you want to import the templates. For details, see Export HMI Templates
and Import HMI Templates.
You can import HMI templates created in another System 1 database.‡
1. On the System 1 Server where you want to import the templates, select the Configure
workspace.
displayed.
3. Select the HMI Views tab.
343/532
4. Click Import . The Windows Open dialog box is displayed.
5. Navigate to the location where the template (*.S1Diagram) file is located. Click Open.
6. The HMI Views Import dialog box displays HMI Views contained in the imported templates.
Select the HMI View you want to import
7. Choose Import. If required, you are prompted to approve upgrading the template version.
The Custom Component Manager dialog box displays the imported templates.
HMI Diagram Shortcut Keys
344/532
HMI View Shortcut Keys
Zoom In on the HMI Diagram in Display or

Configure workspaces
Zoom Out on the HMI Diagram in Display or

Configure workspaces
Copy selected Images
Paste previous copied images in selected

location
Flip the selected images horizontally (HMI

symbols only)
Flip the selected images
Bring the selected images forward one level in

the Z-order
Group the selected components‡
Ungroup the selected components‡
Bring the selected images all the way to the

front of the Z-order
Send the selected images one level back in the

Z-order
Undo an edit‡
Redo an edit‡
Send the selected images all the way to the

back in the Z-order
Move the selected images in the direction of

the selected arrow keys
345/532
HMI View Shortcut Keys
Modify the image height and width in the

direction of the selected arrow keys
Add Shapes to a HMI Diagram

Use the Shapes Library to annotate your HMI view. It contains many HMI objects, geometric
shapes, lines, arrows, text boxes, and image placeholders you can use to depict other machines
and operators you can use to depict a machine train.
To view the Shapes Library:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Status > Overview.

2. Enable Edit Mode . The Shapes Library is displayed.
3. Add shapes to the HMI view as needed.
346/532
o Add shapes to views at the Database, Group, or Machine Train level.

o Add a maximum of 500 shapes including text per diagram view.
o Add a maximum of five image placeholders per diagram view.
4. Add alarms to a HMI image. See Machine Train Alarms.
5. Modify and replace drawings with custom images. See Modify the Machine Train Image.
6. Modify shapes:
o Add, flip, change color or add gradients.
o Rearrange machine images and each group of points by dragging them to a new
location in the workspace.
o Select and delete a shape, a custom image, or a group of points.
o Modify font color, style, and size.
o Change text box's height and width
o Send nodes or groups of nodes backwards or bring them forward.
7. Choose File > Save. Then synchronize the configuration if needed.
Navigate the HMI View

Navigate to Other Tabs
There are two ways to navigate to other HMI view tabs:
l Click the drop-down list box and select another tab.

l In the Asset Library, choose Basic Shapes > Navigate.
a. Drag and drop the Navigate shape on to the drawing.

b. Right-click and choose Navigate. The Navigate dialog box is displayed.
c. Select an asset as the link target and select the relevant tab.
d. Click Save.
4.2 Display Plots

Use the Plots tab to view plots for assets and devices in the Machines or Devices hierarchy.
Display the Plots Tab

1. Choose Display > Plots.
2. In the Machines or Devices hierarchy, select an asset or device.
347/532
3. To open a plot, choose a method:

Double-click a measurement
System 1 displays the best plot for the selected measurement.
Click a plot type in the plot toolbar

System 1 displays the Add Measurements dialog box.
a. From the Hierarchy pane of the Add Measurements dialog, select one or more
assets or devices.
b. From the Measurements pane of the Add Measurements dialog, select one or more
measurements.
c. Choose Add. The measurements are added to one or more plots.
System 1 superimposes multiple measurements on top of one another in a plot:
348/532
To bring a measurement to the front, select it in the plot header:
View Plot Status

1. Choose Display workspace and the Status tab.
2. Select an asset or instrument from the Machine or Device hierarchy, or double-click a
status tile.
349/532
3. To view plots associated with an alarm, double-click an asset or point:
View Plot Events

1. Choose Display workspace, then Events > Alarms.
2. To plot the alarm data, double-click an alarm event. System 1 displays the plot in Split
Mode.
Display Full Mode or Split Mode

Switch Between Modes
To switch between Full Mode and Split Mode, choose a method:
l Click the mode button in the upper right corner of the Display workspace.
l Press the key
l Double-click on the tab header in either mode:
Full Mode
Full Mode is the default view of the Display workspace. Status, Events, Plots, and Case History
tabs share the full pane.
Split Mode
350/532
In Split Mode:
l Plots are displayed in a separate bottom pane.

l When a status entry or event is selected in the top pane, data for plots is updated in the
bottom pane.
l When you select a new hierarchy or measurement, all displayed tabs are updated.
Display a Trend Plot
To display Trend or Stacked Trend plots:

2. In the Device hierarchy, select an asset, device, card, or channel point.
3. Select the Plots tab.
4. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click the Trend or Stacked Trend
plot.
5. If you did not select measurements in the Measurement pane, the Add Measurements
6. Choose the measurements you want to plot. Click Add. The plot is displayed.
Display a Bode Plot
To use Bode plots, you must have an Advanced or better license.
To display Bode plots:
351/532

2. In the Machines or Devices hierarchy, select an asset or instrument channel.
4. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click the Bode plot.
5. If you did not select Bode measurements in the Measurement pane, the Add
Measurements dialog box is displayed.
Display a Polar Plot
To use Polar plots, you must have a Premium or better license.
Display Polar Plot

To display Polar plots:

352/532
4. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click the Polar plot button.
5. If you did not select Polar measurements in the Measurement pane, the Add
Display Plot Labels

To display speed, time, and date labels on a Polar plot:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Plots > Polar plot.

2. Right-click on the plot and chose an option:
o None
o Speed
o Date
o Time
The plot displays the selected label options.
353/532
Display a Shaft Centerline Plot
To display Shaft Centerline plots, you must have an Advanced or better license.
Display a Shaft Centerline Plot

To display Shaft Centerline plots:

4. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click the Shaft Centerline plot.
354/532
5. If you did not select orbit timebase measurements in the Measurement pane, the Add
Display Plot Labels

To display speed, time, and date labels on a Shaft Centerline plot:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Plots > Shaft Centerline plot.

o None
o Speed
o Date
o Time
Display a XvsY Plot
To use XvsY plots, you must have an Advanced or better license.
To display a XvsY plot:

355/532

4. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click XvsY plot. The Add

6. Select only one X measurement and two or more Y measurements. A maximum of six
Y measurements are displayed.
7. Click Add. Values are displayed as scattered dots for the variables you selected.
8. From the Machine or Devices hierarchy, drag and drop a component from the
Measurement Selection pane, Machines, or Devices hierarchy onto the plot. The Add
Measurements dialog box is displayed. X measurements are filtered based on the existing
X Unit.
9. Data is displayed as scattered dots representing the Y-axis variables.
To open an additional plot dialog box, in an existing XvsY plot, click the Add icon . The Add
Display a Spectrum Plot
Display a Spectrum Plot

To display Spectrum plots:

4. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click the Spectrum or Stacked
Spectrum plot.
356/532
5. If you did not select spectrum measurements in the Measurement pane, the Add
7. Right-click on a plot and choose Plot Preferences.
8. Choose Spectrum tab and check Full Spectrum.
Full spectrum is the spectrum of an orbit. It is derived from the waveforms of two,
orthogonal, shaft relative transducers, combined with the direction of rotation.
Plot Zoom Behaviors

Plot Zoom Window
To display the zoom window method of zooming the plot axes, the window needs to be drawn in
the bottom section of the plot, as highlighted in the image below:
357/532
Mouse Zoom
You can use the scroll wheel to zoom on Full Spectrum (Spectrum, Waterfall, and Cascade).
Mouse Behaviors
Use the scroll wheel to zoom symmetrically around the midpoint of the X-
axis on the plot.
Display a Waterfall Plot
Display Waterfall Plots

To display Waterfall plots:

358/532
4. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click the Waterfall plot.
Mouse Zoom
Mouse Behaviors
axis on the plot.
Display a Cascade Plot
To use Cascade plots, you must have an Premium or better license.
Display Cascade Plots

To display Cascade plots:

359/532
4. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click the Cascade plot.
Mouse Zoom
Mouse Behaviors
axis on the plot.
Display a Timebase Plot
To display Timebase plots:

360/532
4. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click the Timebase or Stacked
Timebase plot.
5. If you did not select waveform measurements in the Measurement pane, the Add
Display an Orbit Timebase Plot
To display Orbit Timebase plots:

361/532
4. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click the Orbit Timebase plot.
Display a Recip Plot
To use Recip plots, you must have an Premium or better license.
To create and display a reciprocating plot:

3. Configure your recip asset by setting its properties including the Modify Asset Properties .
4. Enable online data collection and configure data collection properties. See Online Data
Collection.
5. Import one or more 3500 recip devices.
6. Map the 3500 channels to your recip asset. See Map a Point.
7. Navigate to the Display workspace.
362/532
9. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click Recip plot.
Display a Band Waterfall Plot
To create and display a Band Waterfall plot:

4. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click Band Waterfall plot.
5. If you did not select Band Waterfall measurements in the Measurement pane, the Add
363/532
6. Choose the measurements you want to plot. Click Add. The plot is displays the default
angle of X, Y, and Z axes.
7. Press the CTRL key to activate rotation mode.
8. Use the left mouse button to rotate the plot around the axis of origin.
Display a Rod Position Plot
To use Rod Position plots, you must have an Premium or better license.
To create and display a Rod Position plot:

2. Select a reciprocating compressor from the Machines hierarchy.
3. Configure the recip asset by setting its properties including the Isentropic Compression
Process Properties.
4. Enable online data collection and configure data collection properties. See Enable Data
Collection.
5. Import one or more 3500 recip devices. See Add 3500 Device .
6. Map the 3500 channels to the recip asset. See Map Points.
9. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click Rod Position plot.
Display an Air Gap Plot
364/532
To use Air Gap plots, you must have an Premium or better license.
To display an Air Gap plot:

2. In the Machines hierarchy, select a Hydro Generator (Vertical or Horizontal).
3. Select the General > Hydro Generator Properties tab. Configure the Hydro Generator asset
properties.
5. Import one or more 3500 / 46M Monitor devices with Hydro Air Gap Channel or Multimode
Hydro Air Gap Channel.
6. Map the 3500 Hydro Air Gap/Multimode Hydro Air Gap channels to the Hydro Generator
asset. See Map Points.
8. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click the Air Gap plot.
9. If you did not select Air Gap measurements in the Measurement pane, the Add
10. Choose the measurements you want to plot.
11. Click Add. The plot is displayed.
Display a Rotor Stator Plot
365/532
To use Rotor Stator plots, you must have an Premium or better license.
To display a Rotor Stator plot:

2. In the Machines hierarchy, select a Hydro Generator (Vertical or Horizontal).
3. Select the General > Hydro Generator Properties tab. Configure the Hydro Generator
asset properties.
5. Import one or more 3500 / 46M Monitor devices with Hydro Air Gap Channel or Multimode
Hydro Air Gap Channel.
6. Map the 3500 Hydro Air Gap / Multimode Hydro Air Gap channels to the Hydro Generator
asset. See Map Points.
8. Select measurements in the Measurement pane or click the Rotor Stator plot.
9. If you did not select Rotor Stator measurements in the Measurement pane, the Add
Add Plot Measurements

When creating a plot, you must add measurements to the plot.
366/532
Related Topics
To add measurements to a new or existing plot:

2. Choose a method:
o Click a plot button in the plot toolbar.
o Drag and drop an asset or group of assets onto a plot.
o Press .
o Select an existing plot that does not contain measurements.

3. The Add Measurement dialog box is displayed. The measurements displayed vary
depending on the asset or device you select.
4. In the Add to pane, select the types of plots to which you want to apply the
measurements.
5. In the Hierarchy pane, drag the measurements you want to add to the plot from the
Hierarchy pane to the Measurements pane.
6. Click Add. The measurements are displayed in the plot.
4.3 Plot Context Menus

Depending on the active plot type, different options are displayed in the right-click context
menu. You can also select some of these options in the Plot Toolbar.
367/532
Plot Type
Context
Menu Opti
on
Cursor A
Cursor B
Cursor
- - -
Readout
Scattered - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Scale - - - - -
Scale
Logarithmi - - - - - - - - - - - -
c
Locate
- - - - - - - - - - - -
Peak
-
Set Speed - - - - - - - - - - -
Fault
Frequency - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Mode
Setpoint
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Visibility
Spectral
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Band
Reset Plot
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Rotation
Y-Axis Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Include
- - - - - - - - - -
Invalid
368/532
Plot Type
Context
Menu Opti
on
Data
Color Date
- - - - -
By State
Labels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Keyphasor
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Notch
Clearance
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Boundary
Set as Time
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Range
Compensa
- - - - - - - - - - -
tion
Copy - - - - -
Export to
- - - - - - -
CSV
Performan
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ce Map
Plot
Preference - - -
s
Sensor
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Visibility
Plot Cursors
369/532
Cursor A (orange cursor)
Cursor B (green cursor)
Display Plot Cursors

To select a plot cursor, choose a method.
l Click the arrow under the Cursor A or Cursor B button on the plot toolbar.
l Right-click on the plot and choose Cursor A or Cursor B.
Select the type of cursor you want to display. Some plots do not support certain types of cursor
options.
Basic Cursor Display

The Basic cursor is visualized with a square centered on the data point. Only the fundamental
can be set as active for either Cursor A or Cursor B.
Display Harmonic Cursor
A cursor is displayed at every harmonic (integer multiples) of the fundamental frequency,

specified by the original cursor position.
The fundamental cursor is visualized with a square, like the Basic cursor, and each harmonic is
displayed with a circle, centered on the data point. This cursor only applies to spectrum type
plots and displays up to the tenth harmonic.
Only the fundamental can be active for this cursor type. Note the square fundamental cursor
and the round harmonic cursors.
Display Sideband Cursor
370/532
This cursor type displays up to three markers on either side of the fundamental frequency. The
fundamental cursor is visualized with a square, like the Basic cursor, and each sideband is
displayed with a diamond, centered on the data point.
By default the markers are centered on the fundamental, spaced at one times the running
speed. By clicking on the sideband markers you can make them active and use the cursor
interactions to change the width that the sidebands are spaced.
Either the fundamental or first sideband can be set as active.
l Sideband with fundamental active showing square cursor:
l Sideband with sideband active showing a diamond cursor:
Display Harmonic and Sideband
A cursor is displayed at every harmonic of the fundamental frequency up to ten, as well as up to

three sidebands on either side of the fundamental and each harmonic. See each cursor type for
visualizations and details.
371/532
Display the Active Cursor

View the amplitude and frequency for the active cursor position for each point in the header in
bold.
To move cursors, press the arrow keys.
These arrow key move the active cursor to the next data point. This can affect either the
fundamental or sideband cursor, depending upon which is active.
The active point is the blue curve, indicated in the header by the boxed color square and
orange cursor with orange flares .
Plot Keyboard Shortcuts

Plots
Roll the mouse wheel forward to Zoom In on the vertical or horizontal axis that
the mouse cursor is over
Roll the mouse wheel back to Zoom Out on the vertical or horizontal axis that the
mouse cursor is over
Zoom Back to previous zoom level
Left click, hold, and drag down and right to zoom to a rubber-band box
selection
372/532
Plots
Left click, hold, and drag up and left to turn off zooming
Next Plot Page
Previous Plot Page
Last Plot Page
First Plot Page
Show Vector. Display a vector (arrow) from the origin to the cursor location on
the polar plot.
Keyphasor Notch. Display a black square on the polar plot that indicates the
position of the keyphasor.
Minimize/Maximize Active Plot
Overlay Orbit plot on Shaft Centerline Plot
Toggle Units between available options
Open the Add Measurements dialog box
Set time range across all plots
Apply log scale to plot set. Only valid for Spectrum, Stacked Spectrum, XvsY and
Recip plots.
One time Enable Logarithmic Y-axis plot scale
Two times Enable Logarithmic X-axis plot scale
Three times Enable both Logarithmic X- and Y-axis scale
Four times Disable all Logarithmic plot scale
Cursor Readout Pane
373/532
Display or hide cursor values
Alternatively, right-click on the plot and choose Cursor Readout. The Cursor Readout pane is
displayed.
The Cursor Readout pane displays values for each cursor and each data curve on the plot. In
Timebase and Orbit Timebase plots, it also displays the difference between X values in frequency
units, the Crest Factor value, and the Waveform Overall (rms) value.
Collapsed Harmonic/Sideband Information

A collapsed Cursor Readout Pane. To display more information in a spectrum plot about
harmonic or sideband cursors, click the "+" button in the upper right corner.
Expanded Harmonic/Sideband Information

The expanded Cursor Readout Pane displays harmonic or sideband cursors.
374/532
Plots Scale
To more easily identify data outliers, choose Manual scaling in a plot. To view low
amplitude peaks, harmonics, and sidebands, use Logarithmic Y-axis | X-Axis.
To fix the axes of plots when you are comparing data from machine to machine and
measurement to measurement:
1. Right-click on a plot and choose Scale.

2. Choose an option:
Auto Each
By default, and when selected, the Auto Each plot scale applies to all plots. Each plot scale is
automatically determined by the data or the setpoint, whichever is greater. All scaling
calculations apply to each individual plot.
l For vertical scale:

o The plot scale is determined based on the maximum values of all curves, or the
setpoint, whichever is greater.

o For stacked plots, each scale is individually calculated.
375/532
l For horizontal scale:

o For static measurements, the scale is set to match the time frame selected in the
Mini-Trend Bar for all curves.

o For dynamic measurements, the scale is set to the maximum span for each sample.
o For stacked plots, only one horizontal scale is displayed.
Manual
Apply a manual scale to a plot or all plots of the same type.

If you have not configured a manual scale, the current Auto Each scale is applied to all plots.
Set As Manual
To set the manual scale for a plot to the current axes range, right-click and choose Scale > Set
as Manual.
Edit Manual
To set the manual scale for the axes for a plot:
1. Right-click on a plot and choose Scale > Edit Manual. The Manual Scales dialog box is
displayed.
2. Enter the values you want to use to scale the plot.
o To allow one axis of the scale to scale automatically, check Auto.
o To apply the scale to all displayed plots of the same type, enable Apply to Same Plot
Type.
Logarithmic Y-axis | X-Axis

The logarithmic scales is only valid for Spectrum, Stacked Spectrum, XvsY and Recip plots. Recip
plots are displayed differently than the others.
Use logarithmic scales to display low amplitude peaks, harmonics, and sidebands that may not
be apparent in the presence of high amplitude peaks and that might not be readily seen when
viewed using a linear scale. This may be useful when you want to view bearing fault, motor faults,
resonance and bearing wear.
Apply to a Single Plot

To set the logarithmic axis scale for the axes for a single plot, right-click on a plot and choose
Scale >Logarithmic Y-axis | Logarithmic X-Axis. The axis major numeric indicators are
displayed using scientific notation.
To remove the logarithmic scale, repeat the operation.
Apply to all Plots

To apply a logarithmic scale to plots, press L.
376/532
If you press L: Then:

Apply to a Recip Plot
To apply a logarithmic scale to a Recip plot, choose Scale >Logarithmic X-Y. Only PV curves are
supported and the log scale is displayed in absolute values.
Locate Peak
To set your speed more accurately, use Set Speed with the Locate Peak tool.
Spectral resolution makes it more difficult to identify the exact frequency in a spectrum. To work
around this, use the Locate Peak tool. It uses an algorithm to calculate the peak, which is
typically located between spectral buckets. You can use this information to identify a close
approximation of the 1X frequency.
To use the Locate Peak tool:
1. Place your cursor on an area close to the peak of interest by either mouse click, arrow
keys, or Snap to Peak. For the best results, place the cursor on the actual peak of interest
so that the tool calculates the closest approximation.
2. To activate Locate Peak, choose a method:
o Right-click in the plot grid and choose Locate Peak.
o Press "Z".
3. In the following example, the actual buckets are at 58.125 Hz and 60.000 Hz. When you use
the Locate Peak tool, the cursor is repositioned to a calculated value at 59.482 Hz (3568.915
cpm). This is a close approximation of running speed. In this example, the new cursor
position is displayed in the cursor readout window:
377/532
If you use the Locate Peak tool with Sync Cursors enabled, the cursor on the active curve
of the active plot moves to the located peak position. All other cursors on other plots or
curves, which are synced, move to the located peak's frequency and linearly interpolate
for the amplitude.
Set Speed
To set your speed more accurately, use Set Speed with the Locate Peak tool.
Set Cursor as Manual Speed

To set the current cursor position as the manual speed:
1. Place the cursor at the frequency you want to set the speed. To help place the cursor, use
the Locate Peak tool
2. To set cursor speed, choose a method:
o Right-click and choose Set Speed > Set Cursor as Manual Speed.
o Place the cursor on the frequency you want to use. Press Shift+Z.
3. The modified sample speed and related fault frequencies are displayed in the plot header
and Plot Information tab.
378/532
If no cursor is displayed, Set Cursor as Manual Speed is disabled. Set Speed always
use the fundamental cursor location of the active cursor, regardless of sideband
activity.
Revert to configured speed

Click to revert the calculated speed back to the configured speed.
Apply speed setting across train

Once you have the speed set on a particular plot for a specific sample, it can easily be applied to
other measurements and points on the same machine train. The tool uses the configured
machine properties to calculate the speed for each asset on the train. For example, when the
speed is changed through a gearbox or belt coupling, the speed is adjusted. These changes can
be seen on the plots currently displayed.
To use this tool, choose a method:
l Right-click on the speed displayed in the plot. The Apply Speed Across Train menu is
displayed. Select this option to apply the selected speed to all data samples [plus or minus
(+/-) 10 minutes of the current sample] across the entire train.
l Right-click on the plot. Choose Set Speed > Apply Speed Across Train. If the selected train
contains a configurable gearbox that requires more than one known speed, the speed is
not fully propagated across the train.
Overlay Fault Frequency

Overlay related fault frequencies associated with the active curve on the active plot. Only
available for these plots:
l Spectrum
l Timebase and Stacked Timebase
Display the next fault frequency for the selected curve.
Display the previous fault frequency for the selected curve.
To overlay fault frequencies, choose a method:
l Click the Fault Frequency button on the plot toobar.

l Right-click on the plot and choose Fault Frequency Mode.
379/532
To display valid fault frequency options, open the Plot Information drawer. It displays all
configured fault frequencies for the asset train from which the point was originated.
The results displayed by the Fault Frequency tool depend on running speed, bearing
information, and other asset properties. If the required data is not configured, a value cannot be
calculated or displayed.
Fault Frequency Overlay for Timebase Plots

System 1 overlays fault frequencies using the cursor position in a Timebase plot.
To view the frequency name and amplitude, hover the mouse over the fault frequency. Fault
frequency harmonics are not available for fault frequencies on Timebase and Stacked Timebase
plots.
In a Timebase plot, fault frequencies are placed on either sides of the cursors. The distance
between the basic cursor and fault frequency cursor is the time span derived from the fault
frequency converted using running speed to time domain.
Single Fault Frequency Mode

The plot overlays a single fault frequency and its harmonic markers associated with the active
curve on the active plot. By default, one fault frequency displays markers indicating up to the
tenth harmonic. To modify the number of harmonics displays, modify the defaults in
Preferences. Examples of individual fault frequencies are:
l BPFO
l BSF
380/532
l Line frequency
l Gear mesh
Fault Frequency modes are configured during the asset configuration process. After creating an
asset, you can configure these options in the General Tab of the Configure workspace's
Standard Mode.
Previous and next fault frequency tools move through each of the fault frequencies with their
associated harmonics in the Plot Information dialog box.
Group Fault Frequency Mode

Select this mode to simultaneously overlay related fault frequencies that are associated with the
active curve on the active plot in the workspace. The default is group mode, which displays only
the fundamental for each frequency.
Previous and next fault frequency tools move through each of the fault frequencies groups in the
Plot Information dialog box.
Speed Group
The speed group overlays 1X markers for each speed associated with that asset. For example, for
a gearbox with two shafts two markers are displayed, indicating the speed for each shaft.
381/532
Bearing Groups (OB/NDE and IB/DE)

A bearing group is created for each bearing option configured. Each bearing can have up to
three options, and each of these options can have their own group. These groups include the
fault frequencies that are associated with the bearing type. If no bearing groups are displayed,
then none have been configured.
To configure bearings and bearing options, see Searching The Bearing Database and Advanced
Bearing Properties.
To configure bearings and bearing options, see the System 1 Configure Manual.
Standard Mode.
382/532
Asset Group
Each asset gets one asset frequency group, which includes fault frequencies particular to that
asset. If no asset frequencies are displayed, then not all of the properties required for fault
frequencies were configured. For example, some of the properties that can identify asset group
fault frequencies for a motor are line frequency, blade pass frequency, number of rotor bars, and
number of stator slots.
Standard Mode.
383/532
Navigate Fault Frequencies

To navigate through fault frequencies on a Spectrum plot:
1. Open a Spectrum plot for a dynamic measurement. System 1 displays fault frequencies of
all bearings configured for the train on which the selected measurement is present.
2. To view the fault frequencies, open the Plot Information drawer and choose Fault
Frequency Selection.
3. Press F to navigate through fault frequencies of the bearing and overlay the selected fault
frequency on the plot.
4. Press Shift + F to navigate through fault frequencies of the bearing backwards and
overlay the selected fault frequency on the plot.
Keyboard Shortcuts
Plot Fault Frequencies
Next fault frequency
Previous fault frequency
Toggle fault frequency on/off
Toggle between Single or Group mode
Toggle Harmonics on/off
Scattered Plot
Only available for XvsY plot type.
On XvsY Plots, data is displayed as scattered dots by default.
To display data as connected dots:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Plots > XvsY Plots.

2. Right-click on the plot and select this option.
Setpoint Visibility
384/532
Enable or disable Setpoint Visibility.
When Setpoint Visibility is disabled, all setpoint lines are hidden.
To access setpoint visibility, choose a method:
l Click the Setpoint Visibility button on the plot toolbar.

l Right-click on the plot and choose Setpoint Visibility.
Use the Plot Toolbar

Click the arrow below Setpoint Visibility. Select an option:
l Limited All setpoint lines without triangles are displayed.

l Full All setpoint lines and triangles by default are displayed.
Use the Plot Context Menu

Right-click on a plot and choose Setpoint Visibility. Select an option:

385/532
Reset Plot Location

To display a Waterfall plot using its default angles:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Plots > Waterfall plots.

2. Right-click on the plot.
3. Choose Reset Plot Location. The plot default angles are displayed.
Spectral Band
View detailed trended spectral band information.
This feature is only available in the Spectrum and Stacked Spectrum plots.
To view spectral band information, choose a method:
l Click the Toggle Band Window button on the plot toolbar.

l Right-click on the plot and choose Spectral Band.
Examples
To display trended spectral band information alongside the associated spectrum plot for the
386/532
desired asset:
Each bar graph displays the sum of the energy within the band.
View Additional Plot Details

l To highlight the borders of all Spectral Bar Graphs on the spectrum plot, hover your mouse
over an empty region of the Spectral Band plot.
387/532
l To view the trend data and associated spectrum plot, hover your mouse over the spectral
bar graph:
388/532
A pane displays:
o The trend data used to generate the related bar graph.
o The current value within that region.
o The setpoint values, if any. The colors displayed correspond to the alert/alarm
severity.
The Spectral Band bar graph does not highlight a section of the associated spectrum
plot.
The measurements display the current value for each bar graph.
Protection Setpoints versus Condition Monitoring Setpoints

Setpoint line thickness is used to differentiate between protection setpoints and condition
monitoring setpoints.
Protection setpoints are displayed using a thicker line than condition monitoring setpoints:
Notice the different line thicknesses of the two level 4 (Danger) setpoints.
Reset Plot Location

To display a Waterfall plot using its default angles:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Plots > Waterfall plots.

2. Right-click on the plot.
3. Choose Reset Plot Location. The plot default angles are displayed.
Y-Axis Unit
You can view waveform and spectrum measurements in acceleration, velocity or displacement
units while in current value and historical modes. System 1 integrates the acceleration data into
velocity and the velocity data into displacement.
The displacement data is differentiated to velocity, and velocity is differentiated to acceleration.

Plots do not show the spectral band with an integrated or differentiated curve.
The following plots support integration and differentiation of spectrum and waveform data:
389/532
l Spectrum and stacked spectrum plots

l Timebase and stacked timebase plots
l Waterfall plots
l Cascade plots
Change the Y-Axis Unit

To change the y-axis unit for waveform and spectrum measurements:

2. Open one of the following plots:
o Spectrum and stacked spectrum plots
o Timebase and stacked timebase plots
o Waterfall plots
o Cascade plots
3. Right-click the plot, and choose Y-Axis. To view waveform and spectrum measurements,
choose an option:
Option Shortcut Key
Acceleration
Velocity
Displacement
As Measured
4.
Include Invalid Data

System 1 can use both valid and invalid data to plot measurements for a given time range. For
every plot, to include invalid data, check Include Invalid Data.
Plots display invalid data in black and valid data in color. Cursor values designate invalid data
with an exclamation mark in the plot header, footer and cursor pop-up.
390/532
To select the Include Invalid Data option:
391/532
l Select File > Preferences > Plot.
l Right-click on a plot, and choose Include Invalid Data.
Color Date by State

Not available for Reciprocating, Band Waterfall, and XvsY plot types. You can also filter
data displayed for a specific plot, or globally, based on the configured machine state. For
details, see Filter Machine States.
To display plot data in color based on machine state:
1. Right-click on a plot and choose Color Data By State.

2. The color of plot samples are refreshed based on the machine state when the samples
were stored.
To modify the default color assigned to a state, see Preferences - Theme in online help.
392/532
If the data displayed belongs to overlapping states, the color of the data plotted is based on
operating state, then device state, and lastly default state. The Cursor Readout Pane displays
information on all overlapping states.
Plot Labels
To display speed, time, and date labels on on a Shaft Centerline or a Polar plot:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Plots > Polar or Shaft Centerline plot.

o None
o Speed
o Date
o Time
Shaft Centerline Plot Labels

To display speed, time, and date labels on a Shaft Centerline plot, select:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Plots > Shaft Centerline plot.

o None
o Speed
o Date
o Time
393/532
Show Vector
To display the plot vector, choose a method:
l Right-click on the plot and choose Show Vector.

l Press the I key. The Show Vector option is enabled for all plots in the active plot set.
A vector (arrow) is displayed from the origin to the cursor location on the polar plot. Vectors are
displayed for both Cursor A and Cursor B on the plot.
Keyphasor Notch
To display the Keyphasor Notch, choose a method:
l Right-click on a polar plot and choose Keyphasor Notch. A black square is displayed on
the polar plot that indicates the position of the keyphasor.
l Press the key. The Keyphasor Notch option is enabled for all plots in the active plot
set.
Clearance Boundary
Only available for Shaft Centerline plot type.
Use this option to enable or disable the diametrical bearing clearance circle mode.
To set the parameters for a clearance boundary on a bearing, choose Configure workspace
> Standard Mode. View the bearing properties.
These properties are displayed:
l Diametrical X Clearance
l Diametrical Y Clearance
l Bearing Clearance Location.
The boundary is displayed as a dashed-line circle.
Set Time Range

Only available in historical mode on Trend and Stacked Trend plots.
Use this option to automatically set multiple opened plots to the selected zoomed time range on
the active plot. The Mini-Trend Bar time span is also updated.
Compensation Data
394/532
Enable or disable compensation or display compensation options.
Compensation options:
l Select a sample data with which to compensate.

l Select a stored reference.
l Create a data set.
Compensation Tool
Use Compensation to remove a stored value from data to ensure it accurately represents the
result of vibration. You can apply compensation globally or locally in historical and current value
mode.
System 1 supports the following scenarios:
l Compensate for runout by removing shaft imperfections from the vibration signal.
l Compensate data to show actual shaft position within the bearing clearance boundaries.
You can apply Compensation to Gap, Vector and Waveform variables.
Right-click Menu Option

Local selections override global settings.
To select compensation options you want to apply locally to a plot:
1. Open a plot.
2. Right-click on the plot and choose Compensation.
3. Select what kind of sample data you want to use as compensation:
o To designate compensation data set for the current plot, choose Stored Reference
Set.
o To define a new data set, choose Create Data Set.
Sample Data for Compensation

System 1 offers the following sample data with which to compensate:
395/532
l Default This option compensates data using the default data set. Each plotted machine
data uses its own defaults.
l Stored Reference Set This option launches Select Compensation Data window from
which you can select a compensation data set for a machine train. When there is no
reference data:
o Shaft Centerline plots are empty.
o Other plots retain their original values and appear as a curve with no compensation.
l First Sample This option compensates data using the first sample timestamp from the
selected Mini-Trend range.
l Last Sample This option compensates data using the last sample timestamp from the
l Active Sample This option compensates data using the sample timestamp of the
currently selected sample.
l Create Data Set See Create a Compensation Data Set.
Supported Plots
System 1 supports compensation on the following plots:
l Vector-Polar, Trend, Stack Trend, Bode

l Waveform - Timebase, Stacked Timebase, Orbit Timebase
l Gap - SCL, Trend, Stack Trend, Bode
Create a Compensation Data Set

To create a compensation data set:
1. Choose a method:
o Right-click on a plot and choose Compensation > Create Data Set.
o Click the Compensation Data button on the Plot toolbar, and choose Create
Data Set.
The Compensation Data dialog box is displayed.
2. In the General tab, enter a name for the data set.

3. Choose Set as Default to designate the data set as default. Only one data set per machine
train may be designated as default.
4. Select one or more compensation types to include in the data set:
o Vector
o Waveform
o Gap
o All
5. For all compensation types selected in the previous step, select the corresponding tab and
enter the measurements. For vector and gap measurements, System 1 uses the stored
396/532
sample closest to the selected time for amplitude, phase and speed. For waveform
measurements, System 1 uses the amplitude sample closest to the selected time.
6. To freeze the current sample time, check Freeze.
7. Click Save.
Apply a Stored Reference

Stored references include compensation data sets you can apply to plots to compensate data.
To select compensation data, open the Select Compensation Data dialog box :
l Click and choose Stored Reference Set.

l Or right-click on the plot area and choose Compensation > Stored Reference Set.
The Select Compensation Data dialog box is displayed. It lists available compensation data sets
for a machine train. You can only apply one data set to a plot.
When you select a data set, System 1
l Applies the data set to all data that can be compensated and updates the plots in the
workspace.
l Applies the compensation to the curves of the train in the selected plot. If the plot contains
curves for other trains, System 1 does not apply the compensation to those curves.
l Displays the compensation value in the plot header.
l Displays a tooltip when you hover the mouse over a compensation. The tooltip contains
the name, speed, date and time of the compensation value.
Edit a Compensation Data Set

You can edit compensation data:
l For databases 18.2 or newer.

l If you have created the compensation data or have Equipment Health Admin rights.
1. To o pen the Select Compensation Data window, choose a method:

o Click the Compensation Data button and choose Stored Reference Set.
o Right-click the plot area and choose Compensation > Stored Reference Set.
2. Right click a data set, and choose Edit. System 1 displays the Compensation Data dialog
box.
4. Choose Set as Default to designate the data set as default. You can only designate one
data set per machine train as default.
397/532

o Vector
o Waveform
o Gap
o All
7. To freeze the current sample time, check Freeze. This option is selected by default for
previously stored samples of the data set.
8. Click Save.
Delete a Compensation Data Set

Users with these permissions can delete a compensation data set:
l The original user who created the data set

l The Machine Health administrator
In the Select Compensation Data dialog box, right-click a data set and choose Delete. System 1
removes the data set record from the grid and the reference data overlaid on the plot.
Copy Plot
To copy and paste plot data:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Plots and select a plot.

o Select
o Right-click on the plot and choose Copy.
You can copy and paste data into Microsoft Word, Excel, and other compatible external
applications.
Export to CSV
You can export plot data to a CSV file for use in third-party applications.
Supported Plot Types

These plot types support exporting CSV data:
l Trend
l Stacked Trend
398/532
l Bode
l Polar
l Shaft Centerline Plot
l XvsY
l Timebase
l Stacked Timebase
l Spectrum
l Stacked Spectrum
l Reciprocating
Export plot data to a CSV file

To export plot data to a CSV file:
1. Right-click on the plot and choose Export to CSV. The Windows Save As dialog box is
displayed.
2. Enter a file name and click Save. The notification icon in the System 1 footer bar
displays the file export status.
4.4 Plot Toolbar

Plot Types and Toolbar
System 1 remembers the setting selected for each plot tool. These tools are available for each
plot type. You can also access some of the options in the plot context menu.
399/532
Plot Type
Ico
Tool Bar
n
Button
Cursor A -
Cursor B -
Cursor - -
Readout
Synchroniz - - -
e cursors
Link -
cursors to - -
samples
Scale Plot - -
Sync Zoom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Compariso - - - - - - -
n data - -
Compensa - - - - - - - - - - - -
tion
Setpoint - - - - - - - - - - - -
visibility - -
Spectral - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Band¥
Overlay - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Fault - -
Frequency
±
Overlay - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Previous±
400/532
Plot Type
Ico
Tool Bar
n
Button
Overlay - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Next±
Plot
Diagnostic
Report
Select - - - -
State Filter
¥ Only available for Spectrum plots.
± Only available for Spectrum, Timebase, and Stacked Timebase plots.
Disabled Plots and Plot Toolbar

Plots are disabled when:
l A database, an instrument, a device category, or a group is selected in the hierarchy.

l Measurements are not configured.
The Plot Toolbar is disabled when:
l The database hierarchy or group node is selected.

l The device hierarchy is selected.
l No measurements are available in the Measurement dialog box.
l No plots are displayed.
To enable disabled tools:
l Measurements must be available for a plot type.

l Select a plot type.
Collapsed Options in Plot Toolbar

When the size of the System 1 application dialog box is less than the length of the plot toolbar, the
toolbar collapses. To gain access to the hidden toolbar tasks, click the white dot.
401/532
Plot Cursors
Cursor A (orange cursor)
Cursor B (green cursor)
Display Plot Cursors

To select a plot cursor, choose a method.
l Click the arrow under the Cursor A or Cursor B button on the plot toolbar.
l Right-click on the plot and choose Cursor A or Cursor B.
Select the type of cursor you want to display. Some plots do not support certain types of cursor
options.
Basic Cursor Display

The Basic cursor is visualized with a square centered on the data point. Only the fundamental
can be set as active for either Cursor A or Cursor B.
Display Harmonic Cursor
A cursor is displayed at every harmonic (integer multiples) of the fundamental frequency,

specified by the original cursor position.
The fundamental cursor is visualized with a square, like the Basic cursor, and each harmonic is
displayed with a circle, centered on the data point. This cursor only applies to spectrum type
plots and displays up to the tenth harmonic.
402/532
Only the fundamental can be active for this cursor type. Note the square fundamental cursor
and the round harmonic cursors.
Display Sideband Cursor
This cursor type displays up to three markers on either side of the fundamental frequency. The
fundamental cursor is visualized with a square, like the Basic cursor, and each sideband is
displayed with a diamond, centered on the data point.
By default the markers are centered on the fundamental, spaced at one times the running
speed. By clicking on the sideband markers you can make them active and use the cursor
interactions to change the width that the sidebands are spaced.
Either the fundamental or first sideband can be set as active.
l Sideband with fundamental active showing square cursor:
l Sideband with sideband active showing a diamond cursor:
Display Harmonic and Sideband
403/532
A cursor is displayed at every harmonic of the fundamental frequency up to ten, as well as up to

three sidebands on either side of the fundamental and each harmonic. See each cursor type for
visualizations and details.
Display the Active Cursor

View the amplitude and frequency for the active cursor position for each point in the header in
bold.
To move cursors, press the arrow keys.
These arrow key move the active cursor to the next data point. This can affect either the
fundamental or sideband cursor, depending upon which is active.
The active point is the blue curve, indicated in the header by the boxed color square and
orange cursor with orange flares .
404/532
Plot Keyboard Shortcuts

Plots
Roll the mouse wheel forward to Zoom In on the vertical or horizontal axis that
the mouse cursor is over
Roll the mouse wheel back to Zoom Out on the vertical or horizontal axis that the
mouse cursor is over
Zoom Back to previous zoom level
Left click, hold, and drag down and right to zoom to a rubber-band box
selection
Left click, hold, and drag up and left to turn off zooming
Next Plot Page
Previous Plot Page
Last Plot Page
First Plot Page
405/532
Plots
Show Vector. Display a vector (arrow) from the origin to the cursor location on
the polar plot.
Keyphasor Notch. Display a black square on the polar plot that indicates the
position of the keyphasor.
Minimize/Maximize Active Plot
Overlay Orbit plot on Shaft Centerline Plot
Toggle Units between available options
Open the Add Measurements dialog box
Set time range across all plots
Apply log scale to plot set. Only valid for Spectrum, Stacked Spectrum, XvsY and
Recip plots.
Cursor Readout Pane
Display or hide cursor values
Alternatively, right-click on the plot and choose Cursor Readout. The Cursor Readout pane is
displayed.
The Cursor Readout pane displays values for each cursor and each data curve on the plot. In
Timebase and Orbit Timebase plots, it also displays the difference between X values in frequency
units, the Crest Factor value, and the Waveform Overall (rms) value.
406/532
Collapsed Harmonic/Sideband Information

A collapsed Cursor Readout Pane. To display more information in a spectrum plot about
harmonic or sideband cursors, click the "+" button in the upper right corner.
Expanded Harmonic/Sideband Information

The expanded Cursor Readout Pane displays harmonic or sideband cursors.
Synchronize Cursors
407/532
Synchronize cursors on the active plot and all plots with the same axes. This applies to individual
plots and stacked plots.
Synch Spectrum and Waterfall Plots

The sideband width is also synched across all plot types. Cursor values are synced between
specific plot instances:
l Waterfall plot instances sync between themselves.

l Spectrum and Stacked Spectrum plot instances sync between each other.
When you close and reopen a set of plots, the cursor locations and sideband widths are
maintained.
Sync Cursor Off
Sync Cursor On
Keyboard Shortcut Keys

Shortcut Key Description
Synchronize cursors on all plots with the same axes.
408/532
Scale Plots
Modify the scale used to display one or more plots.
Auto Each




Auto All
Synchronize all plot scales of the same type and same vertical units.
l For similar plot types, all vertical scales using the same units are synced to the maximum
unit value.
l The maximum is determined by the values on the curves or the maximum alarm setpoint,
whichever is greater.
l For static measurements, the horizontal scale is set to match the time frame selected in
the Mini-Trend Bar for all curves.
l For dynamic measurements, the horizontal scale is set to the maximum span for each
sample.
If samples go off scale, the plot doesn't display them.
Manual
Examples
Plot Scale Auto Each
409/532
Plot Scale Auto All
410/532
Plot Scale Manual
Link Cursors To Samples
Link cursors in Spectrum and Timebase plots to the sample selected in the active Trend plot.
Scale Plots
Modify the scale used to display one or more plots.
Auto Each


411/532


Auto All
Synchronize all plot scales of the same type and same vertical units.
l For similar plot types, all vertical scales using the same units are synced to the maximum
unit value.
l The maximum is determined by the values on the curves or the maximum alarm setpoint,
whichever is greater.
l For static measurements, the horizontal scale is set to match the time frame selected in
the Mini-Trend Bar for all curves.
l For dynamic measurements, the horizontal scale is set to the maximum span for each
sample.
If samples go off scale, the plot doesn't display them.
Manual
Examples
Plot Scale Auto Each
412/532
Plot Scale Auto All
413/532
Plot Scale Manual
Sync Zoom Plots
Sync or unsync the zoom level of all plots.
Disabled Sync Zoom

When Sync Zoom is disabled:
l The horizontal axis is zoomed for all curves on a plot.

l For a non-stacked plot, the vertical axis is zoomed for all curves on the plot.
l For a stacked plot, zoom is based on the selected curve and other curves using the same
unit.
Enabled Sync Zoom

When Sync Zoom is enabled:
l All plot scales are synchronized.

l Sync Zoom overrides Auto Each, Auto All, or Manual scale selected on the Plot Toolbar.
414/532
l The horizontal axis is zoomed for all curves on similar plot types in a plot set using the
same variable type on the horizontal axis. All other plots retain their current horizontal
scale.
l The vertical axis:
o For a non-stacked plot, the vertical axis is zoomed for all curves on the plot.
o For a stacked plot, zoom is based on the selected curve and other curves using the
same unit.
To un-zoom, left-click the mouse at the lower right side of a plot, and drag up and left, then
release. The original plot scale is restored.
Example
Left-click on a plot and select a range you want to zoom in on:
All open plots are updated with the same scale.
415/532
Compare Machine Data
416/532
Enable or disable data comparison or display overlay sample options.
You can overlay a stored data set on other data to assess differences or changes in machine
behavior.
Comparison Data Options

Use these options to compare data:
l Default Overlay the default data set on the selected plots. This option is available only
when a default data set exists. For each machine train data, System 1 uses the
corresponding default data set.
l Stored Reference Set Displays the Select Comparison Data dialog box which lists all
available data sets. Select one or more data sets and apply them to your plots. You can
also copy and paste multiple items from the list and save them in a third-party application
like Excel.
l Previous Sample Display the previous sample underneath the current sample for
diagnostic comparison. Previous sample curve is displayed in dark gray and is identified as
such:
l Create Data Set See Create a Comparison Data Set.
Create a Comparison Data Set

To create a comparison data set:
1. Select an asset from Machines hierarchy. You cannot create a data set for assets in the
Devices hierarchy.
2. Open a plot in historical mode.
3. From the Plot toolbar, access the Overlay Sample menu and choose Create Data Set.
The Comparison Data dialog box is displayed.
417/532
4. In the General tab, enter a name for the data set. This field is required. You must enter a
name for the data set.
5. To designate the data set as default, choose Set as Default. Only one data set per
machine train may be designated as default.
6. In the Data pane, you can select a sample type:
o Multi-sample range is the default sample type. The time span is set for the selected
mini trend data set is saved:
n Start time is set to seven days before the end time if the mini trend time range
is greater than seven days.
n End time is the latest timestamp from the mini trend.
You can modify the start and end times for the multi-sample range type. Start and
end times cannot be more than seven days apart. Otherwise, you cannot save the
data set.
o Single sample
n This option stores one sample as the data set.
n The timestamp of the active cursor is fixed.
n You cannot modify the start and end times.
7. Click Save.
Delete a Comparison Data Set

Only these users can delete a comparison data set:
l The original user who created the data set.

l A Machine Health administrator.
To delete a data set:
1. Select an asset from Machines hierarchy.

2. Open a plot in historical mode.
3. Click in the Plot Toolbar, and choose Stored Reference Set. The Select Comparison
Data dialog box is displayed. It displays a list of all available data sets.
4. Right-click a data set and choose Delete. The data set is removed from the list and from
the reference data overlaid on the plot.
Supported Plots
You can compare data for these plots:
l Orbit Timebase
l Timebase
l Timebase Stacked
l Spectrum
l Stacked Spectrum
418/532
l Full Spectrum
l Bode
l Polar
l Shaft Centerline
l Reciprocating
Compensation Data
419/532
Enable or disable compensation or display compensation options.
Compensation options:
l Select a sample data with which to compensate.

l Select a stored reference.
l Create a data set.
Compensation Tool
Use Compensation to remove a stored value from data to ensure it accurately represents the
result of vibration. You can apply compensation globally or locally in historical and current value
mode.
System 1 supports the following scenarios:
l Compensate for runout by removing shaft imperfections from the vibration signal.
l Compensate data to show actual shaft position within the bearing clearance boundaries.
You can apply Compensation to Gap, Vector and Waveform variables.
Right-click Menu Option

Local selections override global settings.
To select compensation options you want to apply locally to a plot:
1. Open a plot.
2. Right-click on the plot and choose Compensation.
3. Select what kind of sample data you want to use as compensation:
o To designate compensation data set for the current plot, choose Stored Reference
Set.
o To define a new data set, choose Create Data Set.
Sample Data for Compensation

System 1 offers the following sample data with which to compensate:
420/532
l Default This option compensates data using the default data set. Each plotted machine
data uses its own defaults.
l Stored Reference Set This option launches Select Compensation Data window from
which you can select a compensation data set for a machine train. When there is no
reference data:
o Shaft Centerline plots are empty.
o Other plots retain their original values and appear as a curve with no compensation.
l First Sample This option compensates data using the first sample timestamp from the
l Last Sample This option compensates data using the last sample timestamp from the
l Active Sample This option compensates data using the sample timestamp of the
currently selected sample.
l Create Data Set See Create a Compensation Data Set.
Supported Plots
System 1 supports compensation on the following plots:
l Vector-Polar, Trend, Stack Trend, Bode

l Waveform - Timebase, Stacked Timebase, Orbit Timebase
l Gap - SCL, Trend, Stack Trend, Bode
Create a Compensation Data Set

1. Choose a method:
o Right-click on a plot and choose Compensation > Create Data Set.
o Click the Compensation Data button on the Plot toolbar, and choose Create
Data Set.
The Compensation Data dialog box is displayed.

3. Choose Set as Default to designate the data set as default. Only one data set per machine
train may be designated as default.
o Vector
o Waveform
o Gap
o All
421/532
6. To freeze the current sample time, check Freeze.
7. Click Save.
Apply a Stored Reference

Stored references include compensation data sets you can apply to plots to compensate data.
To select compensation data, open the Select Compensation Data dialog box :
l Click and choose Stored Reference Set.

l Or right-click on the plot area and choose Compensation > Stored Reference Set.
The Select Compensation Data dialog box is displayed. It lists available compensation data sets
for a machine train. You can only apply one data set to a plot.
When you select a data set, System 1
l Applies the data set to all data that can be compensated and updates the plots in the
workspace.
l Applies the compensation to the curves of the train in the selected plot. If the plot contains
curves for other trains, System 1 does not apply the compensation to those curves.
l Displays the compensation value in the plot header.
l Displays a tooltip when you hover the mouse over a compensation. The tooltip contains
the name, speed, date and time of the compensation value.
Edit a Compensation Data Set

You can edit compensation data:
l For databases 18.2 or newer.

l If you have created the compensation data or have Equipment Health Admin rights.
1. To o pen the Select Compensation Data window, choose a method:

o Click the Compensation Data button and choose Stored Reference Set.
o Right-click the plot area and choose Compensation > Stored Reference Set.
2. Right click a data set, and choose Edit. System 1 displays the Compensation Data dialog
box.
4. Choose Set as Default to designate the data set as default. You can only designate one
data set per machine train as default.
422/532

o Vector
o Waveform
o Gap
o All
7. To freeze the current sample time, check Freeze. This option is selected by default for
previously stored samples of the data set.
8. Click Save.
Delete a Compensation Data Set

Users with these permissions can delete a compensation data set:
l The original user who created the data set

l The Machine Health administrator
In the Select Compensation Data dialog box, right-click a data set and choose Delete. System 1
removes the data set record from the grid and the reference data overlaid on the plot.
Setpoint Visibility
Enable or disable Setpoint Visibility.
When Setpoint Visibility is disabled, all setpoint lines are hidden.
To access setpoint visibility, choose a method:
l Click the Setpoint Visibility button on the plot toolbar.

l Right-click on the plot and choose Setpoint Visibility.
Use the Plot Toolbar

Click the arrow below Setpoint Visibility. Select an option:

423/532
Use the Plot Context Menu

Right-click on a plot and choose Setpoint Visibility. Select an option:

424/532
Spectral Band
View detailed trended spectral band information.
This feature is only available in the Spectrum and Stacked Spectrum plots.
To view spectral band information, choose a method:
l Click the Toggle Band Window button on the plot toolbar.

l Right-click on the plot and choose Spectral Band.
Examples
To display trended spectral band information alongside the associated spectrum plot for the
desired asset:
425/532
Each bar graph displays the sum of the energy within the band.
View Additional Plot Details

l To highlight the borders of all Spectral Bar Graphs on the spectrum plot, hover your mouse
over an empty region of the Spectral Band plot.
426/532
l To view the trend data and associated spectrum plot, hover your mouse over the spectral
bar graph:
427/532
A pane displays:
o The trend data used to generate the related bar graph.
o The current value within that region.
o The setpoint values, if any. The colors displayed correspond to the alert/alarm
severity.
The Spectral Band bar graph does not highlight a section of the associated spectrum
plot.
The measurements display the current value for each bar graph.
Protection Setpoints versus Condition Monitoring Setpoints

Setpoint line thickness is used to differentiate between protection setpoints and condition
monitoring setpoints.
Protection setpoints are displayed using a thicker line than condition monitoring setpoints:
Notice the different line thicknesses of the two level 4 (Danger) setpoints.
Overlay Fault Frequency

Overlay related fault frequencies associated with the active curve on the active plot. Only
available for these plots:
l Spectrum
l Timebase and Stacked Timebase
Display the next fault frequency for the selected curve.
Display the previous fault frequency for the selected curve.
To overlay fault frequencies, choose a method:
l Click the Fault Frequency button on the plot toobar.

l Right-click on the plot and choose Fault Frequency Mode.
To display valid fault frequency options, open the Plot Information drawer. It displays all
configured fault frequencies for the asset train from which the point was originated.
428/532
The results displayed by the Fault Frequency tool depend on running speed, bearing
information, and other asset properties. If the required data is not configured, a value cannot be
calculated or displayed.
Fault Frequency Overlay for Timebase Plots

System 1 overlays fault frequencies using the cursor position in a Timebase plot.
To view the frequency name and amplitude, hover the mouse over the fault frequency. Fault
frequency harmonics are not available for fault frequencies on Timebase and Stacked Timebase
plots.
In a Timebase plot, fault frequencies are placed on either sides of the cursors. The distance
between the basic cursor and fault frequency cursor is the time span derived from the fault
frequency converted using running speed to time domain.
Single Fault Frequency Mode

The plot overlays a single fault frequency and its harmonic markers associated with the active
curve on the active plot. By default, one fault frequency displays markers indicating up to the
tenth harmonic. To modify the number of harmonics displays, modify the defaults in
Preferences. Examples of individual fault frequencies are:
l BPFO
l BSF
l Line frequency
l Gear mesh
429/532
Standard Mode.
Previous and next fault frequency tools move through each of the fault frequencies with their
associated harmonics in the Plot Information dialog box.
Group Fault Frequency Mode

Select this mode to simultaneously overlay related fault frequencies that are associated with the
active curve on the active plot in the workspace. The default is group mode, which displays only
the fundamental for each frequency.
Previous and next fault frequency tools move through each of the fault frequencies groups in the
Plot Information dialog box.
Speed Group
The speed group overlays 1X markers for each speed associated with that asset. For example, for
a gearbox with two shafts two markers are displayed, indicating the speed for each shaft.
430/532
Bearing Groups (OB/NDE and IB/DE)

A bearing group is created for each bearing option configured. Each bearing can have up to
three options, and each of these options can have their own group. These groups include the
fault frequencies that are associated with the bearing type. If no bearing groups are displayed,
then none have been configured.
To configure bearings and bearing options, see Searching The Bearing Database and Advanced
Bearing Properties.
To configure bearings and bearing options, see the System 1 Configure Manual.
Standard Mode.
431/532
Asset Group
Each asset gets one asset frequency group, which includes fault frequencies particular to that
asset. If no asset frequencies are displayed, then not all of the properties required for fault
frequencies were configured. For example, some of the properties that can identify asset group
fault frequencies for a motor are line frequency, blade pass frequency, number of rotor bars, and
number of stator slots.
Standard Mode.
432/532
Navigate Fault Frequencies

To navigate through fault frequencies on a Spectrum plot:
1. Open a Spectrum plot for a dynamic measurement. System 1 displays fault frequencies of
all bearings configured for the train on which the selected measurement is present.
2. To view the fault frequencies, open the Plot Information drawer and choose Fault
Frequency Selection.
3. Press F to navigate through fault frequencies of the bearing and overlay the selected fault
frequency on the plot.
4. Press Shift + F to navigate through fault frequencies of the bearing backwards and
overlay the selected fault frequency on the plot.
Keyboard Shortcuts
Plot Fault Frequencies
Next fault frequency
Previous fault frequency
Toggle fault frequency on/off
Toggle between Single or Group mode
Toggle Harmonics on/off
Plot Diagnostic Report
Generate a Plot Diagnostic Report.
Create a Plot Diagnostic Report to document a problem and quickly capture relevant
information. Create the plots that provide the necessary information and relevant data. You can
then modify the .DOC file created, add recommended actions, diagnosis, and event descriptions,
and customize it as needed.
Create a Diagnostic Report

To create a Diagnostic Report:
433/532
1. In the Display workspace, select the asset you want to create a report about.
2. Select the Plots tab and create applicable plots. Or select the Events tab view and double-
click on the alarm you want to document, which displays related plots. Selected plots
appear in the report just as they are displayed in System 1.
3. (Optional) Modify the Mini-Trend Bar and select a date range.
4. When the display represents what you want in the report, click Generate Diagnostic
Report . The Diagnostic Report dialog box is displayed.
5. Click Create. The report is generated in Microsoft Word. Microsoft Word 2003 is the
minimum version supported. Microsoft Word 2007 or later is recommended. If Word is
installed, the report is opened. Otherwise, you are prompted to save it.
System 1 remembers previous Diagnostic Report options for future reports.
Customize the Report

To complete your report, customize your report with personal information as needed:
l Work Request Number

l Work Order Number
l Recommended Actions
434/532
l Event Description
l Customize the footer with name, title and email address
4.5 Display Plot Options

Display Plot Headers
To display plot header controls, position the mouse cursor in the plot header. Use the buttons to
control the number of plot headers displayed:
435/532
Displays all plot headers

Displays a maximum of four plot
headers
Hides all plot headers
Manage Plot Records

A plot record is a dynamic report that is saved as part of a machine's case history. When you re-
launch a Plot Record from Case History, all plot types, tools, time ranges, and measurements
that were part of the plot view are reopened, enabling you to continue investigating a machine
condition or for other team members to pick up where you ended.
Create a Plot Record

To save a set of plots as a record:

2. Choose Plots. Select or create the plots you want to save as a record.
3. Right-click the on the plot tab header and choose Save as Plot Record. The Plot Record
dialog box is displayed. You may need to scroll to the right to view all of the Properties.
436/532
4. Enter a plot record name.

5. (Optional) Assign an analyst to the Plot Record.
6. (Optional) Enter a description for the Plot Record.
7. In the Details pane, select one or more plots to be included in the plot record.
8. Click Save. The Plot Records is created.
You can save a set of plots for an asset or a node. A plot set may contain one or more plots.
View a Plot Set

To view a Plot Record:

2. Choose Case History > Plot Records. Select the plot record you want to view.
o Right-click on a plot record and choose Open in New Window.
o Double-click on the plot record.
The plot record is displayed in a new window.

o When viewing plots in an external window, the time span applies only to those plots.
o To restore the plot widow to the main window, drag the window over the main
window dock location.
o If the asset selection has changed in the main windows after the plot tab was moved
to an external window, you can not return the external tab to the main dialog box.
Sort Plot Records

To sort plot records, click a column header:
l Once to sort in Ascending order.

l Again to sort in descending order.
l A third time to revert back to no sorting.
437/532
l To sort multiple columns consecutively, press +click to select multiple column
headers.
Copy Plot Records

To copy plot records content to third-party applications, select one or more plot records and
press .
Delete a Plot Record

To delete a Plot Record:
1. From the Plot Records tab, select one or more Plot Records. To select multiple notes, press
+click or +click.
2. Right-click and choose Delete. You can also press .
3. To confirm, click OK.
Properties
Column Heading Description
Path Hierarchy path of the asset
Machine The machine to which a plot is tied
Record Name Plot record name
Analyst Analyst name
Description User comment
Number of Sub
Number of plot tabs
Tabs
Created Date The date and time the plot record was created
Created By User who created the plot record
Display Plots in External Window

You can liberate plots from the main window and display them in an external window or on an
additional monitor. You must have at least two plot sets displayed under a Plots tab.
To display plots in an external window, choose a method:
l Select Case History > Plot Record and double-click on a plot record.

l Select Plots. Select a plot tab header and drag it outside the Plot Set tab region.
To restore an external plot window to the main window, choose a method:
438/532
l To close a Plot Record displayed in an external window, press ALT+F4 or click the [X] button.
l To restore an external plot window to the main plot window, select the external Plot Tab
header and drag it over the main Plot Set window.
You can add existing plot tabs to an external plot window. Liberated windows are not synced to
the hierarchy in the main dialog box. If you select a different asset in the Machine or Asset
hierarchy, you can not restore the plot(s) in the external window to the main window.
As with all plots, you can create plot sets and plot records.
Add Measurements
To add a measurement to an external plot window, press . The Add Measurements
dialog box is displayed. New measurements only apply to the external window.
When you add measurements in the main measurement hierarchy, they do not apply to
external windows.
Unsupported Plot Features

These features are not supported in external plot windows:
l Reset Plot Session

l Managed Enabled Plot Set
Filter Machine States

When displaying plots, you can filter data displayed for a specific plot, or globally, based on the
configured machine state. You can also use color to view machine state plot data. For details,
see Color Date by State.
State-based filtering is only available if you are using PostgreSQL as data historian. It is
not available for Polar, Bode and Shaft Center Line plots.
To filter data by machine states:
1. From the Display workspace, choose the Plots tab.

o To filter a single plot, right-click on a plot and choose Filter Data > All Data or
Select States. If you choose Select States, the Select States dialog box is displayed.
Select the machine operating states you want to display. Click Select.
o To filter all plots, click the filter icon to the right of the Mini-Trend Bar. Choose the
Select States option.
439/532
a. The Select States dialog box is displayed. Select the machine operating states
you want to display in a specific color.
b. To disable filtered states, click the filter icon again. The filter state defaults
to All Data.
2. Filtered states are displayed in the plot header.
To save filtered state plots, see user-defined plot sets.
User-Defined Plot Sets

When you create a new plot set, it is available to all users of the database by default. Each user
can enable one or more user-defined plot sets from the list of available ones. Enabled plot sets
appear in the user's workspace. You can have a maximum of 50 enabled plot sets per plot
session.
Create or Modify Plot Sets

To create or modify plot sets:
1. Select a plot tab and right-click. Choose Define as New Plot Set. The Defined Plot Set
2. In the General panel, enter a Plot set name.
3. (Optional) Assign an analyst to the plot set.
4. (Optional) Enter a description for the plot set.
5. In the Details panel, choose Apply To and choose the component to which the new plot
set applies:
o Machine Instance. The new plot set applies only to the selected machines in the
hierarchy.
o Related Templates. The new plot set applies to all sibling instances of a parent
template.
6. In the Details panel, choose Time Setting. For details, see Plot Data Range.
7. if you want to designate the new plot set as the last enabled default plot set for applicable
machines, check Enable Plot Set on Applicable Machines. If you have the maximum of 50
open plot sets, this option is disabled.
440/532
8. To immediately enable the new plot set, check Reset Plot Workspace. Otherwise, System 1
applies the new options next time you open the database. When viewing user-defined
plots in an external window, you cannot reset the plot workspace. When you enable this
option, the enabled plot set is displayed in your workspace.
9. Click Save.
Manage Plot Sets

You can customize your workspace by enabling or deleting user-defined plot sets. When you
enable a plot set, it is displayed in your workspace.
To select one or more plot sets from the list of available plot sets:
1. Select a plot tab and right-click.

a. To modify an existing plot set, choose Save Existing Plot Set. The Defined Plot Set
dialog box is displayed. Modify the plot set data as needed. Click Save.
b. To enable a plot set, choose Manage Enabled Plot Sets. The Enabled Plot Set dialog
box is displayed.
2. To multiselect plots, use and .
3. To delete a plot set, right-click on a plot set in the Available Plot Set list and choose Delete.
You must have Machine Health Admin rights to delete a plot set.
4. To enable a plot set, select an Available Plot Set and add it to the list of selected plot sets. If
you have 50 open plot sets, this option is disabled.
5. In the Applicability panel, choose Apply To and choose the component to which the new
plot set applies:
o Machine Instance. The new plot set applies only to the selected machines in the
hierarchy.
o Related Templates. The new plot set applies to all sibling instances of a parent
template.
6. To immediately enable the new plot set, check Reset Plot Workspace. Otherwise, System 1
applies the new options next time you open the database. When viewing user-defined
plots in an external window, you cannot reset the plot workspace. When this option is
checked, the enabled plot set is displayed in your workspace.
7. Click Save.
Control Plot Display

Active Cursor Information
The cursor readout information located on the right-bottom of every plot session displays the
active cursor's location. This information is the same as in the Cursor Readout pane, but when
many plots are displayed, this is an easier method to view the cursor value.
441/532
A plot can have multiple curves and up to two cursors, but only details of the currently selected
cursor are displayed in the cursor readout corner.
Zoom and Scale Plots

To zoom in on a plot, use either your mouse scroll wheel or a zoom dialog box.
Zoom In or Out With Zoom Window
To zoom in at a left-click the mouse, hold, and drag down diagonally to the right, then
new scale release. The plot is re-sized to fit the new scale.
To un-zoom left-click the mouse at the lower right side, hold, and drag up and left, then
release. The original plot scale is restored.
To undo one press

zoom step
Use Scroll Wheel to Center Zoom

You can use the mouse scroll wheel to center zoom on certain plots:
l On X-axis only in Full-Spectrum mode.

l On Spectrum, Stacked-spectrum, Cascade, and Waterfall plots in Full Spectrum mode.
Rescale Axes With Scroll Wheel

1. Select the plot you want to modify.
2. Hover over the vertical or horizontal axis you want to rescale.
3. To zoom in, scroll mouse wheel pushing forward.
4. To zoom out, scroll mouse wheel pulling back.
5. To reset zoom to the default, press .
Select Plot Curves
442/532
There are several ways to select points on a plot. The active plot is highlighted in the plot header
and the Plot Information Drawer.
You can control the number of plot headers displayed. See Display Plot Headers.
Single Grid Plot

To modify curve activity in single grid plots:
l Select the colored box or machine/train name in the plot header.

l Open the Plot Information Drawer, and select a curve. The point displayed in bold is the
active curve on the plot.
Stacked Plots
To change curve activity of stacked plots:
l Click the colored box or machine/train name in the plot header.

l Open the Plot Information Drawer and click on a curve.
l Click within the plotting grid of a stacked plot, including left and right clicks.
l Click the Y axis of a particular curve.
l Perform a rubber-band operation in the curve.
You cannot modify curve activity of an overlaid plot type.
443/532
Stacked plots appear only if the grouping method is not by point. All plots of measurements at
the point level are divided into separate plot screens and not stacked onto a single plot.
Change Horizontal Plot Axis Units

On the timebase and spectrum plots, you can switch the units of the plot along the horizontal
axis by double-clicking the units on the bottom.
On a Timebase Plot
To toggle display of horizontal units from ms/div to revs/div, double-click or press . The
cursor readout window reflects the change in units for the cursor position.
On a Spectrum Plot
To toggle display of horizontal units between Hz/div, X/div, and kcpm/div, double-click or press
. The cursor readout window reflects the change in units for the cursor position.
444/532
Microcursor Position Control

Only applies to Spectrum, Waterfall, and Cascade Plots.
Microcursor position control enables you to move the active cursor shorter distances and to
more accurately position the cursor on the active plotted curve.
Microcursor position control is linearly interpolated between the plotted measured points,
enabling you to read plot values between measurements for greater plot analysis.
Microcursor Position Control Shortcut Keys
Move active cursor to previous micro-position
Move active cursor to next micro-position
Microcursor position control is linearly interpolated between the plotted measured points,
enabling you to read plot values between measurements for greater plot analysis.
445/532
Cursor
Microcursor Position Control Applied
Type
Basic
Moves the fundamental frequency cursor only.
Cursor
Harmonic Moves the fundamental frequency and updates the location of the harmonic
Cursors cursors in relation to the new fundamental frequency location.
Depends on which cursor is selected:
Sideband l Microcursor position control moves the fundamental frequency and

Cursors update the location of the sideband cursors in relation to the new
fundamental frequency location.
l Microcursor position control moves the sideband width only.
Depends on which cursor is selected:
Harmonic l Microcursor position control on a fundamental frequency moves the

and fundamental frequency and updates the location of both the harmonic
Sideband and sideband cursors in relation to the new fundamental frequency
Cursors location.
l Microcursor position control on a sideband cursor moves the sideband
width only on both the fundamental and all harmonic frequencies.
Plot Information Drawer

Each plot contains a tabbed drawer that displays Plot Information. To open, click the plot drawer
handle.
Plot Information
The Plot Drawer displays information specific to each plot type:
446/532
Plot Type Plot Information
Trend and Stacked Trend Plots Machine Information
Trend Plots Machine Information
Bode Plots Machine Information
Polar Plots Machine Information
Shaft Centerline Plots Machine Information
Machine Information
Spectrum and Stacked Spectrum Plots Sample Information
Fault Freq Selection
Machine Information
Waterfall Plots
Sample Information
Machine Information
Timebase Plots
Sample Information
Machine Information
Orbit Plots
Sample Information
Machine Information
Rotor Stator Plot
Sample Information
Machine Information
Air Gap Plot
Sample Information
Machine Information
The list of points represents each curve on the plot. Click the triangle next to each point to view
machine details. A question mark is displayed for a property which has not been configured. The
point displayed in bold is the active curve on the plot.
447/532
Sample Information
The list of points represents each curve on the plot. Click the triangle next to each point to view
configuration details about each sample. The point displayed in bold is the active curve on the
plot.
Fault Frequency
For each Fault Frequency Mode, the Plot Information drawer displays valid fault frequency
options that can be displayed on the plot. These options and the list of available fault
frequencies depend on the active curve. All configured fault frequencies for the asset train from
which the point was originated are displayed.
l Click the triangle next to each asset to view fault frequency information for that asset. This
illustration below depicts a Vacuum Blower (Man).
l To display the adjacent fault frequency data in the Plot Information drawer, click the Next
or Previous fault frequency tools in the Plot Toolbar.
l You can select up to six fault frequencies to overlay at the same time.
448/532
l Hover the mouse over the fundamental fault frequency to see details about the fault
frequency.
Select the Active Curve

To select which curve is active:
1. View the Machinery Information or Sample Information in the Plot Information drawer.
2. Click on one of the points displayed. The new active curve is displayed in bold. All other
curves appear in default text.
Drag and Drop Measurements
449/532
To compare similar measurements of different assets, you can drag and drop any component
from the Machines or Devices hierarchy onto a plot.
To compare similar measurements of different assets:
1. Open a plot. See Display Plots.

2. Drag and drop a component from the Machines or Devices hierarchy onto the plot. The
Add Measurements dialog box displays all compatible measurements for the plot type.
3. From the Hierarchy pane of the Add Measurements dialog, select one or more
components.
4. From the Measurements pane of the Add Measurements dialog, select one or more
measurements.
5. From the Add to drop-down list box, select the plots to which the measurements are
added:
o Active plot. If the measurement is compatible with that plot, the measurement is
added to the plot onto which the measurement is dropped.
o Associated plots. if the plots do not already exist, for the added measurements,
System 1 creates new plots using the primary and secondary plot groupings.
o All plots. The measurement is added to all open plots with which the measurement
is compatible.
6. Choose Add. The measurements is added to one or more plots. The plots display the
measurements superimposed on top of each other:
450/532
To bring a measurement to the front, select it in a plot header:
Select or Add Plot Samples

You can use the plot header to select new sample curves or add multiple sample curves to plots.
To add multiple sample curves, choose a method.
Use the Sample Date and Time

1. Click the down arrow next to the sample date and time section in the plot header.
451/532
2. In the drop-down list of samples, click the white + on the right side of the sample curve you
wish to add to the plot:
New sample curves can only be added from the original parent curve. You can not
select a child curve to add more sample curves.
3. The Sample Select dialog displays all samples:
4. Enable samples you want to add to the plot. Click Update.

5. To remove a sample, click the blue + on the right side of the sample you wish to remove
from the plot:
452/532
If you click the red X of a parent curve, all associated child curves are deleted.
Use the Plot Header

1. Right-click the sample date and time section in the plot header.
2. Click Add Samples menu option:
3. The Sample Select dialog displays all samples:
4. Enable samples you want to add to the plot. Click Update.
You can select a maximum of 12 samples.
Plot Preferences
453/532
To access plot preferences:
1. Open a plot.
2. Right-click on the plot area.
3. Choose Plot Preferences. The Preferences dialog box and the Plots pane is displayed.
For complete details, see Preferences - Plots in online help.
4.6 Select Plot Data Range

Mini-Trend Bar
Use the Mini-Trend Bar to selects the time range to be displayed within a plot.
Time Range
Select a time range for the plot. The default range is four months.
Range Description
Start/End of Mini-Trend Range The current start and end time of the Mini-Trend Bar is
applied to the plot set.
Present Time Minus Mini-Trend The current time less than the value of the Mini-Trend Bar
Range is applied to the plot set.
Latest Sample Minus Mini-Trend Obtains the time stamp of last sample found in the plot
Range set and sets that as the end date. Subtracts the value of
the Mini-Trend Bar from the sample end date and applies
it to the plot set.
Current Values The values displayed in the Current Values Mode
are applied to the plot set when displayed, overriding all

other values.
454/532
Modify the Mini-Trend Bar Range

Based on what you select in the measurement pane, trended variables are displayed in blue.
Any changes you make to the Mini-Trend Bar apply only to the plots displayed in the current plot
window.
To ... Then...
scroll the range selector select it and drag it left or right.
modify the selected range to match right-click in the range selector and choose Auto-size
the data range displayed Mini-Trend.
modify the selected date range drag the end bars of the range selector.
set the number of displayed hours, enter a number in the user value field.
days, weeks, months, or years
view a specific machine state see Filter Machine State.
The Mini-Trend Bar displays a maximum of 5000 samples per curve.
Right-click Mini-Trend Options

To select these options:
Right-click and choose: Desciption
Apply Time Span to All Plot Tabs Apply the current plot's time range to all plot tabs.
(Alternatively, press .)
Set Custom Span Displays the Custom Time Span dialog box. Select a Start
Time and End Time.
Revert to Default Span The default range is four months.
Move Span to Present Time Scroll the range selector to the current time.
Auto-Size Mini-Trend Modify the selected range to match the data range
displayed.
When viewing plots in an external dialog box, the time span applies only to those plots.
Plot Group and Stack Options
455/532
Group and Stack Plot Options

Use plot display options to:
l Group and sort plots.

l Select a plot grid.
l Scroll through plot windows.
Plot Group and Sort Options

Displays a single plot with all
Group By Train
points overlaid onto the plot.
Displays plots for each machine,
Group By Machine
overlaying each point onto the
Case
plots.
Displays all measurement in
recip trains by the throw
Group By Throw
component in a single plot
window.
Displays plots for each bearing,
Group By Bearing overlaying each point onto the
plots.
Displays individual plots for
Group By Point
each point.
Use the primary grouping
Secondary Group By
options to display a plot for all
None
selected measurements.
456/532

Secondary Group By options to display a plot for all
Measurement selected measurements with
the same unit type.
Secondary Group By options to display a plot for all
Unit Type selected measurements with
the same measurement type.
Sort by Point Displays plots by asset point.
Sort by Plot Type Displays plots by plot type.
Display the selected number of
Group Plots Per Page
plots in each page.
l If you choose Group by Bearing while either Spectrum or Timebase plots selected, System
1 groups into one Spectrum and one Timebase plot per bearing using the selected
variables.
l If one or more variables are incompatible with the first variable added, the incompatible
values are not displayed.
l Adding plots of a plot type that supports grouping creates a plot for each asset of the
selected grouping level and plot each selected variable onto that plot for each
descendent.
Waterfall and Cascade plots do not support grouping.
Group By Train
To group plots by train:
1. Click the Group By button in the plot footer. Select the Group by Train option.
2. Grouping by Train creates a single plot with all points overlaid onto the plot, as in the
457/532
example below.
Group By Machine Case

To group plots by Machine Case:
1. Click the Group By button in the plot footer. Select the Group by Machine Case option.
2. Group by Machine Case creates plots for each machine, overlaying each point onto the
458/532
plots, as in the example below.
Group By Throw
To group plots by throw:
1. Click the Group By button in the plot footer. Select the Group by Throw option.
2. Grouping by Throw groups all measurement in recip trains by the throw component in a
459/532
single plot window, as in the example below.
Group By Bearing
To group plots by bearing:
1. Click the Group By button in the plot footer. Select the Group by Bearing option.
2. Group by Bearing creates plots for each bearing, overlaying each point onto the plots, as
460/532
in the example below.
Group By Point
To group plots by Point:
1. Click the Group By button in the plot footer. Select the Group by Point option.
461/532
2. Group by Plot creates individual plots for each point, as in the example below
Sort Plots by Point or Plot Type
Sort by Plot Point or Plot Type are only available for Timebase, Trend, and Spectrum plot
types.
To select Plot by Point or Plot Type:
1. In the plot footer, select the Plot Sorting Tool:

2. Select either Plots by Point or Plots by Plot Type.
462/532
Plots are sorted based on these criteria.
Selected Plot Available

Sort by Point Sort by Plot Type
Order Points
MIB_H Timebase MIB_H Timebase
MIB_H Trend MIB_V Timebase
MIB_H Spectrum MIB_A Timebase
Timebase MIB_H MIB_V Timebase MIB_H Trend
Trend MIB_V MIB_V Trend MIB_V Trend
Spectrum MIB_A MIB_V Spectrum MIB_A Trend
MIB_A Timebase MIB_H Spectrum
MIB_A Trend MIB_V Spectrum
MIB_A Spectrum MIB_A Spectrum
4.7 Display Asset Status
View Machine and Device Status
The Status tab displays machine and device status.
List View
1. Choose Display > Status > List.
2. Complete one of the following:
o For the Machines hierarchy, select the database, asset group, train, or asset you
want to evaluate.
o For the Devices hierarchy, select the device group or individual device you want to
evaluate. Alternatively, view the status of all instruments by selecting the Devices top
level in the hierarchy.
Column headers depend on the hierarchy you selected. See List Tab.
Filter List View

You can filter the list view using the available values for one or more columns including machine
train templates. Machine templates are listed using the custom template name, or by default as
"Machine N Template" or "Train Template". You can filter the machine trains using specific
templates by machine template columns.
463/532
When you upgrade from a previous version of System 1, new columns are not displayed until to
choose to display them. For details, see Customize List View in online help. For example, you can
filter alarm levels to view only level 4 alarms for certain points.
To filter the list view:
1. Select Filter from a column header. System 1 displays a list of available values for the
corresponding status.
2. Select one or more values from the list. System 1 updates the List View grid to display only
the selected information.
Double-Click Behaviors
Double-clicking a row in the grid changes the view to reflect the hierarchy level of the row you
clicked.
For example, if you are currently looking at the list view of a group hierarchy selection and
double-click an asset, the asset is selected in the hierarchy, and the list view changes to reflect
the columns of an asset level selection.
If you double click a measurement displayed from a point level hierarchy selection, the display
changes to Split Mode with the list view on top and the Plots and Bar Graph tabs on the bottom.
464/532
The Plots tab reflects the previous plot session and add a Trend plot of the selected
measurement.
For example, if the last plot session displayed Timebase plots in Quick Plots, both Timebase and
Trend plots are displayed.
Copy to Clipboard
You can copy list entries to the clipboard by right-clicking and selecting Copy.
You can select multiple entries for copying by either ctrl-clicking individual rows or shift-clicking
a range of rows.
Asset Diagrams
465/532
System 1 displays a diagram with overall values and the colored priority status for each point.
Alarm levels are depicted by color and number for each point.
When you change the units in the preferences dialog, System 1 converts the overall values and
units displayed in the diagram grid. See Preferences - Units in online help.
View Diagrams/Plots in Split Mode

Double-click the asset or point in the diagram to change to Split Mode with the diagram on top
and the Plots tab on bottom.
The Plots tab reflects the previous plot session.
466/532
For example, if the last plot session displayed Timebase plots in Quick Plots, the same session is
displayed.
Diagram Zoom Control

Within the diagram display, you can zoom in or zoom out by pressing the CTRL key and using the
mouse scroll. This feature works in both the Display and Configure workspaces.
Zoom for HMI view
Zoom In on the HMI view in Display or Configuration workspaces.
Zoom Out on the HMI view in Display or Configuration workspaces.
Copy Diagram to Clipboard

You can copy the diagram to the clipboard by right-clicking the diagram and selecting Copy.
HMI View Icons
The Status properties displays all assets under your selected group or area in the Asset
Hierarchy. All plot and event data is based on what is selected in the status view.
Select HMI View Icon
Select the HMI view icon that represents the part of the plant that you want to view. The
background is highlighted.
Sub-Select Asset Icon
You can select a single asset in the train by clicking on a specific icon. The selected asset is
indicated by a dashed line.
Asset sub-selection only works for trains of two assets.
467/532
Synchronize with Selected Asset

Asset Group Update
After an asset tile is selected, the Assets hierarchy updates by showing a dark blue bar over the
selected asset:
Furthermore, selecting a single asset in a status tile highlights the selected asset:
Measurement Panes Update
The measurement panes update with relevant measurements based on the selected asset or
instrument location. These variables can then be selected for plot presentation.
Plot Display Update
The Plots tab updates to show plots associated with the selected asset or instrument location.
468/532
Event Display Update
The Events tab also updates to show alarm and system events associated with the selected
asset or instrument location.
Sort HMI Status Tiles
View HMI Status Tiles

To view HMI status tiles:

2. Select Status > Overview. The Status Tiles are displayed.
3. To view details, double-click on a tile. The Status > List tab is displayed.
Sort HMI View Status Tiles

To sort HMI view status tiles:

2. Select Status > Overview. The Status Tiles are displayed. The instruments are displayed by
default in the same order as in the Machine hierarchy.
3. Click the Sort By drop-down list box. Click on the list order you prefer.
Sort By Description
Name Display an alphabetical listing of the selected group of tiles.
Severity Display the most critical assets or instruments first in your selected group.
Hierarchy Position Display the assets or instruments in the same order as the hierarchy.
View HMI Status Tiles State

Depending on their state, HMI status tiles are displayed using a specific color. Alarm levels are
depicted by color and number for each point.
469/532
Diagram View
The Diagram tab displays status tiles or HMI views for the selection from the hierarchy.
Machines Hierarchy
When you select a database or asset, the train is displayed. Asset diagrams display at the train
level and below.
Devices Hierarchy
To view status tiles, select an asset in the Machines hierarchy or a device in the Devices
hierarchy.
1. Choose Display workspace, then Devices.

2. Select the Status tab.
3. Select the Diagram subtab.
4. Complete one of the following:
o In the Machines hierarchy, select the database, asset group, train, or asset you want
to display.
o In the Devices hierarchy, select the device group or individual device you want to
evaluate. Alternatively, view the status of all instruments by selecting the Devices top
level in the hierarchy.
For details on alarm level colors, see Event and Status indicators.
Set Assets as Normal
470/532
In the Machine hierarchy, you can create equipment health records for one or more selected
rows to indicate your assets are healthy.
To create new reviews for assets:
1. Right-click on an asset in the Machine hierarchy.

2. Choose Machine Management > Set As Normal. System 1 adds a review to the asset for
the selected assets and sets the following values in each health record:
o Priority is set to Good.
o There are no comments or fault conditions.
o The last reviewed date is set to the current day and time.
Review Fault Conditions
Create a Review of Fault Conditions

To:
l Apply fault conditions to a machine.

l Review priorities.
l Add comments to facilitate efficient condition monitoring review cycles.

2. Select Display > Status > List.
3. Right-click on the Asset in the Machines hierarchy for which you want to view faults.
471/532
4. Choose Review Faults. The Review Faults dialog box is displayed.
Fault Conditions Pane

Use the Fault Conditions pane to define fault conditions for the selected hierarchy.
a. Click the Add button on the upper right side of the pane.
b. The Location and Condition columns display information for the selected asset and
possible conditions.
o The Location drop-down list box displays the selected machine as well as any
children to enable you to choose the exact machine location of the fault
condition.
o The Condition drop-down list box displays a predefined list of fault conditions.
Details Pane
472/532
The Details pane displays:

o Priority - Select the priority of the machine review.
o Comments - Add any comments for the machine review.
o Flag for Next Review - Choose After Set Time to flag the machine for another
review or Do Not Flag to not flag for review. If you choose After Set Time, enter the
number and select the Days, Weeks, Months, or Years to wait until next review.
5. Click Save. The review is saved.
Multiselect and Compare Data

You can compare data of the similar machine trains and group the measurements by train,
location, machine case, or bearing.
To compare the measurements of two to six machine trains:
1. Choose Display workspace, then Status.

2. Choose Split Mode.
3. In Enterprise and Group mode, use Status List to select two or more trains (up to a
maximum of six). Trended variables are updated based on the number of assets selected.
4. In the Plot footer, choose Group by Train.
The Plots tab displays the selected machine trains.
5. To group measurements by location:

a. Multiselect machine trains.
b. Modify Plot Preferences. Choose Group Measurement By Location.
473/532
c. In the Plot footer, choose Group By Point.
The machine train locations that you have mapped are grouped by point. System 1
displays similar locations on same machines in a single plot. All other locations are
displayed in an individual plot.
If similar locations are not found, the measurements are displayed in a separate plot.
For example, you can multiselect five motor pump machine trains containing a bearing
configured for X and Y points.
a. Select a trend plot for all X points.

b. Choose Group Measurement By Location and set grouping as Goup by Point.
c. All X points of the bearing from all five machine trains are plotted in a single trend plot.
Bar Graph Tasks
Use the Bar Graph tab to:
l View Bar Graphs

l View Alarm Setpoint Limits
l Verify Current Data
View Bar Graphs
To display Bar Graphs, you must have an Advanced or better license.
To view bar graphs:
1. Ensure you are in the Display workspace.

2. Click the Bar Graph tab.
3. Select a train or asset in the Machines hierarchy or device, card, or channel point in the
Devices hierarchy.
4. Select one or more Trended Variables.
Rearrange Bar Graphs
You can change the displayed order by dragging and dropping individual bar graphs.
474/532
View Alarm Setpoint Limits
To view the alarm setpoint limits for alert and danger states, hover your cursor over a setpoint
line for the desired channel reading. Alarm setpoint lines are color-coded:
l Yellow - alert setpoint

l Red - danger setpoint
If upper and lower limits are set for either alert or danger setpoints, an arrow is displayed
designating which setpoint line is the upper limit and the lower limit:
Verify Current Data
To verify an OK status of data collection, verify that the time stamp for each channel is current.
475/532
Time stamps that are out of date signify the last time the channel received good data. A
common reason for data to not be updated would be that the Keyphasor* went Not OK. Check
the associated speed channel to verify.
If you have selected 200 or more points to plot bar graphs, time stamps in current data
may update after several seconds.
Event and Status Indicators

To view machine and device status, see View Status.
System 1 assigns severity levels one through four to each event and status. Level four is the most
severe. Alarm levels are color coded, and are propagated upward through the Assets and
Instruments hierarchies.
Instrumentation and Machine Alarms

To differentiate alarm levels, Instrumentation (Not OK and hardware faults) and Machine
(protection and condition monitoring) alarms use two different color palettes. When an asset or
instrument returns to a normal status after triggering an unacknowledged alarm event, the
alarm status indicator circle displays a normal green circle outlined by the color of the triggered
alarm level.
More critical alarms are given precedence when displayed in the Device or Machine
hierarchy, and Instrumentation Alarms take precedence over Machine Alarms.
476/532
Asset Instrumentation
Alarm Post Alarm Status

Post Status Alarm Description
Status Status Status Name
Level 4 Machinery damage may be

imminent.
Level 3 Prompt operator action is

required.
Level 2 The situation that is not yet

critical but needs to be
investigated in a timely
manner.
Level 1 The alarm should not be

ignored but can be
investigated after higher
priority alarms.
Events Tab
The shape and size of each alarm circle in the Events tab indicates the alarm status.
Active Cleared
Unacknowledged
Acknowledged
Device Not Communicating

When a device fails to communicate with System 1, a severity 3 Instrumentation Alarm (in blue
color) is displayed in the Bar Graph and HMI view, and propagated to the Machine and Device
Hierarchy. Measurements in the human-machine interface (HMI) are displayed as N/A.
477/532
Configuration Out-of-Date
When you modify a device configuration, and have not yet synced the configuration to the
device, the General > Device properties displays a Configuration Out-of-Date status. A severity 3
Instrumentation Alarm (in blue) is propagated throughout the Display workspace.
Measurements in the human-machine interface (HMI) are displayed as N/A.
478/532
To resolve this, in the properties tab header, click Sync Config.
No Alarm Indicators
When no alarms are present, status colors indicate system and configuration information.
479/532
Status Colors Status Name Description
No Data If no data has been collected for a measurement, the

Collected status icon is white.
If the data collected for a measurement is not triggering

Normal
an alarm, the status icon is green.
If no setpoints are configured for a measurement, the

No Setpoints
status icon is light green.
Disabled If a measurement is disabled, the status icon is gray.
4.8 Manage Events
Manage Alarm Events
System 1 assigns severity levels one through four to each event and status alarm. Level four is the
most severe. Alarm levels are color coded, and are propagated upward through the Assets and
Instruments hierarchies.
To view event and status indicators, see View Status. In addition, unacknowledged alarms are
displayed in bold to differentiate them from acknowledged alarms.
The events displayed are filtered based on what is selected in the Assets or Device hierarchies.
View Alarm Events

To view alarm events:
1. Choose the Display workspace, then Events > Alarms.

2. Navigate to the hierarchy entry you want to view:
o Using the Status tab and Selecting Asset Icons, or
o Using the Assets and Devices hierarchies.
After you select a hierarchy node or asset, the application synchronizes plots and
statuses associated with the selection.
Export Alarms from Events List to CSV

Export Alarm Events that have occurred over a selected time range from System 1 as a .CSV file.
These alarm events can be used as part of monthly site reporting to determine overall Unit
Health.
To export alarm from event list to a .CSV file:
480/532
1. Choose the Display workspace, then Events > Alarms.

2. Click Export . The Time Range dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the desired time range.
4. Click Select. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
5. Navigate to the location where you want to save the .CSV file. Click Save.
481/532
6. Use a third-party application to open the file, view alarm event information, and complete
analysis per site reporting process.
Filter Events
To organize events, you can filter events based on alarm levels.
To filter events:
1. From the Display workspace, click Events tab.

2. Click Alarms subtab.
3. Select the alarm level from 1 to 4 from the buttons on the upper right side of the Alarms
subtab. This tool filters all events based on your selection.
o Level 1 alarms
o Level 2 alarms
o Level 3 alarms (alert)
o Level 4 alarms (danger)
This sorting can be helpful when selecting alarms to acknowledge.
You can configure setpoints for various measurement levels in System 1. When values cross
these thresholds, alarms are triggered.
Asset and Instrumentation Alarms

To differentiate alarm levels, Instrumentation (Not OK and hardware faults) and Machine
(protection and condition monitoring) alarms use two different color palettes. When an asset or
instrument returns to a normal status after triggering an unacknowledged alarm event, the
alarm status indicator circle displays a normal green circle outlined by the color of the triggered
alarm level.
More critical alarms are given precedence when displayed in the Device or Machine
hierarchy, and Instrumentation Alarms take precedence over Machine Alarms.
482/532
Asset Instrumentation
Alarm Post Alarm Status

Post Status Alarm Description
Status Status Status Name
Level 4 Machinery damage may be

imminent.
Level 3 Prompt operator action is

required.
Level 2 The situation that is not yet

critical but needs to be
investigated in a timely
manner.
Level 1 The alarm should not be

ignored but can be
investigated after higher
priority alarms.
Acknowledged and Unacknowledged Alarm Indicators

Acknowledged and unacknowledged alarm indicators change in size and color depending on
the area of System 1 user interface that is displayed.
Events Tab
The shape and size of each alarm circle in the Events tab indicates the alarm status.
Active Cleared
Unacknowledged
Acknowledged
Status Tab
The Status tab uses the same alarm indicators as the Events tab but adds new indicators for
non-alarm statuses.
Status Propagation Priority

Each status is propagated based on alarm priority. For example, if an asset has no data
collected for a measurement but no setpoints are configured, the measurement is propagated
a status of No Setpoints instead of No Data Collected.
483/532
Priority Status Name
1 Disabled
2 Level 4 - Instrumentation Alarm
3 Level 4 - Asset Alarm
10 Normal
11 No Setpoints
12 No Data Collected
Acknowledge Alarms
When a problem exists and you have already taken steps to mitigate the issue, you can
acknowledge the alarm events.
You can acknowledge alarms using either the Events tab or the Status tab.
Acknowledge Events from Events tab
To acknowledge events from Events tab

2. Select Events > Alarms. Events that you can acknowledge are displayed in bold. Events
that you can not acknowledge and events that have already been acknowledged are
displayed in plain text
You cannot acknowledge Alarms using the System Health subtab.
3. (Optional) To sort the event list, click on the column headers or filter by level.
484/532
4. Select the alarm event(s) you want to acknowledge. To select events, choose a method:
To Select: Press Description
Individual Events
Selects one event at a time.
Separated Selects events that are not next to each other in

Individual Events the events list.
Multiple Events Selects all events in between and including the

first event clicked and the last event clicked.
All Events Selects all events currently loaded in the events

list.
a. To acknowledge the selected alarms, choose a method:
o Click Acknowledge Selected Events in the upper right side
o Right-click and choose Acknowledge Alarms.
The acknowledged alarms are displayed in plain text.
Acknowledge Events from Status tab
You can acknowledge Event within the Status tab using either the List tab and the status tiles in
the Overview tab.
List Tab
The List tab notifies you of new events using three methods:
Method Description
Status and Event Indicators The shape and color of the status indicator circle changes
when new events occur.
Bold Text When an Asset, Device, or Point status contains a new

event, the change is displayed in bold.
Unacknowledged Alarms Column The Unacknowledged Alarms column displays a number

greater than 0, identifying all new events for the status
entry.
To acknowledges alarms for all currently displayed list entries, right-click in any empty space in
the List tab and choose Acknowledge Alarm(s).
Acknowledge Alarms
485/532
l When you acknowledge alarms within a hierarchy, all alarms for the selected node and its
children are acted upon.
l When you acknowledge alarms from the point level, only the alarms associated with the
selected point are acted upon.
l To acknowledge only selected alarms, use and to multiselect list entries.

Overview Tab - Tile View
When new alarm events occur, a notification icon is displayed in the upper right-hand corner of
the status tile:
After the events are acknowledged, the icon is not displayed:
If new alarm events occur after the previous events, the notification icon is displayed again.
To acknowledge alarms in the Overview tab, select the database or an asset group in the Assets
hierarchy or select the Devices hierarchy:
Optionally, sort the status tiles. In the Sort By field, select an option.
l For the Assets hierarchy, acknowledge events in one of three ways:

Single asset:
a. Right-click a single asset within a tile.
486/532
b. Click Acknowledge Alarm(s).
Entire status tile

a. Right-click an entire status tile.
Entire asset group or database

a. Right-click empty space surrounding the status tiles.
l For the Devices hierarchy, acknowledge events in one of two ways:
Single device:
487/532
a. Right-click a status tile.

Entire device group or database:

a. Right-click empty space surrounding the status tiles.
Acknowledging indicates you have evaluated the events and are aware of the problem.
Asset Diagram View

To create an Asset diagram view:
1. Select a train, asset, bearing, or point in the Assets hierarchy.

2. To acknowledge events, choose a method:
Single point
a. Right-click a point in the asset diagram grid.
488/532
Single asset
a. Right-click an asset within the asset diagram.
Entire train
a. Right-click empty space surrounding the asset diagram.
489/532
Suppress Events
(Machine Health Admin permissions required)

Suppress Events to prevent flooding System 1 with events from nuisance alarms. For example, if a
machine is known to be out of order and is producing repetitive alarms, you may choose to
suppress those events until the condition can be repaired.
You can suppress events on a machine train, device, and its children. When an event is
suppressed, new events on the selected node are not logged for the duration you specify.
To suppress system health events, for example, a KPH Lost event, select the monitor or
device in the Instrument hierarchy.
To suppress events on a machine train, device, and its children:
1. Choose Display mode.

2. In the Instrument hierarchy, right-click on the machine train or device displaying the
event you want to suppress.
3. Choose Event Management > Suppress Events. The Suppress Events dialog box is
displayed.
4. Select the Event Type you want to suppress for this hierarchy.
o Machine. Include both hardware and software alarms, for example, Level 1, 2, 3, and 4
software alarms, or Level 3 (Alert) and 4 (Danger) hardware alarms.
490/532
o Instrumentation. Generated by an instrumentation event source, for example,

Channel Not OK alarms.
o System health. Generated from a system health source, for example Kph Lost or
Management Kph Faulted.
o Transient. Generated during start up, shutdown, and overspeed conditions.
o User initiated. Generated for any user action, for example, a Channel Bypass or
Configuration Change.
5. Enter a Suppression Duration. When the duration ends, the event is automatically un-
suppressed and new events for the machine train and its assets are logged.
6. Shelve Active Alarms. When enabled (the default), the suppressed event type is not
propagated throughout the display workspace for the Suppression Duration.
o If enabled on a Tx server, the shelve action is replicated to the Rx server, except that
events configured on the Rx are not suppressed.
o If enabled on a Rx server, the shelve action affects all alarm events replicated from
the Tx server and those configured on the Rx server.
7. (Optional) Select Add Note. We recommend you enter the reason you suppressed the
event and the type of event suppressed. When you click Save, the Add Note dialog box is
displayed. Enter the note and click Save.
8. Click Save. The Alarms pane is updated based on the changes you made.
The Suppressed tab displays a log of the Events you suppressed. If Shelve Active Alarms is
enabled, the Activity field status for the suppressed event type is Shelved. The hierarchy status
color is refreshed. When the event suppression ends, the associated status is propagated
throughout the display workspace.
Event suppression ends when the Suppression Duration expires, or when you choose Event
Management > Unsuppress Events to manually resume viewing events.
To view notes entered in the Suppress Events dialog box, select the Case History > Notes tab.
View System Health
The displayed System Health events are filtered based on what you selected in the Assets or
Devices hierarchies. Only the events for the selected hierarchy entry are displayed.
View System Health
To view System Health, Choose the Display workspace, then Events > System Health. The System
Health grid displays a log of system activity.
View Plots from Alarms
View Plots Using an Alarm

To view plots using an asset's alarm events:
491/532
1. From the Display workspace, choose Events.

2. Select the Alarms tab.
3. Select an asset in the Machines or Devices hierarchy. The asset's alarm events are
displayed in the central pane.
4. Double-click an alarm. A plot set in the split mode is displayed:
o For an asset selected in the Devices hierarchy, the application highlights the point
for which the alarm has occurred.
o For an asset selected in the Machines hierarchy, the application determines which
node to highlight using the point type:
Point Type Node Highlighted in Machines Hierarchy
Recip Throw
Vibration Bearing
Default Point
o In the Measurements pane, the application selects relevant spectrum and

waveform measurement and trended variables.
o In the Mini-Trend dialog box, the application sets the time range using the data
type:
Data Type Time Range
Three months before the start of the alarm and

Non-portable
one month after
One hour before the start of the alarm and

Portable
10 minutes after
o On a Trend plot, the application moves the cursor to the time at which the alarm
started. All samples on dynamic plots also reflect the time to which the cursor
points.
o The application adds the speed measurement to Trend plots.
Plot Types for Points

System 1 uses the point for which the alarm was created to determine which plots to display in
the central pane:
492/532
Point on a Device Plots Displayed
Trend (Overlaid)
Orbit (Overlaid)
Radial Vibration
Spectrum (Stacked)
Spectrum (Waterfall)
Recip (Overlaid)
Recip Compressor
Trend (Overlaid)
Trend (Overlaid)
Timebase (Stacked)
All other points
Spectrum (Stacked)
Spectrum (Waterfall)
Plots from Transient Events

When you double-click a transient event:
l The associated plots are displayed.

l Mini-Trend date range resets to the event time range starting 30 minutes prior to the event
and ending 30 minutes after the event.
l The existing Quick plot session is retained.
l If current values mode is active, the plot session reverts to historical mode.
Copy Events To Clipboard
The Copy feature allows you to copy to the clipboard for pasting in other software. Example
compatible software includes Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel.
Events can be copied to the clipboard using these methods:
Action Type Action Description
Shortcut Keys
Right-click Menu Copy to clipboard
4.9 Manage History Tasks
493/532
Use the Case History tab to create and edit:
l Case History Reviews. See Manage Case History Reviews.

l Plot Records. See Display External Plot Windows.
l Notes. See Manage Case History Notes.
Manage Case History Reviews
To copy reviews content to third-party applications, select one or more reviews and press
CTRL+C.
Create a Review
Choose one of two ways to create a review:
Use the Machine hierarchy

1. Select the asset in the Machine hierarchy to which you want to attach a review.
2. Right-click on the asset and choose Machine Management > Review Faults.
Select the Review pane.

1. Select the Review pane.
2. Right-click on the Review pane and choose Review Faults.
494/532
3. Add a fault condition. Click in the top right corner of the Review Faults dialog box.
4. The Review Faults dialog box is displayed. The asset or Devices hierarchy is displayed at
the top of the dialog box.
5. Modify the fault Location and Condition as needed.
6. In the Details pane, select a Priority, enter comments as needed, and choose Flag for
Next Review.
495/532
7. Click Save. The Reviews pane displays your equipment review. You may need to scroll to
the right to view all of the Manage Case History Reviews.
View a Review
To view equipment reviews, select a node from the Assets hierarchy:
l When the node signifies a group, System 1 displays all reviews attached to assets below
the selection.
l When the node represents a train or machine, System 1 displays all reviews attached to the
parent train or machine.
Sort Reviews
You can sort reviews by every field except Asset.
To sort reviews, click a column header:
496/532

headers.
Priority and Fault Condition fields are sorted by their enum values. All other fields are
sorted alphabetically.
Delete a Review
To delete a review:
1. From the Reviews tab, select one or more reviews. To select multiple notes, press
+click or +click.
2. Right-click and choose Delete. You can also use the Delete key.
3. Click OK to confirm deletion.
Manage Plot Records

A plot record is a dynamic report that is saved as part of a machine's case history. When re-
launching a Plot Record from Case History, all plot types, tools, time ranges, and measurements
that were part of the plot view are reopened, enabling you to continue investigating a machine
condition or for other team members to pick up where you ended.
View a Plot Set

To view a Plot Record:

2. Choose Case History > Plot Records. Select the plot record you want to view.
o Right-click on a plot record and choose Open in New Window.
o Double-click on the plot record.
The plot record is displayed in a new window.

o When viewing plots in an external window, the time span applies only to those plots.
o To restore the plot widow to the main window, drag the window over the main
window dock location.
o If the asset selection has changed in the main windows after the plot tab was moved
to an external window, you can not return the external tab to the main dialog box.
Sort Plot Records

To sort plot records, click a column header:
497/532

headers.
Copy Plot Records

To copy plot records content to third-party applications, select one or more plot records and
press .
Manage Case History Notes
To copy Notes content to third-party applications, select one or more notes and press CTRL+C.
Create a Note
To create a note:
1. Select the asset or device in the Machine or Device hierarchy to which you want to attach
a note. Right-click on the asset or device. Alternatively, right-click on:
o The Notes pane. Choose Add Review.
o The Status tab, a status entry in the List.
o The Status tab, on a Bar Graph
o The Status tab, on a Diagram.
2. Choose Event Management > Add Note.
3. The Add Note dialog box is displayed.

4. In the Notes pane, right-click and click Add Note. The Add Note dialog box is displayed.
5. The asset or Devices hierarchy is displayed at the top of the dialog box. Select a Note Type
and enter additional relevant information.
498/532
6. These special characters are not allowed:

o Ampersand &
o Brackets []
o Apostrophe or single quote '
o Quote "
o Exclamation mark !
o Less than symbol <
o Greater than symbol >
7. Click Save. The Notes pane displays your note. You may need to scroll to the right to view
all of the Manage Case History Notes.
Edit a Note
To edit a note:
499/532
1. Double-click a note, or right-click the note and choose Edit Note. the Edit Note dialog box is
displayed.
2. Modify the Note and Comments as needed.
500/532
3. Choose Save.
View Machine Notes

To view notes belonging to a specific Machines hierarchy, or all notes:
2. Only notes attached to the database hierarchy level are displayed in the Notes tab.
3. To view all notes, in the Notes tab, click . All notes within the database are displayed.
Delete a Note
To delete a note:
1. From the Notes tab, select one or more notes. To select multiple notes, press +click or
+click.
2. Right-click and choose Delete. You can also press .
3. Click OK to confirm deletion.
4.10 Manage Data

From the Machines hierarchy, right-click on an asset and choose Data Management:
Delete Data
Delete Asset Data

You can only delete samples from portable points.
To delete data samples:
1. From the Assets hierarchy, select the hierarchy level from which you want to delete data.
To display:
o Only data associated with that asset, select a single asset.
o All data associated with assets in the group, select a group. (Individual sample
information is not displayed.)
2. Right-click the hierarchy entry and choose Manage Data > Delete. The Delete Data dialog
box is displayed.
501/532
All items below are displayed from the perspective of the Move Data From location.
502/532
Field Description
Start Time The start date and time of the time range from which you wish to
delete data.
End Time The end date and time of the time range from which you wish to
delete data.
For all selections, the time range must be shorter than one
year.
Path The asset path with which the sample is associated.
Measurement The measurement name with which the sample is associated.
Value The value of the sample for the displayed Sample Date and Time.
Sample Date and The date and time at which the measurement sample was
Time recorded.
3. Select the samples you want to delete.

o Use the time range controls to filter which samples you want to delete. All samples
within the time range are deleted; you cannot delete individual samples.
o All spectrums and waveforms associated with all points beneath the selected
hierarchy entry are displayed.
o If trended variables are not associated with a spectrum or waveform, any trended
variables associated with the points beneath the selected hierarchy entry are
displayed .
o If you delete a sample of a spectrum or waveform, the sample is also deleted from
any trended variable associated with the spectrum or waveform.
4. Click Delete.
Affect on Alarms
l If a sample that triggered an alarm is deleted, the alarm event created by that sample is
also deleted, and the alarm events are recalculated based on the last collected sample.
l If an alarm was exited due to the last collected sample for a point and that sample is
deleted, the alarm is reactivated.
l If a sample that did not trigger an alarm is deleted but is not the last sample collected, the
alarm events list is unaffected.
l Deleting all samples deletes all alarm events.
Move Data
503/532
Limitations
The following limitations apply when you move data samples to another train in your database:
l Data samples can only be moved from portable points.

l Trended Variables are deleted, then recalculated.
l BPFI, BPFO, and Crest Factor are not supported and are not recalculated.
l Only the latest sample is capable of generating alarms.
Move Train Data

To move train data:
1. Identify the hierarchy entry from which you wish to move data. This can be at the train
level or lower.
2. Right-click on the hierarchy entry and click Manage Data > Move Data From.
3. Right-click the on hierarchy entry to which you wish to move the data, and click Manage
Data > Move Data To. The Move Data dialog box is displayed.
504/532
All items below are displayed from the perspective of the Move Data From location.
505/532
Field Description
Start Time The start date and time of the time range from which you wish to
delete data.
End Time The end date and time of the time range from which you wish to
delete data.
For all selections, the time range must be shorter than one
year.
Path The asset path with which the sample is associated.
Measurement The measurement name with which the sample is associated.
Value The value of the sample for the displayed Sample Date and Time.
Sample Date and The date and time at which the measurement sample was
Time recorded.
4. Select the samples you want to move and click Move.
Export Hierarchy Data to CSV

System 1 allows you to export raw data, a selected time range of unprocessed waveforms and
spectrums, to CSV format for use in third-party applications. This option is available on a
machine train, devices, and all its children.
Export Data to .CSV file
To export data to a .CSV file:
1. In the Assets or the Devices hierarchy, select the hierarchy level from which you want to
export data.
2. Right-click on the machine train or the device. Choose Export Data to CSV. The Export
Data to CSV dialog box is displayed.
506/532
a. Select the path in which you want to save the data.

b. Choose a Start Time and End Time.
If the Plots tab is active, the time range default is the current Mini-Trend Bar.
Otherwise, the time range default is the past seven day period
c. (Optional) Choose Include Invalid Data. For details, see Include Invalid Data.
3. Click Save. A single .CSV file is created for every dynamic measurement that is a child of the
selected hierarchy component.
All unprocessed waveforms and spectrums under the node you select are exported. The time
required to save data varies depending on the time range included in the exported data.
The notification icon in the System 1 footer bar displays the file export status. To cancel file
export, right-click on the notification icon and click X. When prompted, confirm cancellation.
Create Machine Audit Files
507/532
To facilitate remote diagnostics and reporting, you can create machine audit files in System 1
and share them with other users of the application.
About Machine Audit Files

l When you open a machine audit file, you can:
o View mapped devices and their configuration.
o View data for the measurements mapped to the machine for which the audit file has
been created.
o View event and status indicators.
o Modify configuration of assets or devices.
o Save plot records and change piston angle.
o Create and delete compensation and comparison data sets.
o Use the Mini-Trend Bar to view the start and end time for which an audit file has been
created.
l Audit files contain information about a machine train for a specific time interval:
o Configuration data
o Event data
o Data collected from measurements
l You can create an audit file for a multiple asset locations in a single transaction.
You cannot set speed data or add trended variables to an asset or device.
Create Machine Audit File

When you create a machine audit file, System 1 stores the content as a compressed file.
You can not save the audit file to the desktop.
To create a machine audit file:

2. In the Machines or Devices hierarchy pane, select and right-click on a supported location:
Database
Group / Device Group
Machine Train /Device
Asset that is not part of a train
3. Choose Data Management > Create Audit File.

4. The Machine Audit File dialog box is displayed.
5. In the General pane,
a. Enter a name for the audit file.
b. Click Select Locations. The Select Locations dialog box is displayed.
508/532
6. In the Available Locations pane, select the supported locations (described above) for
which you want to create an audit file.
7. Click the arrow to move them to the Selected Locations pane.
8. When complete, click Save. The Machine Audit File dialog box is displayed.
9. In the General pane, select the Save to field. Navigate to and select a local or network
directory to which you have access. You can not save the audit file to the following folders:
o System directories used by Windows operating system
o Program Files
If necessary, you may need to modify the rights see Database Administration Guide
10. In the Details pane:

o Select the data range start day and time. System 1 selects a default start day and
time from the mini trend time bar.
o Select the data range end day and time. System 1 selects a default end day and time
from the mini trend time bar.
o (Optional) Select the data types to include in the audit file. For details, see Online and
Scanning Data Store Properties.
System 1 displays the estimated amount of disk space required to store the audit file.
11. Click Save. System 1 compresses the data and saves the audit file. Log files are stored in
this default directory:
C:\Users\{user_name}\Documents\System 1 Evolution\ArchiveLogs
Cancel Creating a Machine Audit File

To cancel creation of a machine audit file:
1. Select the notification icon for the machine audit file in the System 1 footer menu bar. A
message and a progress bar are displayed.

2. To cancel, click .
You are prompted to confirm the cancellation.

3. Click Yes.
Open a Machine Audit File

You can open machine audit files created by System 1 18.1 or newer versions. To open an Audit
file, you must install complete System 1 without any license. All required generic device plugins
509/532
must be installed on the System 1 client.
When you open a machine audit file, System 1 uncompresses the data and saves the file in the
Stores directory where System 1 databases are kept. The default location of the Stores folder is:
C:\ProgramData\GE Bently Nevada\System 1.
If you open an audit file created in a different time zone, the date and time of data is
adjusted to your local time zone.
To open a machine audit file:
1. Choose File from System 1 main menu, and click Open. The Welcome to System 1 dialog
box is displayed.
2. Choose Open Audit File . The Windows Open dialog box is displayed.
3. Navigate to the directory where the machine audit file is, and select the file. If all required
generic device plugins are installed on the System 1 client, the application displays the
audit file in Display workspace. Otherwise, an error message is displayed.
510/532
Close a Machine Audit File

To close a machine audit file:
1. Choose File > Close. You are prompted to confirm that you want to retain the
uncompressed data from the audit file for faster access later:
o Choose Yes to keep the uncompressed data.
o Choose No to remove the uncompressed data.
System 1 does not delete the audit file from the directory where it is stored.
4.11 Export Using OPC Protocol

Select Data Sources
You can select and manage System 1 tags and export tags as OPC items.
To manage data sources:
1. Choose Configure.
2. Select the Machines or the Devices hierarchy.
3. Choose Tools > Data Export. The OPC Export Manager dialog box is displayed.
511/532
4. To select data sources, click Add Sources . The Add Data Sources dialog box is
displayed.
5. In the Hierarchy field, choose Devices or Machines.

6. Check All or select the specific sources you want to export.
7. Click Select.The OPC Export Manager dialog box displays the sources you selected.
8. Click Export to CSV . The Windows Save As dialog box is displayed.
9. Enter a file name and click Save.
Data Sources in Export Manager

All tags from the selected data sources are displayed into the OPC Export Manager dialog box.
The S1 Path and Item Path only display partial paths. To view full path names, hover the mouse
over the path.
Add Alias Names
512/532
The sources you selected are displayed in the OPC Export Manager dialog box. Unknown alias
names are displayed with a "?" sign. Optionally, enter an Alias Name for each source.
Alias names:
l Must be unique through the database.

l Are restricted to 50 characters.
After you enter all Alias Names, click OK, then choose File > Save. To reset an Alias Name to the
unknown state, right-click and select "Set value to unknown."
Configure OPC UA Server for Export

OPC UA is an open source set of standards designed as a universal communications protocol.
About the OPC UA Server

OPC UA Server Manager for System 1 is a separate application from System 1. It is installed with
System 1, and you can also install it on additional client computers if needed.
Use the OPC UA server to:
l Export the machine hierarchy, spectrums and waveforms data, static data, setpoint
values, alarm events, and NOT OK instrumentation alarms from System 1 to third party
systems.
l Export data from multiple PostgreSQL databases while data collection is enabled.
l Export waveforms from up to eight replicated databases, equivalent to one fully loaded
System 1 Server.
l Connect up to 20 clients to a single OPC UA server.
We support multiple deployment models. Two possible models are described in OPC UA Server
Deployment Scenarios. You can find others in third-party OPC UA deployment guides.
Spectrum and waveform data is exported via the OPC UA server at the spectrum and
waveform data storage rate set is System 1 Preferences. The device-calculated spectrums
and the waveforms stored in System 1 are exported as part of OPC UA Server.
Configure the OPC UA Server

Before you can export data via OPC UA, you must configure the OPC UA Server.
To configure the OPC UA server:
1. Launch OPC UA Server Manager. In Windows, choose Start > System 1 OPC UA Server
Manager. Right-click and choose Run as Administrator. The OPC UA Server Manager
window is displayed.
2. In the EndPoints tab, enter:
o Port. The default is 7560.
o Server Name. The default is System1OPCUAServer.
513/532
o Security Modes. Accept Sign and Encrypt, or enter the security modes required by
the third-party clients, if any.
o Security Policies. Accept Basic256Sha256, or enter the security policies required by
the third-party clients, if any.
3. Click Next. In the User Authentication tab, select the type of user authentication required
by the OPC UA third-party clients, if any. If you select Username and Password, you can
add a new user:
a. Click the Add User button . The Add/Update Users dialog box is displayed.
b. Enter the new Username and Password. Click Save. The new user and their default
access rights are displayed in the Username pane.
4. The Application Instance Certificate for System 1 OPC UA Server is installed with System 1. In
the third party OPC UA client, you must Trust this certificate.
5. In third party OPC UA client, select a matching Authentication Settings method and enter
the matching values.
6. If the third-party certificate is not displayed, click Save.
514/532
7. (Optional) If required, create third-party certificates.

8. Choose Certificates pane. If required, a third-party UA client displays a certificate. To
accept the certificate, right-click the certificate and choose Trust. To complete
acceptance, you must close and restart the OPC UA Server Manager. The OPC UA server
uses 2048 bit encryption.
9. Click Save. Historical data collected prior to configuration is not exported.
When you complete configuring the OPC UA server, data export begins.
Supported Spectrum/Waveform Data Types

System 1 supports these Spectrum/Waveform types.
Sync Async Sync

Device Type Async Spectrum
Waveform Waveform Spectrum
3500
3701
2300
Ranger Pro
vbOnline Pro
Trendmaster
Portables
6.x ‡
Connector
‡Supported only when you import a Trendmaster device as a 6.x device. See 6.x Connector Data
Sources and Collection Rate.
Export Data and Alarms to OPC UA Clients

You can export both static and waveform data.
Export Spectrum and Waveform Data

The System 1 OPC UA server only exports the type of data received. For example, if a 3500 is
returning only waveform data, OPC UA exports only waveform, not spectrum data. Only
spectrum data returned from devices is exported by OPC UA server.
To view Spectrum and Waveform data:
515/532
1. Use a third-party OPC UA client to connect to System1OPCUAServer.

2. Browse the System 1 hierarchy.
3. Expand the hierarchy to display the Spectrum and Waveform data.
4. Subscribe to the spectrum and waveform data you want to view. The Display Name
indicates the kind of measurements displayed. Data is exported via the OPC UA server at
the spectrum and waveform data storage rate. These properties are displayed in the
OPC UA client.
516/532
MeasurementID System 1 unique ID for the measurement
UTCTimestamp Spectrum/waveform time stamp in UTC format
NumberOfSamples Total number of waveform samples.
l Waveform: waveform samples

l Spectrum: spectral lines
SampleTypeID Spectrum / Waveform Type Type Code
Async Waveform 1
Sync Waveform 2
Async Spectrum 3
Async Demod Spectrum 4
Async Demod Waveform 5
Sync Demod Waveform 6
Crank Angle Sync Waveform 7
Crank Angle Sync Waveform Ex 8
Sync Spectrum 9
Sync Demod Spectrum 10
Data Spectrum/waveform amplitude values.
UnitName Name of the spectrum/waveform unit (mil, um...)
Unit OPC UA code for the unit (available from the OPC Foundation).
SubunitName Name of the spectrum sub unit (pk,rms, pp)
Subunit Sub Unit

System 1 Sub Unit
Code
None 0
dpp 1
pk 3
dpk 4
rms 5
517/532
pp 6
DataStatus Status
System 1 Data Status
Code
OK 0
Invalid 1†
Not OK 2
Invalid and Not OK 3

† Possible causes: data may be invalid; device is not communicating;
measurement or channel is inactive; the channel or database has been
deleted.
NodeStatus Status
System 1 Node Status
Code
OK 0
Not OK 1
SourceNotCommunicating 16384†
SourceInactive 32768‡
† Device is not communicating.
‡ Possible causes: measurement or channel is inactive; the channel or

database has been deleted.
Fmax Fmax for the spectrum or waveform
FmaxUnitName Fmax Unit (Hz)
RPM Speed for the spectrum or waveform
SamplingPeriod Time interval between two waveform samples
SamplingPeriodUnitName Sampling period unit(s)
SamplingPeriodUnit Sampling period unit code
ACCoupled Waveform is AC Coupled? True or false
DCOffset DC offset value
AlgorithmType 0
KPHIndices Sample on which Kph hits occurred
518/532
RevolutionSpeed Speed in RPM for each revolution
PistonAngle Piston angle for recip waveforms
PairedMeasurementID Paired channel System 1 Guid (X or Y)
Export Static Data

You can export static data from all configured Trended Variables within a System 1 database via
the OPC UA Server. The export includes the State Variable which is used to track the operating
state (Running, Slow Roll, Machine Off, and so forth).
To view static data:
1. Use a third-party OPC UA client to connect to System1OPCUAServer.

3. Expand the hierarchy to display the Trended Variables. The measurements, along with EU
Range (Top scale, Bottom Scale), units and subunits, are displayed.
4. Subscribe to the static data you want to view. The measurements export the data type
and data quality information along with data value and its time stamp.
Static data is exported at the fastest data historization export rate set in System 1 Preferences.
Export Alarm Events

You can export Protection Alarm, Condition Monitoring Alarm, and Not OK Instrumentation alarm
events to third party OPC UA clients. This includes the machine state (Running, Slow Roll, and so
forth). To view alarm events, users can subscribe to the Trended Variables node in the System 1
OPC UA address space from any OPC UA compliant client. Information is updated when an alarm
enters, exits, is acknowledged, latched, or the latch is reset.
To view alarm events:
1. Use a third-party OPC UA client to connect to System 1 OPC UA Server.

3. Expand the hierarchy to display the node containing the alarm events you want to export.
4. Subscribe to the alarm events you want to view. The OPC UA client displays these
properties.
Alarm Event Properties
ConditionId NodeID
EventId EventID from System 1
EventType NonExclusiveLevelAlarmType
519/532
SourceNode SourceNodeID
SourceName ItemPath of Node that caused Alarm
Time Entered Timestamp (UTC)
Message Comment related to Enter/Exit of Alarm
Severity OPC Severity (Refer Severity Mapping Table)
ConditionName Alarm Type with Alarm Level
ActiveState Active for Entered Alarm
ActiveState/Id TRUE
ActiveState/TransitionTime
Sample time
Trigger Value Trigger Value in System 1 for that Alarm
Quality Good
AckedState Unacknowledged/Acknowledged
AckedState/ID Boolean – TRUE/FALSE
AckedState/Transition
Timestamp when Alarm went from UnAck to Ack
Time
Latched State Latched/Unlatched
Latched State/ID Boolean - TRUE/FALSE
Latched State/Transition
Timestamp of Latched Alarm Event/Reset Latch
Time
Bently Nevada Event Severity Mapping
OPC Severity for

OPC Severity for OPC Severity for
System 1 Severity Instrumentation
CM Alarm Protection Alarm
Alarm
0 1 1 1
1 220 225 250
2 445 450 500
3 695 700 750
4 945 950 1000
Export System Health Events
520/532
You can export these system health events to third-party OPC UA clients:
l Instrumentation events (for example, Speed DSP failure, TIM not responding).
l Transient events (for example, Entered Startup, Exited Shutdown).
l System events (for example, Kph lost, Switch to primary Kph, Not Communicating).
l User-initiated events (for example, Entered Suppression, Monitor configuration updated).
To view system health events:

3. Expand the hierarchy to display the node containing the system health events you want
to export.
4. Subscribe to the system health events you want to view. The OPC UA clients displays the
events.
Export Setpoint Values

System 1 OPC UA Server allows you to export configured setpoint values, including Protection,
Standard Condition Monitoring, and State-based Condition Monitoring alarm setpoints.
To view setpoint values:

3. Expand the hierarchy to display the node containing the trended variables and the
setpoint values you want to export.
4. Subscribe to the setpoint values you want to view. The System 1 alarm levels map to these
OPC severity types:
System 1 Alarm
OPC Severity Type
Levels
Severity 4 HighHighLimit
Severity 3 HighLimit
Severity 2 LowLimit
Severity 1 LowLowLimit
Portable Database Support

To export static data, dynamic data and alarm and events through OPC UA Server, you need to
configure multiple portable databases for online data collection.
You need an OPC UA Export License based on the export capability (static, waveform,
alarm events).
521/532
OPC UA Server Deployment Scenarios

Only one OPC UA server per System 1 server is possible.
Here are two possible ways to configure the OPC UA Server, System 1 databases, and
OPC UA clients. You can find others in OPC UA deployment guides.
Multiple System 1 Databases Connecting to One OPC UA Server

Multiple instances of System 1 and OPC UA Server all transmitting data to one OPC UA client.
l An OPC UA server can export waveform data from all Bently devices.

l A System 1 server can export a maximum of 3000 waveforms (sync and async) from 3500
devices via OCP UA.
l Each OPC UA Server must have its own license.
Multiple System 1 Transmitter Databases Connecting to a Replicated

Database
Multiple instances of System 1 transmitting data to replicated databases.
l Spectrum/waveform data is exported from databases via a OPC UA server residing on the

same replicated server.
l The maximum number of waveforms (sync and async) is determined by the replication
capability.
l Data is exported to an OPC UA server on the same replicated database server. It exports
data from all the replicated databases via VPN to a OPC UA client.
522/532
Configure OPC UA Third-party Certificates

When you add a OPC UA server, the third-party client application may not be connected to
System 1 and the required certificate is not displayed.
To create a third-party certificate and accept it:
1. In the OPC UA Server Manager EndPoints tab, select and copy the value displayed in the
UA TCP field.
2. Minimize System 1 but leave it running.
3. Right click on the third-party certificate application and choose Run as Administrator.
4. In the third-party certificate application, create a new connection.
5. Paste the UA TCP value.
6. In Security Settings, choose Sign & Encrypt, or enter the custom setting required by the
third-party certificate manager.
7. In Security Policy, choose Basic256Sha256, or enter the custom setting required by the
third-party certificate manager.
8. Save the certificate. When prompted, accept the certificate permanently.
523/532
9. If an error message displays, ignore the message and click OK.

10. Close the third-party certificate application.
11. Exit the OPC UA Server Manager.
12. To restart OPC UA Server Manager, right-click on the application and choose Run as
Administrator.
13. Select the Certificates tab. The new certificate is displayed.
14. Right-click on the new certificate and choose Trust. The certificate is displayed with a
green check mark.
Use OPC DA Client to Access Data

Browse OPC DA Server
You can use a third-party OPC client to browse System 1 OPC DA Server and access configured
nodes in a System 1 database.
To export OPC data, you can browse the:
l Machines hierarchy
l Devices hierarchy
The OPC Server features:
l A flat and hierarchical method to browse OPC items to the measurement level

l Inactive and disabled points and measurements
Browse for OPC Tags

This procedure is based on the Kepware Quick Client third-party software product. The
procedure for other OPC client software is similar.
To browse for OPC tags:
1. Configure a device in System 1.

2. Verify that the database is online.
3. Open Kepware OPC Quick Client and connect to System 1 OPC Server. The server is
displayed as System1OPCServer.1. See Export to an OPC DA Server .
4. Right-click on the System 1 OPC server node in the OPC Client and add New Group.
524/532
5. Right-click on the group and choose Add Item. The Add Items dialog box is displayed.
6. Browse through nodes:

o Browse root node for the list of online databases.
o Browse database node for Machines and Devices root nodes.
o Browse Devices node: Database > Devices > Device name > Channel name
> Measurement name
o Browse Machines node: Database > Machines > Train/Asset name > Channel name >
Measurement name
Export Data as OPC Items

You can export data from System 1 as OPC items. These conditions apply:
l Online Data Collection must be enabled in order to export OPC data.

l Data export is available for all license packages except Fundamental.
For more details, see OPC DA Server.
Export Units
Exports OPC points whose data types are float or compatible with the float data type.
525/532
To export units:

2. Right-click on an OPC Group, and choose Export > Units. The Windows Save As dialog box
is displayed.
4. Enter a file name. Remember the name of the file and the location in which you saved the
file.
5. Choose Save.
The .CSV file contains a list of supported units in System 1 including:
l Unit Group
l Unit
l Description
To ensure System 1 reads the units of the incoming measurement data correctly, copy and
paste the units from this file into the OPC .CSV file you use to import data.
System 1 OPC Tags Information

This tag information is exported in the order displayed:
OPC Tags
Information
Channel Name
Tag Name
Machine Name
Program ID
Item Path
Data Type
Unit
Description
Min Scale
Max Scale
Export to an OPC DA Server

Overview
526/532
The OPC DA Server for System 1 provides real-time data access from the System 1 platform to
third party OPC client systems using OPC DA 2.05 and 3.0 protocols. The server provides access to
all the configured nodes in the System 1 database.
The OPC DA Server supports a maximum of 10 client connections. Any connections beyond this
amount fail to connect to the server, and error messages may be displayed. For details, see
Troubleshoot OPC Errors in online help.
If using OPC DA 3.0 Client, ensure tunneller software or redundancy broker software is OPC
DA 3.0 compliant.
Connect to the System 1 OPC DA Exporter

An external OPC Client requires the following information to connect to System 1 OPC DA exporter:
l The System 1 OPC DA Server resides on the same machine as the System 1 Server collecting
the data.
l The System 1 OPC DA server Program ID is a unique ID that is required by the OPC Clients to
connect to an OPC Server. The Program ID is:
o GE.BentlyNevada.Sys1OPCServer.1 for System 1 16.2
o GE.BentlyNevada.Sys1OPCServer.2 for System 1 17.1
o System1OPCServer.1 for System 1 20.2
l An OPC Client can specify any unique OPC Group name from which it intends to collect
data.
l The OPC Item ID is the data source from which data is to be retrieved by the System 1 OPC
DA Exporter. This is available through the .CSV file exported from the System 1 configuration.
An OPC Client can only connect to the System 1 OPC DA exporter when online data
collection is enabled for the database in System 1.
Supported Interfaces
The System 1 OPC DA server supports the following interfaces for data collection:
l 2.0 Asynchronous Reads

l 2.0 Synchronous Reads
l 3.0 Asynchronous Reads
l 3.0 Synchronous Reads
Update Rates
The System 1 OPC DA server supports update rates of one second and slower.
OPC Clients can specify the update rate for their data groups.
The OPC DA Exporter supports external OPC data groups with different update rates.
Exported OPC Item Details

Data and Quality Properties
527/532
The following OPC item properties are always exported:
OPC Item Properties
Canonical Data Type
Source ID (Item Name)
Current Data Value
Quality
Timestamp
Access Rights
Supported Data Types

The following data types are supported:
l VT_R4
l VT_I4
Exported State Information

System 1 exports state information in a long value number format. The following is a table
detailing the expected long value for each state that can be exported:
528/532
State Name Long Value
Standard 0
Start up/Shutdown 8192
Machine Off 16384
Slow Roll 32768
Running 65536
start up 1024
Shutdown 2048
Overspeed 4096
Operating State 1 562949953421312
Operating State 9 144115188075855872
Operating State 10 288230376151711744
Operating State 11 576460752303423488
Operating State 12 1152921504606846976
Operating State 13 2305843009213693952
Operating State 14 4611686018427387904
Operating State 15 9223372036854775808
Limitations
l System 1 does not support item browsing through the OPC Client.
l Deadband is not supported.
529/532
5. Installation Errors
Pending System Reboot Detected
If System 1 fails to install after multiple attempts and system reboots, there is a batch file provided
that disables the system reboot detection.
To locate the batch file, navigate to the System 1 installation files:
Double-click to run this file.
530/532
Since this bypasses any system reboot, you must manually reboot your system once
installation is completed.
Unable to Repair Client-only Installation

If errors occur during or after performing a Client-only installation, you cannot use the Change
feature of the Windows Uninstall a program application.
To repair a Client-only installation, insert the System 1 installation disk and choose the Repair
option.
The installer must restart your system before configuration of System 1 can
continue. Click Yes to restart now or No if you plan to restart later.
Your computer needs to reboot for a successful installation, choose Yes.
If you continue without rebooting the computer, you may get the following message:
Reboot your computer, then restart System 1 installation again.
In upgrade scenarios, if you cancel the installation of System 1, then a restart must be performed
to get the earlier version of System 1 to function correctly. Failure to restart might result in an
error while launching System 1.
531/532
6. Support Options
Bently Nevada Technical Service Agreements
You need to get the most out of your production assets. Your goal is to meet production
commitments while lowering operating and maintenance expenses. We work with you to
accomplish that goal. A service agreement from Bently Nevada product line is a customized
asset care service program designed to maximize the value of your investment in asset
condition monitoring technology. We’ll ensure your system is properly maintained and being
used to its full potential. To learn more about our support agreements, visit Bently Nevada Tech
Support.
License Agreements
To open and read your license agreement, in System 1, choose Help > About > License
Agreement. Other license agreements are in the Resources/License Agreements directory
where System 1 is installed.
Bently Nevada Support

All Bently Nevada asset condition monitoring products are covered by a renewable Technical
Support Agreement. Support options includes self-help resources such as manuals, expert
knowledge libraries, software downloads, and telephone and e-mail support. Visit Bently Nevada
Tech Support. Registration is required.
532/532

System 1 Machinery Management User Guide - 109M8639

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

System 1 Machinery Management User Guide - 109M8639

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

System 1 Machinery Management

Copyright 2021 Baker Hughes Company. All rights reserved.

1631 Bently Parkway South, Minden, Nevada USA 89423

Display Bently Performance 69

Configure Wind Turbine Properties 237

4.2 Display Plots 347

Copy Plot 398

Review Fault Conditions 471

1. License and Registration

1.1 Install System 1 and License Server

To install and license System 1:

1. Access the Licensing Portal

If you are running System

On a single machine Is automatically installed on the same machine.

Can be installed manually as a standalone server on a

To install the License Manager manually:

a. In the expanded System 1 download package,

1.2 Register License Server

To register a License Server:

1. Launch System 1 License Manager.

4. Enter your Activation ID, found in one of these locations:

13. Access the Licensing portal

The License Server is registered.

1.3 Add Licenses to a License Server

To map additional licenses to a License Server:

1. Visit the Licensing portal (https://bhge.flexnetoperations.com/flexnet/operationsportal)

1.4 Manage System 1 Server Licenses

Assign License to System 1 Server

To assign a license to a System 1 Server:

1. Launch System 1 License Manager.

Remove License from a System 1 Server

To remove licenses assigned to a System 1 server:

1. Launch License Manager.

The license is returned to License Server's pool of licenses.

Revoke a System 1 Server License

To revoke licenses assigned to a System 1 server:

1. Launch License Manager.

The licenses are available on the License Server for reuse.

Move a System 1 License Server

To move the System 1 License Server to a new computer:

1. Visit the Licensing portal (https://bhge.flexnetoperations.com/flexnet/operationsportal)

1.5 System 1 License Options

Install System 1 and License Server

1. Log into a Windows administrator account.

License Manager Overview

Fundamental Monitor offline data collected with portable devices only.

Premium Plus Combines Fundamental and Premium packages.

Wind Monitor wind turbines using vbOnline Pro devices.

Available License Add-ons

Type Term Description

Enhanced Condition Monitoring with Rules and

Enhanced Condition Monitoring with Rules and

Data Storage Restrictions

Condition Monitoring Restrictions

Alarm & Event List

Client View Restrictions

Quick Config Tool - -

1.6 License Proficy Add-on

Start Proficy License Client

1. From Windows Start menu, choose All Programs.

Proficy License Server

To install the local license server:

1. Navigate to Proficy License Manager folder on the System 1 installation disk.

System 1 does not recognize a Proficy license has been applied.